summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf/doc
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2008-06-15 00:46:16 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2008-06-15 00:46:16 +0000
commit310879a3c5868a81753450c3ca110fa3e1515d38 (patch)
tree7e5443f08778be818dd05fba3f0e97d581b0d5ca /Master/texmf/doc
parentc4a7e2faa4c3a6950b476ee6b0a3bda624b4a78a (diff)
latex2e-help-texinfo update, unofficial latex reference manual; remove old instances; .info install done by hand
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@8743 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf/doc')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/info/latex.info4309
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info6992
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.html6090
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.pdfbin460963 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.html6090
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.pdfbin461229 -> 0 bytes
6 files changed, 6992 insertions, 16489 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex.info b/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex.info
deleted file mode 100644
index 05e8a79a75c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex.info
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4309 +0,0 @@
-This is latex.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.7 from latex2e.texi.
-
-INFO-DIR-SECTION TeX
-START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
-* LaTeX2e: (latex). LaTeXe help 1.6.
-END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
-
- This file documents LaTeX2e, a document preparation system. LaTeX2e
-is a macro package for TeX.
-
- This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation, and is for the
-Texinfo that is distributed as part of Version 19 of GNU Emacs. It uses
-version 2.134 or later of the texinfo.tex input file.
-
- This is translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The
-pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam
-Houston State University.
-
- The LaTeX 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore
-<stg@dcs.ed.ac.uk>.
-
- The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen
-<bullestock@dk-online.dk>.
-
- Copyright 1988,1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright
-1994-1996 Torsten Martinsen.
-
- Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-preserved on all copies.
-
- Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
-this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
-the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
- Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that the sections entitled "Distribution" and "General
-Public License" may be included in a translation approved by the author
-instead of in the original English.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Top, Next: Overview, Prev: (dir), Up: (dir)
-
- LaTeX2e is a document preparation system implemented as a macro
-package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program.
-
- LaTeX was originally conceived by Leslie Lamport.
-
- This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation.
-
-* Menu:
-
-
-* Overview:: What is LaTeX?
-* Commands:: Commands within a LaTeX document.
-* Parameters:: The command line.
-* Command Index:: An alphabetical list of LaTeX commands.
-* Concept Index:: An alphabetical list of concepts.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Overview, Next: Commands, Prev: Top, Up: Top
-
-1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide
-***********************************
-
-The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the
-LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it processes an input
-file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that
-describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least three
-files as output:
-
- 1. A "Device Independent", or `.dvi' file. This contains commands that
- can be translated into commands for a variety of output devices.
- You can view the output of LaTeX by using a program such as `xdvi',
- which actually uses the `.dvi' file.
-
- 2. A "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary information and
- diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file.
-
- 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for
- things such as sectioning.
-
- For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should consult
-`The TeXbook' by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published jointly
-by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley Publishing
-Company.
-
- For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:
-
- `LaTeX: A Document Preparation System', by Leslie Lamport,
-Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994.
-
- `The LaTeX Companion', by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and
-Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Commands, Next: Parameters, Prev: Overview, Up: Top
-
-2 Commands
-**********
-
-A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a `\'
-followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter.
-Arguments contained in square brackets, `[]', are optional while
-arguments contained in braces, `{}', are required.
-
- NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower
-case unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* Counters:: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
-* Cross References:: Automatic referencing.
-* Definitions:: Define your own commands etc.
-* Document Classes:: Some of the various classes available.
-* Environments:: Such as enumerate & itemize.
-* Footnotes:: How to produce footnotes.
-* Layout:: Controlling the page layout.
-* Lengths:: The length commands.
-* Letters:: The letter class.
-* Line & Page Breaking:: How to insert pagebreaks etc.
-* Making Paragraphs:: Paragraph commands.
-* Margin Notes:: Putting remarks in the margin.
-* Math Formulae:: How to create mathematical formulae.
-* Modes:: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
-* Page Styles:: Various styles of page layout.
-* Sectioning:: How to section properly.
-* Spaces & Boxes:: All the associated commands.
-* Special Characters:: Special reserved characters.
-* Splitting the Input:: Dealing with big files by splitting.
-* Starting & Ending:: The formal start & end layouts.
-* Table of Contents:: How to create a table of contents.
-* Terminal Input/Output:: User interaction.
-* Typefaces:: Such as bold, italics etc.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Counters, Next: Cross References, Prev: Commands, Up: Commands
-
-2.1 Counters
-============
-
-Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
-name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or
-command that produces the number, except with no `\'. (enumi - enumiv
-are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the
-counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
-
- part paragraph figure enumi
- chapter subparagraph table enumii
- section page footnote enumiii
- subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
- subsubsection
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter.
-* \alph:: Print value of a counter using letters.
-* \arabic:: Print value of a counter using numerals.
-* \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter using symbols.
-* \newcounter:: Define a new counter.
-* \refstepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-* \roman:: Print value of a counter using roman numerals.
-* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter.
-* \stepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
-* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \alph, Prev: Counters, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.1 \addtocounter
--------------------
-
-`\addtocounter{counter}{value}'
-
- The `\addtocounter' command increments the `counter' by the amount
-specified by the `value' argument. The `value' argument can be
-negative.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \alph, Next: \arabic, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.2 \alph
------------
-
-`\alph{counter}'
-
- This command causes the value of the `counter' to be printed in
-alphabetic characters. The `\alph' command uses lower case alphabetic
-alphabetic characters, i.e., `a, b, c...' while the `\Alph' command
-uses upper case alphabetic characters, i.e., `A, B, C...'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \arabic, Next: \fnsymbol, Prev: \alph, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.3 \arabic
--------------
-
-`\arabic{counter}'
-
- The `\arabic' command causes the value of the `counter' to be
-printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., `3'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \fnsymbol, Next: \newcounter, Prev: \arabic, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.4 \fnsymbol
----------------
-
-`\fnsymbol{counter}'
-
- The `\fnsymbol' command causes the value of the `counter' to be
-printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for
-numbering footnotes.
-
- NB. `counter' must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \fnsymbol, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.5 \newcounter
------------------
-
-`\newcounter{foo}[counter]'
-
- The `\newcounter' command defines a new counter named `foo'. The
-counter is initialized to zero.
-
- The optional argument `[counter]' causes the counter `foo' to be
-reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is
-incremented.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \roman, Prev: \newcounter, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.6 \refstepcounter
----------------------
-
-`\refstepcounter{counter}'
-
- The `\refstepcounter' command works like `\stepcounter' *Note
-\stepcounter::, except it also defines the current `\ref' value to be
-the result of `\thecounter'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \roman, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.7 \roman
-------------
-
-`\roman{counter}'
-
- This command causes the value of the `counter' to be printed in
-Roman numerals. The `\roman' command uses lower case Roman numerals,
-i.e., `i, ii, iii...', while the `\Roman' command uses upper case Roman
-numerals, i.e., `I, II, III...'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \setcounter, Prev: \roman, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.8 \stepcounter
-------------------
-
-`\stepcounter{counter}'
-
- The `\stepcounter' command adds one to the `counter' and resets all
-subsidiary counters.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \setcounter, Next: \usecounter, Prev: \stepcounter, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.9 \setcounter
------------------
-
-`\setcounter{counter}{value}'
-
- The `\setcounter' command sets the value of the `counter' to that
-specified by the `value' argument.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.10 \usecounter
-------------------
-
-`\usecounter{counter}'
-
- The `\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the
-`list' environment to allow the counter specified to be used to number
-the list items.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \value, Prev: \usecounter, Up: Counters
-
-2.1.11 \value
--------------
-
-`\value{counter}'
-
- The `\value' command produces the value of the `counter' named in
-the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an integer
-or number, such as the second argument of a `\setcounter' or
-`\addtocounter' command, or in:
-
- \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
-
- It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Cross References, Next: Definitions, Prev: Counters, Up: Commands
-
-2.2 Cross References
-====================
-
-One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
-the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details."
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \label:: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
-* \pageref:: Refer to a page number.
-* \ref:: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \label, Next: \pageref, Prev: Cross References, Up: Cross References
-
-2.2.1 \label
-------------
-
-`\label{key}'
-
- A `\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the `key'
-the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a
-numbered environment assigns that number to the `key'.
-
- A `key' can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
-punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are different.
-
- To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is
-common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
-colon. The prefixes conventionally used are
-
- * `cha' for chapters
-
- * `sec' for lower-level sectioning commands
-
- * `fig' for figures
-
- * `tab' for tables
-
- * `eq' for equations
-
- Thus, a label for a figure would look like `fig:bandersnatch'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Cross References
-
-2.2.2 \pageref
---------------
-
-`\pageref{key}'
-
- The `\pageref' command produces the page number of the place in the
-text where the corresponding `\label' command appears. ie. where
-`\label{key}' appears.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \ref, Prev: \pageref, Up: Cross References
-
-2.2.3 \ref
-----------
-
-`\ref{key}'
-
- The `\ref' command produces the number of the sectional unit,
-equation number, ... of the corresponding `\label' command.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Definitions, Next: Document Classes, Prev: Cross References, Up: Commands
-
-2.3 Definitions
-===============
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \newcommand:: Define a new command.
-* \newenvironment:: Define a new environment.
-* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment.
-* \newfont:: Define a new font name.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \newcommand, Next: \newenvironment, Prev: Definitions, Up: Definitions
-
-2.3.1 \newcommand
------------------
-
- \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
- \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
- \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
- \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
-
- These commands define (or redefine) a command.
-
-`cmd'
- A command name beginning with a `\'. For `\newcommand' it must
- not be already defined and must not begin with `\end'; for
- `\renewcommand' it must already be defined.
-
-`args'
- An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the
- command being defined. The default is for the command to have no
- arguments.
-
-`def'
- If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's
- first argument is optional. The default value of the optional
- argument is `def'.
-
-`definition'
- The text to be substituted for every occurrence of `cmd'; a
- parameter of the form `#n' in `cmd' is replaced by the text of the
- nth argument when this substitution takes place.
-
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \newenvironment, Next: \newtheorem, Prev: \newcommand, Up: Definitions
-
-2.3.2 \newenvironment
----------------------
-
- \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
- \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
- \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
-
- These commands define or redefine an environment.
-
-`nam'
- The name of the environment. For `\newenvironment' there must be
- no currently defined environment by that name, and the command
- `\nam' must be undefined. For `\renewenvironment' the environment
- must already be defined.
-
-`args'
- An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the
- newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
-
-`default'
- If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and `default'
- gives the default value for that argument.
-
-`begdef'
- The text substituted for every occurrence of `\begin{nam}'; a
- parameter of the form `#n' in `cmd' is replaced by the text of the
- nth argument when this substitution takes place.
-
-`enddef'
- The text substituted for every occurrence of `\end{nam}'. It may
- not contain any argument parameters.
-
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \newtheorem, Next: \newfont, Prev: \newenvironment, Up: Definitions
-
-2.3.3 \newtheorem
------------------
-
- \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
- \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
-
- This command defines a theorem-like environment.
-
-`env_name'
- The name of the environment to be defined. A string of letters.
- It must not be the name of an existing environment or counter.
-
-`caption'
- The text printed at the beginning of the environment, right before
- the number. This may simply say "Theorem", for example.
-
-`within'
- The name of an already defined counter, usually of a sectional
- unit. Provides a means of resetting the new theorem counter
- *within* the sectional unit.
-
-`numbered_like'
- The name of an already defined theorem-like environment.
-
-
- The `\newtheorem' command may have at most one optional argument.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \newfont, Prev: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions
-
-2.3.4 \newfont
---------------
-
-`\newfont{cmd}{font_name}'
-
- Defines the command name `cmd', which must not be currently defined,
-to be a declaration that selects the font named `font_name' to be the
-current font.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Document Classes, Next: Environments, Prev: Definitions, Up: Commands
-
-2.4 Document Classes
-====================
-
-Valid LaTeX document classes include:
-
- * article
-
- * report
-
- * letter
-
- * book
-
- * slides
-
- Other document classes are often available. *Note Overview::, for
-details. They are selected with the following command:
-
- `\documentclass [options] {class}'
-
- All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following options
-for selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default):
-
- 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
-
- All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size
-(default is letter):
-
- a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper, legalpaper, executivepaper
-
- Miscellaneous options:
-
- * landscape -- selects landscape format. Default is portrait.
-
- * titlepage, notitlepage -- selects if there should be a separate
- title page.
-
- * leqno -- equation number on left side of equations. Default is
- right side.
-
- * fleqn -- displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred.
-
- * openbib -- use "open" bibliography format.
-
- * draft, final -- mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule.
- Default is final.
-
- These options are not available with the slides class:
-
- * oneside, twoside -- selects one- or twosided layout. Default is
- oneside, except for the book class.
-
- * openright, openany -- determines if a chapter should start on a
- right-hand page. Default is openright for book.
-
- * onecolumn, twocolumn -- one or two columns. Defaults to one column.
-
- The slides class offers the option `clock' for printing the time at
-the bottom of each note.
-
- If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a
-comma.
-
- Additional packages are loaded by a
-
- `\usepackage[options]{pkg}'
-
- command. If you specify more than one package, they must be
-separated by a comma.
-
- Any options given in the `\documentclass' command that are unknown
-by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
-`\usepackage'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Layout, Next: Lengths, Prev: Footnotes, Up: Commands
-
-2.5 Layout
-==========
-
-Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \flushbottom:: Make all text pages the same height.
-* \onecolumn:: Use one-column layout.
-* \raggedbottom:: Allow text pages of differing height.
-* \twocolumn:: Use two-column layout.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \onecolumn, Up: Layout
-
-2.5.1 \flushbottom
-------------------
-
-The `\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height,
-adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page.
-
- This is the standard if twocolumn mode is selected.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Layout
-
-2.5.2 \onecolumn
-----------------
-
-The `\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
-single-column output.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: \twocolumn, Prev: \onecolumn, Up: Layout
-
-2.5.3 \raggedbottom
--------------------
-
-The `\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the height of the text
-on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \twocolumn, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: Layout
-
-2.5.4 \twocolumn
-----------------
-
-`\twocolumn[text]'
-
- The `\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the optional `text' argument is present, it is
-typeset in one-column mode.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Environments, Next: Footnotes, Prev: Document Classes, Up: Commands
-
-2.6 Environments
-================
-
-LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments.
-Each environment begins and ends in the same manner.
-
- \begin{environment-name}
- .
- .
- .
- \end{environment-name}
-
-* Menu:
-
-* array:: Math arrays.
-* center:: Centred lines.
-* description:: Labelled lists.
-* enumerate:: Numbered lists.
-* eqnarray:: Sequences of aligned equations.
-* equation:: Displayed equation.
-* figure:: Floating figures.
-* flushleft:: Flushed left lines.
-* flushright:: Flushed right lines.
-* itemize:: Bulleted lists.
-* letter:: Letters.
-* list:: Generic list environment.
-* minipage:: Miniature page.
-* picture:: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
-* quotation:: Indented environment with paragraph indentation.
-* quote:: Indented environment with no paragraph indentation.
-* tabbing:: Align text arbitrarily.
-* table:: Floating tables.
-* tabular:: Align text in columns.
-* thebibliography:: Bibliography or reference list.
-* theorem:: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
-* titlepage:: For hand crafted title pages.
-* verbatim:: Simulating typed input.
-* verse:: For poetry and other things.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: Environments, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.1 array
------------
-
- \begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
- column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{array}
-
- Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has a single
-mandatory argument describing the number of columns and the alignment
-within them. Each column, `coln', is specified by a single letter that
-tells how items in that row should be formatted.
-
- * `c' -- for centred
-
- * `l' -- for flush left
-
- * `r' -- for flush right
-
- Column entries must be separated by an `&'. Column entries may
-include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be terminated
-with the string `\\'.
-
- Note that the `array' environment can only be used in math mode, so
-normally it is used inside an `equation' environment.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.2 center
-------------
-
- \begin{center}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{center}
-
- The `center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
-of lines that are centred within the left and right margins on the
-current page. Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \centering:: The declaration form of the `center' environment.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \centering, Up: center
-
-2.6.2.1 \centering
-..................
-
-This declaration corresponds to the `center' environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or in a
-`parbox'. The text of a figure or table can be centred on the page by
-putting a `\centering' command at the beginning of the figure or table
-environment.
-
- Unlike the `center' environment, the `\centering' command does not
-start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
-units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an
-environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: description, Next: enumerate, Prev: center, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.3 description
------------------
-
- \begin{description}
- \item [label] First item
- \item [label] Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{description}
-
- The `description' environment is used to make labelled lists. The
-`label' is bold face and flushed right.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: description, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.4 enumerate
----------------
-
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{enumerate}
-
- The `enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations
-can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
-be nested within other paragraph-making environments.
-
- Each item of an enumerated list begins with an `\item' command.
-There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment.
-
- The `enumerate' environment uses the `enumi' through `enumiv'
-counters (*note Counters::). The type of numbering can be changed by
-redefining `\theenumi' etc.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.5 eqnarray
---------------
-
- \begin{eqnarray}
- math formula 1 \\
- math formula 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{eqnarray}
-
- The `eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of
-equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column `array'
-environment, with consecutive rows separated by `\\' and consecutive
-items within a row separated by an `&'.
-
- An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
-`\nonumber' command.
-
- The command `\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
-lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
-zero width.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.6 equation
---------------
-
- \begin{equation}
- math formula
- \end{equation}
-
- The `equation' environment centres your equation on the page and
-places the equation number in the right margin.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: figure, Next: flushleft, Prev: equation, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.7 figure
-------------
-
- \begin{figure}[placement]
-
- body of the figure
-
- \caption{figure title}
- \end{figure}
-
- Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
-Figures will not be split between two pages.
-
- The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly
-put a float:
-
- 1. `h' (Here) - at the position in the text where the figure
- environment appears.
-
- 2. `t' (Top) - at the top of a text page.
-
- 3. `b' (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page.
-
- 4. `p' (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which is a page
- containing no text, only floats.
-
- The standard report and article classes use the default placement
-`tbp'.
-
- The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
-etc. you wish. The `\caption' command allows you to title your figure.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: figure, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.8 flushleft
----------------
-
- \begin{flushleft}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{flushleft}
-
- The `flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand margin.
-Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \raggedright:: The declaration form of the `flushleft' environment.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \raggedright, Up: flushleft
-
-2.6.8.1 \raggedright
-....................
-
-This declaration corresponds to the `flushleft' environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or in a
-`parbox'.
-
- Unlike the `flushleft' environment, the `\raggedright' command does
-not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
-paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an
-environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.9 flushright
-----------------
-
- \begin{flushright}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{flushright}
-
- The `flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand margin.
-Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \raggedleft:: The declaration form of the `flushright' environment.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \raggedleft, Up: flushright
-
-2.6.9.1 \raggedleft
-...................
-
-This declaration corresponds to the `flushright' environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or in a
-`parbox'.
-
- Unlike the `flushright' environment, the `\raggedleft' command does
-not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
-paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an
-environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: itemize, Next: letter, Prev: flushright, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.10 itemize
---------------
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{itemize}
-
- The `itemize' environment produces a "bulleted" list. Itemizations
-can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
-be nested within other paragraph-making environments.
-
- Each item of an `itemized' list begins with an `\item' command.
-There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment.
-
- The `itemize' environment uses the `itemi' through `itemiv' counters
-(*note Counters::). The type of numbering can be changed by redefining
-`\theitemi' etc.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: letter, Next: list, Prev: itemize, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.11 letter
--------------
-
-This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: list, Next: minipage, Prev: letter, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.12 list
------------
-
-The `list' environment is a generic environment which is used for
-defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in
-documents, but often in macros.
-
- \begin{list}{label}{spacing}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{list}
-
- The `{label}' argument specifies how items should be labelled. This
-argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the
-label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands.
-
- The `{spacing}' argument contains commands to change the spacing
-parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e.,
-`{}'. This will select all default spacing which should suffice for
-most cases.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: minipage, Next: picture, Prev: list, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.13 minipage
----------------
-
- \begin{minipage}[position]{width}
- text
- \end{minipage}
-
- The `minipage' environment is similar to a `\parbox' command. It
-takes the same optional `position' argument and mandatory `width'
-argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments inside a
-minipage.
-
- Footnotes in a `minipage' environment are handled in a way that is
-particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
-`\footnote' or `\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom
-of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
-`mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary `footnote' counter *Note
-Counters::.
-
- NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
-footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation, Prev: minipage, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.14 picture
---------------
-
- \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
- .
- .
- picture commands
- .
- .
- \end{picture}
-
- The `picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind
-of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You
-tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their
-coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and
-a minus sign -- a number like `5', `2.3' or `-3.1416'. A coordinate
-specifies a length in multiples of the unit length `\unitlength', so if
-`\unitlength' has been set to `1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies
-a length of 2.54 centimetres. You can change the value of
-`\unitlength' anywhere you want, using the `\setlength' command, but
-strange things will happen if you try changing it inside the picture
-environment.
-
- A position is a pair of coordinates, such as `(2.4,-5)', specifying
-the point with x-coordinate `2.4' and y-coordinate `-5'. Coordinates
-are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
-normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a
-position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the
-parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
-
- The `picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
-`position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
-produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
-argument's x- and y-coordinates.
-
- The `picture' environment also has an optional `position' argument,
-following the `size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike
-ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square
-brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at
-the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin).
-For example, if `\unitlength' has been set to `1mm', the command
- \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
- produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
-millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
-upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first
-draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the origin
-at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by
-shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional argument.
-
- The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of
-the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture
-really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the
-picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by
-LaTeX in determining how much room to leave for it.
-
- Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the `\put' command.
-The command
- \put (11.3,-.3){...}
- puts the object specified by `...' in the picture, with its
-reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for
-various objects will be described below.
-
- The `\put' command creates an "LR box". You can put anything in the
-text argument of the `\put' command that you'd put into the argument of
-an `\mbox' and related commands. When you do this, the reference point
-will be the lower left corner of the box.
-
- Picture commands:
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \circle:: Draw a circle.
-* \dashbox:: Draw a dashed box.
-* \frame:: Draw a frame around an object.
-* \framebox (picture):: Draw a box with a frame around it.
-* \line:: Draw a straight line.
-* \linethickness:: Set the line thickness.
-* \makebox (picture):: Draw a box of the specified size.
-* \multiput:: Draw multiple instances of an object.
-* \oval:: Draw an ellipse.
-* \put:: Place an object at a specified place.
-* \shortstack:: Make a pile of objects.
-* \vector:: Draw a line with an arrow.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \circle, Next: \dashbox, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.1 \circle
-................
-
-`\circle[*]{diameter}'
-
- The `\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
-the specified one as possible. If the `*'-form of the command is used,
-LaTeX draws a solid circle.
-
- Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \dashbox, Next: \frame, Prev: \circle, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.2 \dashbox
-.................
-
-Draws a box with a dashed line.
-
- `\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}'
-
- The `\dashbox' has an extra argument which specifies the width of
-each dash. A dashed box looks best when the `width' and `height' are
-multiples of the `dash_length'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \frame, Next: \framebox (picture), Prev: \dashbox, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.3 \frame
-...............
-
-`\frame{...}'
-
- The `\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around the object
-specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left
-corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the
-object.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \framebox (picture), Next: \line, Prev: \frame, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.4 \framebox
-..................
-
-`\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}'
-
- The `\framebox' command is exactly the same as the `\makebox'
-command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that
-it creates.
-
- The `framebox' command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule', and
-leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \line, Next: \linethickness, Prev: \framebox (picture), Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.5 \line
-..............
-
-`\line(x slope,y slope){length}'
-
- The `\line' command draws a line of the specified `length' and
-`slope'.
-
- Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y
-have integer values from -6 through 6.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \linethickness, Next: \makebox (picture), Prev: \line, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.6 \linethickness
-.......................
-
-`\linethickness{dimension}'
-
- Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture
-environment to be `dimension', which must be a positive length. It does
-not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the quarter
-circles drawn by `\oval' to form the corners of an oval.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \makebox (picture), Next: \multiput, Prev: \linethickness, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.7 \makebox
-.................
-
-`\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}'
-
- The `\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the
-normal `\makebox' command except that you must specify a `width' and
-`height' in multiples of `\unitlength'.
-
- The optional argument, `[position]', specifies the quadrant that
-your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:
-
- * `t' - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
-
- * `b' - Moves the item to the bottom
-
- * `l' - Moves the item to the left
-
- * `r' - Moves the item to the right
-
- *Note \makebox::.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \multiput, Next: \oval, Prev: \makebox (picture), Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.8 \multiput
-..................
-
-`\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}'
-
- The `\multiput' command can be used when you are putting the same
-object in a regular pattern across a picture.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \oval, Next: \put, Prev: \multiput, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.9 \oval
-..............
-
-`\oval(width,height)[portion]'
-
- The `\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
-optional argument, `[portion]', allows you to select part of the oval.
-
- * `t' - Selects the top portion
-
- * `b' - Selects the bottom portion
-
- * `r' - Selects the right portion
-
- * `l' - Selects the left portion
-
- Note that the "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles
-with a maximum radius of 20 pt, so large "ovals" will look more like
-boxes with rounded corners.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \put, Next: \shortstack, Prev: \oval, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.10 \put
-..............
-
-`\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }'
-
- The `\put' command places the item specified by the mandatory
-argument at the given coordinates.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \shortstack, Next: \vector, Prev: \put, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.11 \shortstack
-.....................
-
-`\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}'
-
- The `\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects. The valid
-positions are:
-
- * `r' - Moves the objects to the right of the stack
-
- * `l' - Moves the objects to the left of the stack
-
- * `c' - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \vector, Prev: \shortstack, Up: picture
-
-2.6.14.12 \vector
-.................
-
-`\vector(x slope,y slope){length}'
-
- The `\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
-length and slope. The `x' and `y' values must lie between -4 and +4,
-inclusive.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: quotation, Next: quote, Prev: picture, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.15 quotation
-----------------
-
- \begin{quotation}
- text
- \end{quotation}
-
- The margins of the `quotation' environment are indented on the left
-and the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is
-paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new
-paragraph.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: quotation, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.16 quote
-------------
-
- \begin{quote}
- text
- \end{quote}
-
- The margins of the `quote' environment are indented on the left and
-the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line
-between text produces a new paragraph.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quote, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.17 tabbing
---------------
-
- \begin{tabbing}
- text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
- second row \> \> more \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{tabbing}
-
- The `tabbing' environment provides a way to align text in columns.
-It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do
-with an ordinary typewriter.
-
- It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is
-constant and known in advance.
-
- This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the `tabular'
-environment.
-
- The following commands can be used inside a `tabbing' enviroment:
-
-`\='
- Sets a tab stop at the current position.
-
-`\>'
- Advances to the next tab stop.
-
-`\<'
- This command allows you to put something to the left of the local
- margin without changing the margin. Can only be used at the start
- of the line.
-
-`\+'
- Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
- one tab stop to the right.
-
-`\-'
- Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
- one tab stop to the left.
-
-`\''
- Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
- i.e. everything from the most recent `\>', `\<', `\'', `\\', or
- `\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush
- against the current column's tab stop.
-
-`\`'
- Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including
- tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last
- column because there's no tab stop there. The `\`' command moves
- all the text that follows it, up to the `\\' or `\end{tabbing}'
- command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing
- environment. There must be no `\>' or `\'' command between the
- `\`' and the command that ends the line.
-
-`\kill'
- Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like `\\'
- except that it throws away the current line instead of producing
- output for it. The effect of any `\=', `\+' or `\-' commands in
- that line remain in effect.
-
-`\pushtabs'
- Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
- changing tab stop positions in the middle of a `tabbing'
- environment.
-
-`\poptabs'
- Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last `\pushtabs'.
-
-`\a'
- In a `tabbing' environment, the commands `\=', `\'' and `\`' do
- not produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands `\a=', `\a''
- and `\a`' are used.
-
- This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format:
-
- \begin{tabbing}
- function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
- \> begin \= \+ \\
- \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
- fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
- else \+ \\
- fact := 1; \-\- \\
- end;\\
- \end{tabbing}
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: table, Next: tabular, Prev: tabbing, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.18 table
-------------
-
- \begin{table}[placement]
-
- body of the table
-
- \caption{table title}
- \end{table}
-
- Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and
-are usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a
-page. Tables will not be split between two pages.
-
- The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
-a float:
-
- * `h' : Here - at the position in the text where the table
- environment appears.
-
- * `t' : Top - at the top of a text page.
-
- * `b' : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
-
- * `p' : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page
- containing no text, only floats.
-
- The standard `report' and `article' classes use the default
-placement `[tbp]'.
-
- The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
-etc., you wish. The `\caption' command allows you to title your table.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: tabular, Next: thebibliography, Prev: table, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.19 tabular
---------------
-
- \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{tabular}
-
- or
-
- \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{tabular*}
-
- These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
-items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional
-arguments consist of:
-
-`width'
- Specifies the width of the `tabular*' environment. There must be
- rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the
- specified width.
-
-`pos'
- Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the
- centre of the environment.
-
- * `t' - align on top row
-
- * `b' - align on bottom row
-
-`cols'
- Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the
- following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and
- intercolumn material.
-
- * `l' - A column of left-aligned items.
-
- * `r' - A column of right-aligned items.
-
- * `c' - A column of centred items.
-
- * `|' - A vertical line the full height and depth of the
- environment.
-
- * `@{text}' - This inserts `text' in every row. An @-expression
- suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between
- columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the
- adjacent items must be included in text. An
- `\extracolsep{wd}' command in an @-expression causes an extra
- space of width `wd' to appear to the left of all subsequent
- columns, until countermanded by another `\extracolsep'
- command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space
- is not suppressed by an @-expression. An `\extracolsep'
- command can be used only in an @-expression in the `cols'
- argument.
-
- * `p{wd}' - Produces a column with each item typeset in a
- parbox of width `wd', as if it were the argument of a
- `\parbox[t]{wd}' command. However, a `\\' may not appear in
- the item, except in the following situations:
- 1. inside an environment like `minipage', `array', or
- `tabular'.
-
- 2. inside an explicit `\parbox'.
-
- 3. in the scope of a `\centering', `\raggedright', or
- `\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must
- appear inside braces or an environment when used in a
- `p'-column element.
-
- * `*{num}{cols}' - Equivalent to `num' copies of `cols', where
- `num' is any positive integer and `cols' is any list of
- column-specifiers, which may contain another `*-expression'.
-
-
-
- These commands can be used inside a `tabular' environment:
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \cline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
-* \hline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
-* \multicolumn:: Make an item spanning several columns.
-* \vline:: Draw a vertical line.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Up: tabular
-
-2.6.19.1 \cline
-...............
-
-`\cline{i-j}'
-
- The `\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns
-specified, beginning in column `i' and ending in column `j', which are
-identified in the mandatory argument.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \hline, Next: \multicolumn, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular
-
-2.6.19.2 \hline
-...............
-
-The `\hline' command will draw a horizontal line the width of the
-table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and
-between the rows of the table.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \vline, Prev: \hline, Up: tabular
-
-2.6.19.3 \multicolumn
-.....................
-
-`\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}'
-
- The `\multicolumn' is used to make an entry that spans several
-columns. The first mandatory argument, `cols', specifies the number of
-columns to span. The second mandatory argument, `pos', specifies the
-formatting of the entry; `c' for centred, `l' for flushleft, `r' for
-flushright. The third mandatory argument, `text', specifies what text
-is to make up the entry.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \vline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular
-
-2.6.19.4 \vline
-...............
-
-The `\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full
-height and depth of its row. An `\hfill' command can be used to move
-the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an
-@-expression.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: thebibliography, Next: theorem, Prev: tabular, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.20 thebibliography
-----------------------
-
- \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
- \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
- .
- .
- .
- \end{thebibliography}
-
- The `thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or
-reference list. In the `article' class, this reference list is
-labelled "References"; in the `report' class, it is labelled
-"Bibliography".
-
- * `widest-label': Text that, when printed, is approximately as wide
- as the widest item label produces by the `\bibitem' commands.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \bibitem:: Specify a bibliography item.
-* \cite:: Refer to a bibliography item.
-* \nocite:: Include an item in the bibliography.
-* Using BibTeX:: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \bibitem, Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography
-
-2.6.20.1 \bibitem
-.................
-
-`\bibitem[label]{cite_key}'
-
- The `\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by `label'. If
-the `label' argument is missing, a number is generated as the `label',
-using the `enumi' counter. The `cite_key' is any sequence of letters,
-numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. This command
-writes an entry on the `.aux' file containing `cite_key' and the item's
-`label'. When this `.aux' file is read by the `\begin{document}'
-command, the item's `label' is associated with `cite_key', causing the
-reference to `cite_key' by a `\cite' command to produce the associated
-`label'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography
-
-2.6.20.2 \cite
-..............
-
-`\cite[text]{key_list}'
-
- The `key_list' argument is a list of citation keys. This command
-generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the keys
-in `key_list' by entries on the `.aux' file read by the
-`\begin{document}' command.
-
- The optional `text' argument will appear after the citation, i.e.
-`\cite[p. 2]{knuth}' might produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \nocite, Next: Using BibTeX, Prev: \cite, Up: thebibliography
-
-2.6.20.3 \nocite
-................
-
-`\nocite{key_list}'
-
- The `\nocite' command produces no text, but writes `key_list', which
-is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux' file.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Using BibTeX, Prev: \nocite, Up: thebibliography
-
-2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX
-.....................
-
-If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if
-you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain
-your bibliography, you don't use the `thebibliography' environment.
-Instead, you include the lines
-
- \bibliographystyle{style}
- \bibliography{bibfile}
-
- where `style' refers to a file `style.bst', which defines how your
-citations will look. The standard styles distributed with BibTeX are:
-
-`alpha'
- Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and
- year of publication.
-
-`plain'
- Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
-
-`unsrt'
- Like `plain', but entries are in order of citation.
-
-`abbrv'
- Like `plain', but more compact labels.
-
- In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the
-demands of various publications.
-
- The argument to `\bibliography' refers to the file `bibfile.bib',
-which should contain your database in BibTeX format. Only the entries
-referred to via `\cite' and `\nocite' will be listed in the
-bibliography.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.21 theorem
---------------
-
- \begin{theorem}
- theorem text
- \end{theorem}
-
- The `theorem' environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface followed
-by your theorem text.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: titlepage, Next: verbatim, Prev: theorem, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.22 titlepage
-----------------
-
- \begin{titlepage}
- text
- \end{titlepage}
-
- The `titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with
-no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page
-to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The
-`\today' command comes in handy for title pages.
-
- Note that you can use the `\maketitle' (*note \maketitle::) command
-to produce a standard title page.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.23 verbatim
----------------
-
- \begin{verbatim}
- text
- \end{verbatim}
-
- The `verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment that
-gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a
-typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that
-they would on a typewriter.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \verb:: The macro form of the `verbatim' environment.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \verb, Up: verbatim
-
-2.6.23.1 \verb
-..............
-
-`\verb char literal_text char'
-
- `\verb*char literal_text char'
-
- Typesets `literal_text' exactly as typed, including special
-characters and spaces, using a typewriter (`\tt') type style. There
-may be no space between `\verb' or `\verb*' and `char' (space is shown
-here only for clarity). The `*-form' differs only in that spaces are
-printed as a special character.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: verse, Prev: verbatim, Up: Environments
-
-2.6.24 verse
-------------
-
- \begin{verse}
- text
- \end{verse}
-
- The `verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
-other uses for it.
-
- The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate the
-lines of each stanza with `\\', and use one or more blank lines to
-separate the stanzas.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Footnotes, Next: Layout, Prev: Environments, Up: Commands
-
-2.7 Footnotes
-=============
-
-Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced
-with one command, the `\footnote' command. They can also be produced
-with two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext'
-commands. See the specific command for information on why you would
-use one over the other.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \footnote:: Insert a footnote.
-* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only.
-* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \footnote, Next: \footnotemark, Prev: Footnotes, Up: Footnotes
-
-2.7.1 \footnote
----------------
-
-`\footnote[number]{text}'
-
- The `\footnote' command places the numbered footnote `text' at the
-bottom of the current page. The optional argument, `number', is used
-to change the default footnote number. This command can only be used
-in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning commands
-like `\chapter', in figures, tables or in a `tabular' environment.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote, Up: Footnotes
-
-2.7.2 \footnotemark
--------------------
-
-The `\footnotemark' command puts the footnote `number' in the text.
-This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The text of the
-footnote is supplied by the `\footnotetext' command.
-
- This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote
-markers referring to the same footnote by using
-
- `\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]'
-
- after the first `\footnote' command.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
-
-2.7.3 \footnotetext
--------------------
-
-`\footnotetext[number]{text}'
-
- The `\footnotetext' command produces the `text' to be placed at the
-bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after the
-`\footnotemark' command. The `\footnotetext' command must appear in
-outer paragraph mode.
-
- The optional argument, `number', is used to change the default
-footnote number.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Lengths, Next: Letters, Prev: Layout, Up: Commands
-
-2.8 Lengths
-===========
-
-A `length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
-as an argument.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \newlength:: Define a new length.
-* \setlength:: Set the value of a length.
-* \addtolength:: Add a quantity to a length.
-* \settodepth:: Set a length to the depth of something.
-* \settoheight:: Set a length to the height of something.
-* \settowidth:: Set a length to the width of something.
-* Predefined lengths:: Lengths that are, like, predefined.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \newlength, Next: \setlength, Prev: Lengths, Up: Lengths
-
-2.8.1 \newlength
-----------------
-
-`\newlength{\gnat}'
-
- The `\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument, `\gnat', as
-a `length' command with a value of `0in'. An error occurs if a `\gnat'
-command already exists.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Prev: \newlength, Up: Lengths
-
-2.8.2 \setlength
-----------------
-
-`\setlength{\gnat}{length}'
-
- The `\setlength' command is used to set the value of a `length'
-command. The `length' argument can be expressed in any terms of length
-LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (`in'), millimetres (`mm'), points
-(`pt'), etc.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths
-
-2.8.3 \addtolength
-------------------
-
-`\addtolength{\gnat}{length}'
-
- The `\addtolength' command increments a "length command" by the
-amount specified in the `length' argument. It can be a negative amount.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \settodepth, Next: \settoheight, Prev: \addtolength, Up: Lengths
-
-2.8.4 \settodepth
------------------
-
-`\settodepth{\gnat}{text}'
-
- The `\settodepth' command sets the value of a `length' command equal
-to the depth of the `text' argument.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Lengths
-
-2.8.5 \settoheight
-------------------
-
-`\settoheight{\gnat}{text}'
-
- The `\settoheight' command sets the value of a `length' command
-equal to the height of the `text' argument.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \settowidth, Next: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Lengths
-
-2.8.6 \settowidth
------------------
-
-`\settowidth{\gnat}{text}'
-
- The `\settowidth' command sets the value of a `length' command equal
-to the width of the `text' argument.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settowidth, Up: Lengths
-
-2.8.7 Predefined lengths
-------------------------
-
-`\width'
-
- `\height'
-
- `\depth'
-
- `\totalheight'
-
- These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
-box-making commands *Note Spaces & Boxes::. They specify the natural
-width etc. of the text in the box. `\totalheight' equals `\height' +
-`\depth'. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
-size, e.g., say
-
- `\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}'
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Letters, Next: Line & Page Breaking, Prev: Lengths, Up: Commands
-
-2.9 Letters
-===========
-
-You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The
-`letter' document class is designed to make a number of letters at
-once, although you can make just one if you so desire.
-
- Your `.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the other
-document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a
-minimum:
-
- \documentclass{letter}
- \begin{document}
- ... letters ...
- \end{document}
-
- Each letter is a `letter' environment, whose argument is the name
-and address of the recipient. For example, you might have:
-
- \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
- \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
- ...
- \end{letter}
-
- The letter itself begins with the `\opening' command. The text of
-the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that
-make no sense in a letter, like `\chapter', do not work. The letter
-closes with a `\closing' command.
-
- After the `closing', you can have additional material. The `\cc'
-command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar `\encl'
-command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use `\\' to
-separate the items.
-
- These commands are used with the `letter' class:
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \address:: Your return address.
-* \cc:: Cc list.
-* \closing:: Saying goodbye.
-* \encl:: List of enclosed material.
-* \location:: Your organisation's address.
-* \makelabels:: Making address labels.
-* \name:: Your name, for the return address.
-* \opening:: Saying hello.
-* \ps:: Adding a postscript.
-* \signature:: Your signature.
-* \startbreaks:: Allow page breaks.
-* \stopbreaks:: Disallow page breaks.
-* \telephone:: Your phone number.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \address, Next: \cc, Prev: Letters, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.1 \address
---------------
-
-`\address{Return address}'
-
- The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
-envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by `\\'
-commands. If you do not make an `\address' declaration, then the
-letter will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard
-letterhead. (*Note Overview::, for details on your local
-implementation). If you give an `\address' declaration, then the
-letter will be formatted as a personal letter.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \cc, Next: \closing, Prev: \address, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.2 \cc
----------
-
-`\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}'
-
- Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each name is
-printed on a separate line.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \closing, Next: \encl, Prev: \cc, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.3 \closing
---------------
-
-`\closing{text}'
-
- The letter closes with a `\closing' command, i.e.,
- \closing{Best Regards,}
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \encl, Next: \location, Prev: \closing, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.4 \encl
------------
-
-`\encl{CV\\Certificates}'
-
- Generate a list of enclosed material.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \location, Next: \makelabels, Prev: \encl, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.5 \location
----------------
-
-`\location{address}'
-
- This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only
-appears if the `firstpage' pagestyle is selected.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \makelabels, Next: \name, Prev: \location, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.6 \makelabels
------------------
-
-`\makelabels{number}'
-
- If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet
-of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \name, Next: \opening, Prev: \makelabels, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.7 \name
------------
-
-`\name{June Davenport}'
-
- Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return
-address.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \opening, Next: \ps, Prev: \name, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.8 \opening
---------------
-
-`\opening{text}'
-
- The letter begins with the `\opening' command. The mandatory
-argument, `text', is whatever text you wish to start your letter, i.e.,
- \opening{Dear Joe,}
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \ps, Next: \signature, Prev: \opening, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.9 \ps
----------
-
-`\ps'
-
- Use this command before a postscript.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \signature, Next: \startbreaks, Prev: \ps, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.10 \signature
------------------
-
-`\signature{Harvey Swick}'
-
- Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath
-the space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines
-should be separated by `\\' commands.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \startbreaks, Next: \stopbreaks, Prev: \signature, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.11 \startbreaks
--------------------
-
-`\startbreaks'
-
- Used after a `\stopbreaks' command to allow page breaks again.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \stopbreaks, Next: \telephone, Prev: \startbreaks, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.12 \stopbreaks
-------------------
-
-`\stopbreaks'
-
- Inhibit page breaks until a `\startbreaks' command occurs.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \telephone, Prev: \stopbreaks, Up: Letters
-
-2.9.13 \telephone
------------------
-
-`\telephone{number}'
-
- This is your telephone number. This only appears if the `firstpage'
-pagestyle is selected.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Line & Page Breaking, Next: Making Paragraphs, Prev: Letters, Up: Commands
-
-2.10 Line & Page Breaking
-=========================
-
-The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
-translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To
-produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and
-these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do the
-line breaking yourself with the `\\' command, but LaTeX usually does it
-for you.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \\:: Start a new line.
-* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation.
-* \cleardoublepage:: Start a new right-hand page.
-* \clearpage:: Start a new page.
-* \enlargethispage:: Enlarge the current page a bit.
-* \fussy:: Be fussy about line breaking.
-* \hyphenation:: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
-* \linebreak:: Break the line.
-* \newline:: Break the line prematurely.
-* \newpage:: Start a new page.
-* \nolinebreak:: Don't break the current line.
-* \nopagebreak:: Don't make a page break here.
-* \pagebreak:: Please make a page break here.
-* \sloppy:: Be sloppy about line breaking.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \\, Next: \- (hyphenation), Prev: Line & Page Breaking, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.1 \\
----------
-
-`\\[*][extra-space]'
-
- The `\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an
-optional argument, `extra-space', that specifies how much extra
-vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a
-negative amount.
-
- The `\\*' command is the same as the ordinary `\\' command except
-that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \cleardoublepage, Prev: \\, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.2 \-
----------
-
-The `\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
-point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find all
-correct hyphenation points. The `\-' command is used for the
-exceptional cases.
-
- Note that when you insert `\-' commands in a word, the word will
-only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation
-points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \cleardoublepage, Next: \clearpage, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.3 \cleardoublepage
------------------------
-
-The `\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all
-figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
-(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \clearpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \cleardoublepage, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.4 \clearpage
------------------
-
-The `\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures
-and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \fussy, Prev: \clearpage, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.5 \enlargethispage
------------------------
-
-`\enlargethispage{size}'
-
- `\enlargethispage*{size}'
-
- Enlarge the `\textheight' for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one
-additional line.
-
- The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page
-as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
-`\pagebreak'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \fussy, Next: \hyphenation, Prev: \enlargethispage, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.6 \fussy
--------------
-
-`\fussy'
-
- This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy about
-line breaking. This can avoids too much space between words, but may
-produce overfull boxes.
-
- This command cancels the effect of a previous `\sloppy' command.
-*Note \sloppy::
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \hyphenation, Next: \linebreak, Prev: \fussy, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.7 \hyphenation
--------------------
-
-`\hyphenation{words}'
-
- The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points,
-where `words' is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which each
-hyphenation point is indicated by a `-' character.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \linebreak, Next: \newline, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.8 \linebreak
------------------
-
-`\linebreak[number]'
-
- The `\linebreak' command tells LaTeX to break the current line at
-the point of the command. With the optional argument, `number', you
-can convert the `\linebreak' command from a demand to a request. The
-number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more
-insistent the request is.
-
- The `\linebreak' command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it
-extends to the right margin.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \newline, Next: \newpage, Prev: \linebreak, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.9 \newline
----------------
-
-The `\newline' command breaks the line right where it is. It can only
-be used in paragraph mode.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \nolinebreak, Prev: \newline, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.10 \newpage
-----------------
-
-The `\newpage' command ends the current page.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \nolinebreak, Next: \nopagebreak, Prev: \newpage, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.11 \nolinebreak
---------------------
-
-`\nolinebreak[number]'
-
- The `\nolinebreak' command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current
-line at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
-`number', you can convert the `\nolinebreak' command from a demand to a
-request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
-number, the more insistent the request is.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \nopagebreak, Next: \pagebreak, Prev: \nolinebreak, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.12 \nopagebreak
---------------------
-
-`\nopagebreak[number]'
-
- The `\nopagebreak' command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current
-page at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
-`number', you can convert the `\nopagebreak' command from a demand to a
-request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
-number, the more insistent the request is.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \pagebreak, Next: \sloppy, Prev: \nopagebreak, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.13 \pagebreak
-------------------
-
-`\pagebreak[number]'
-
- The `\pagebreak' command tells LaTeX to break the current page at
-the point of the command. With the optional argument, `number', you
-can convert the `\pagebreak' command from a demand to a request. The
-number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more
-insistent the request is.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \sloppy, Prev: \pagebreak, Up: Line & Page Breaking
-
-2.10.14 \sloppy
----------------
-
-`\sloppy'
-
- This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This can
-prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space between words.
-
- Lasts until a `\fussy' command is issued. *Note \fussy::.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Making Paragraphs, Next: Margin Notes, Prev: Line & Page Breaking, Up: Commands
-
-2.11 Making Paragraphs
-======================
-
-A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines -- lines not
-containing even a `%'. A blank line should not appear where a new
-paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
-a sectioning command.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \indent:: Indent this paragraph.
-* \noindent:: Do not indent this paragraph.
-* \par:: Another way of writing a blank line.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \indent, Next: \noindent, Prev: Making Paragraphs, Up: Making Paragraphs
-
-2.11.1 \indent
---------------
-
-`\indent'
-
- This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the
-paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it
-would otherwise be suppressed.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \noindent, Next: \par, Prev: \indent, Up: Making Paragraphs
-
-2.11.2 \noindent
-----------------
-
-`\noindent'
-
- When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the
-paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a
-paragraph.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \par, Prev: \noindent, Up: Making Paragraphs
-
-2.11.3 \par
------------
-
-Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment
-definitions easier to read.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Margin Notes, Next: Math Formulae, Prev: Making Paragraphs, Up: Commands
-
-2.12 Margin Notes
-=================
-
-The command `\marginpar[left]{right}' creates a note in the margin.
-The first line will be at the same height as the line in the text where
-the `\marginpar' occurs.
-
- When you only specify the mandatory argument `right', the text will
-be placed
-
- * in the right margin for one-sided layout
-
- * in the outside margin for two-sided layout
-
- * in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
-
- By issuing the command `\reversemarginpar', you can force the
-marginal notes to go into the opposite (inside) margin.
-
- When you specify both arguments, `left' is used for the left margin,
-and `right' is used for the right margin.
-
- The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
-hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a `\hspace{0pt}' command.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Math Formulae, Next: Modes, Prev: Margin Notes, Up: Commands
-
-2.13 Math Formulae
-==================
-
-There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
-
-`math'
- For Formulae that appear right in the text.
-
-`displaymath'
- For Formulae that appear on their own line.
-
-`equation'
- The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an
- equation number in the right margin.
-
- The `math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
-but the `displaymath' and `equation' environments can be used only in
-paragraph mode. The `math' and `displaymath' environments are used so
-often that they have the following short forms:
-
- \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
-
- \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
-
- In fact, the `math' environment is so common that it has an even
-shorter form:
-
- $ ... $ instead of \(...\)
-
-* Menu:
-
-* Subscripts & Superscripts:: Also known as exponent or index.
-* Math Symbols:: Various mathematical squiggles.
-* Spacing in Math Mode:: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
-* Math Miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Subscripts & Superscripts, Next: Math Symbols, Prev: Math Formulae, Up: Math Formulae
-
-2.13.1 Subscripts & Superscripts
---------------------------------
-
-To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type
-`_{'exp`}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type
-`^{'exp`}'. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that
-stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something
-has both a subscript and a superscript.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Math Symbols, Next: Spacing in Math Mode, Prev: Subscripts & Superscripts, Up: Math Formulae
-
-2.13.2 Math Symbols
--------------------
-
-LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. The
-commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For
-example, if you include `$\pi$' in your source, you will get the symbol
-"pi" in your output.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Spacing in Math Mode, Next: Math Miscellany, Prev: Math Symbols, Up: Math Formulae
-
-2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode
----------------------------
-
-In a `math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in
-the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the way
-it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, LaTeX
-provides the following four commands for use in math mode:
-
- 1. `\;' - a thick space
-
- 2. `\:' - a medium space
-
- 3. `\,' - a thin space
-
- 4. `\!' - a negative thin space
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Math Miscellany, Prev: Spacing in Math Mode, Up: Math Formulae
-
-2.13.4 Math Miscellany
-----------------------
-
-`\cdots'
- Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to the
- centre of the line.
-
-`\ddots'
- Produces a diagonal ellipsis.
-
-`\frac{num}{den}'
- Produces the fraction `num' divided by `den'.
-
-`\ldots'
- Produces an ellipsis. This command works in any mode, not just
- math mode.
-
-`\overbrace{text}'
- Generates a brace over text.
-
-`\overline{text}'
- Causes the argument text to be overlined.
-
-`\sqrt[root]{arg}'
- Produces the square root of its argument. The optional argument,
- `root', determines what root to produce, i.e., the cube root of
- `x+y' would be typed as `$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$'.
-
-`\underbrace{text}'
- Generates text with a brace underneath.
-
-`\underline{text}'
- Causes the argument text to be underlined. This command can also
- be used in paragraph and LR modes.
-
-`\vdots'
- Produces a vertical ellipsis.
-
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Modes, Next: Page Styles, Prev: Math Formulae, Up: Commands
-
-2.14 Modes
-==========
-
-When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
-modes:
-
- * Paragraph mode
-
- * Math mode
-
- * Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
-
- LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
-different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes.
-Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when
-LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands.
-
- "Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when
-processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into
-lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in "math mode" when
-it's generating a mathematical formula. In "LR mode", as in paragraph
-mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of
-words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX
-keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode.
-Even if you put a hundred words into an `\mbox', LaTeX would keep
-typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then
-complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.
-
- LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an `\mbox'
-command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for
-example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box.
-There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
-making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of
-these commands or environments will be called a `parbox'. When LaTeX
-is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner
-paragraph mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is
-called "outer paragraph mode".
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Page Styles, Next: Sectioning, Prev: Modes, Up: Commands
-
-2.15 Page Styles
-================
-
-The `\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the
-page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \maketitle:: Generate a title page.
-* \pagenumbering:: Set the style used for page numbers.
-* \pagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style.
-* \thispagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style for this page.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \maketitle, Next: \pagenumbering, Prev: Page Styles, Up: Page Styles
-
-2.15.1 \maketitle
------------------
-
-`\maketitle'
-
- The `\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title page
-- except in the `article' class, where the title normally goes at the
-top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is
-obtained from the following declarations:
-
- *Note Page Styles::, for the commands to give the information.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \author:: Who wrote this stuff?
-* \date:: The date the document was created.
-* \thanks:: A special form of footnote.
-* \title:: How to set the document title.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \author, Next: \date, Prev: \maketitle, Up: \maketitle
-
-2.15.2 \author
---------------
-
-`\author{names}'
-
- The `\author' command declares the author(s), where `names' is a
-list of authors separated by `\and' commands. Use `\\' to separate
-lines within a single author's entry - for example, to give the
-author's institution or address.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \date, Next: \thanks, Prev: \author, Up: \maketitle
-
-2.15.3 \date
-------------
-
-`\date{text}'
-
- The `\date' command declares text to be the document's date. With
-no `\date' command, the current date is used.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \thanks, Next: \title, Prev: \date, Up: \maketitle
-
-2.15.4 \thanks
---------------
-
-`\thanks{text}'
-
- The `\thanks' command produces a `\footnote' to the title.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \title, Prev: \thanks, Up: \maketitle
-
-2.15.5 \title
--------------
-
-`\title{text}'
-
- The `\title' command declares `text' to be the title. Use `\\' to
-tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \pagenumbering, Next: \pagestyle, Prev: \maketitle, Up: Page Styles
-
-2.15.6 \pagenumbering
----------------------
-
-`\pagenumbering{num_style}'
-
- Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of `num_style'
-are:
-
- * `arabic' - Arabic numerals
-
- * `roman' - Lowercase Roman numerals
-
- * `Roman' - Uppercase Roman numerals
-
- * `alph' - Lowercase letters
-
- * `Alph' - Uppercase letters
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \pagestyle, Next: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagenumbering, Up: Page Styles
-
-2.15.7 \pagestyle
------------------
-
-`\pagestyle{option}'
-
- The `\pagestyle' command changes the style from the current page on
-throughout the remainder of your document.
-
- The valid options are:
-
- * `plain' - Just a plain page number.
-
- * `empty' - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
-
- * `headings' - Puts running headings on each page. The document
- style specifies what goes in the headings.
-
- * `myheadings' - You specify what is to go in the heading with the
- `\markboth' or the `\markright' commands.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \markboth:: Set left and right headings.
-* \markright:: Set right heading only.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \markboth, Next: \markright, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: \pagestyle
-
-2.15.8 \markboth
-----------------
-
- \markboth{left head}{right head}
-
- The `\markboth' command is used in conjunction with the page style
-`myheadings' for setting both the left and the right heading. You
-should note that a "left-hand heading" is generated by the last
-`\markboth' command before the end of the page, while a "right-hand
-heading" is generated by the first `\markboth' or `\markright' that
-comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the
-page.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \markright, Prev: \markboth, Up: \pagestyle
-
-2.15.9 \markright
------------------
-
- \markright{right head}
-
- The `\markright' command is used in conjunction with the page style
-`myheadings' for setting the right heading, leaving the left heading
-unchanged. You should note that a "left-hand heading" is generated by
-the last `\markboth' command before the end of the page, while a
-"right-hand heading" is generated by the first `\markboth' or
-`\markright' that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the
-last one before the page.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: Page Styles
-
-2.15.10 \thispagestyle
-----------------------
-
-`\thispagestyle{option}'
-
- The `\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the
-`\pagestyle' command except that it changes the style for the current
-page only.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Spaces & Boxes, Prev: Page Styles, Up: Commands
-
-2.16 Sectioning
-===============
-
-Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units.
-
- * `\part'
-
- * `\chapter' (report and book class only)
-
- * `\section'
-
- * `\subsection'
-
- * `\subsubsection'
-
- * `\paragraph'
-
- * `\subparagraph'
-
- All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,
-
- `\chapter[optional]{title}'
-
- In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory
-argument of the sectioning command can appear in two other places:
-
- 1. The table of contents
-
- 2. The running head at the top of the page
-
- You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places
-as appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the
-sectioning commands have an `optional' argument that provides the text
-for these other two purposes.
-
- All sectioning commands have `*'-forms that print a title, but do
-not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of contents.
-
- `\appendix'
-
- The `\appendix' command changes the way sectional units are
-numbered. The `\appendix' command generates no text and does not
-affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is
-something like
-
- \chapter{The First Chapter}
- ...
- \appendix
- \chapter{The First Appendix}
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Spaces & Boxes, Next: Special Characters, Prev: Sectioning, Up: Commands
-
-2.17 Spaces & Boxes
-===================
-
-All the predefined length parameters (*note Predefined lengths::) can be
-used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
-
-* Menu:
-
-Horizontal space
-* \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal dots.
-* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space.
-* \hrulefill:: Stretchable horizontal rule.
-* \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space.
-Vertical space
-* \addvspace:: Fixed vertical space.
-* \bigskip:: Fixed vertical space.
-* \medskip:: Fixed vertical space.
-* \smallskip:: Fixed vertical space.
-* \vfill:: Stretchable vertical space.
-* \vspace:: Fixed vertical space.
-Boxes
-* \fbox:: Framebox.
-* \framebox:: Framebox, adjustable position.
-* lrbox:: An environment like \sbox.
-* \makebox:: Box, adjustable position.
-* \mbox:: Box.
-* \newsavebox:: Declare a name for saving a box.
-* \parbox:: Box with text in paragraph mode.
-* \raisebox:: Raise or lower text.
-* \rule:: Lines and squares.
-* \savebox:: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
-* \sbox:: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
-* \usebox:: Print saved text.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \dotfill, Next: \hfill, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.1 \dotfill
----------------
-
-The `\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that produces dots
-instead of just spaces.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \hrulefill, Prev: \dotfill, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.2 \hfill
--------------
-
-The `\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can stretch
-or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \hrulefill, Next: \hspace, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.3 \hrulefill
------------------
-
-The `\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
-stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
-rule.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \hspace, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \hrulefill, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.4 \hspace
---------------
-
-`\hspace[*]{length}'
-
- The `\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The length of the
-space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e.,
-points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space
-with an `\hspace' command. Adding negative space is like backspacing.
-
- LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If
-you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional `*'
-argument. Then the space is never removed.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \addvspace, Next: \bigskip, Prev: \hspace, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.5 \addvspace
------------------
-
-`\addvspace{length}'
-
- The `\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height
-length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
-point in the output by a previous `\addvspace' command, then this
-command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length
-of the total vertical space equal to `length'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \bigskip, Next: \medskip, Prev: \addvspace, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.6 \bigskip
----------------
-
-The `\bigskip' command is equivalent to `\vspace{bigskipamount}' where
-`bigskipamount' is determined by the document class.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \medskip, Next: \smallskip, Prev: \bigskip, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.7 \medskip
----------------
-
-The `\medskip' command is equivalent to `\vspace{medskipamount}' where
-`medskipamount' is determined by the document class.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \smallskip, Next: \vfill, Prev: \medskip, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.8 \smallskip
------------------
-
-`\smallskip'
-
- The `\smallskip' command is equivalent to `\vspace{smallskipamount}'
-where `smallskipamount' is determined by the document class.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \vfill, Next: \vspace, Prev: \smallskip, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.9 \vfill
--------------
-
-The `\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length which can stretch or
-shrink vertically.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \vspace, Next: \fbox, Prev: \vfill, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.10 \vspace
----------------
-
-`\vspace[*]{length}'
-
- The `\vspace' command adds vertical space. The length of the space
-can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points,
-inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an
-`\vspace' command.
-
- LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you
-don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional `*'
-argument. Then the space is never removed.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \fbox, Next: \framebox, Prev: \vspace, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.11 \fbox
--------------
-
-`\fbox{text}'
-
- The `\fbox' command is exactly the same as the `\mbox' command,
-except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
-creates.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \framebox, Next: lrbox, Prev: \fbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.12 \framebox
------------------
-
-`\framebox[width][position]{text}'
-
- The `\framebox' command is exactly the same as the `\makebox'
-command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that
-it creates.
-
- The framebox command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule', and
-leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: lrbox, Next: \makebox, Prev: \framebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.13 lrbox
--------------
-
-`\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}'
-
- This is the environment form of `\sbox'.
-
- The text inside the environment is saved in the box `cmd', which
-must have been declared with `\newsavebox'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \makebox, Next: \mbox, Prev: lrbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.14 \makebox
-----------------
-
-`\makebox[width][position]{text}'
-
- The `\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the
-`text' specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional
-`width' argument. The position of the text within the box is
-determined by the optional `position' argument.
-
- * `c' -- centred (default)
-
- * `l' -- flushleft
-
- * `r' -- flushright
-
- * `s' -- stretch from left to right margin. The text must contain
- stretchable space for this to work.
-
- *Note \makebox (picture)::.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \mbox, Next: \newsavebox, Prev: \makebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.15 \mbox
--------------
-
-`\mbox{text}'
-
- The `\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text
-created by its argument.
-
- Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \newsavebox, Next: \parbox, Prev: \mbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.16 \newsavebox
--------------------
-
-`\newsavebox{cmd}'
-
- Declares `cmd', which must be a command name that is not already
-defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \newsavebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.17 \parbox
----------------
-
-`\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}'
-
- A `parbox' is a box whose contents are created in `paragraph' mode.
-The `\parbox' has two mandatory arguments:
-
- * `width' - specifies the width of the parbox, and
-
- * `text' - the text that goes inside the parbox.
-
- LaTeX will position a `parbox' so its centre lines up with the
-centre of the text line. The optional position argument allows you to
-line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox (default is top).
-
- If the height argument is not given, the box will have the natural
-height of the text.
-
- The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside the
-box. If it is not specified, position is used.
-
- * `t' -- text is placed at the top of the box.
-
- * `c' -- text is centred in the box.
-
- * `b' -- text is placed at the bottom of the box.
-
- * `s' -- stretch vertically. The text must contain vertically
- stretchable space for this to work.
-
- A `\parbox' command is used for a parbox containing a small piece of
-text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any
-of the paragraph-making environments inside a `\parbox' argument. For
-larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making
-environment, you should use a `minipage' environment *Note minipage::.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \raisebox, Next: \rule, Prev: \parbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.18 \raisebox
------------------
-
-`\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}'
-
- The `\raisebox' command is used to raise or lower text. The first
-mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or
-lowered if it is a negative amount). The text itself is processed in
-`LR mode'.
-
- Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different
-size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would
-normally think it has. The `\raisebox' command lets you tell LaTeX how
-tall it is.
-
- The first optional argument, `extend-above', makes LaTeX think that
-the text extends above the line by the amount specified. The second
-optional argument, `extend-below', makes LaTeX think that the text
-extends below the line by the amount specified.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \rule, Next: \savebox, Prev: \raisebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.19 \rule
--------------
-
-`\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}'
-
- The `\rule' command is used to produce horizontal lines. The
-arguments are defined as follows:
-
- * `raise-height' - specifies how high to raise the rule (optional)
-
- * `width' - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
-
- * `thickness' - specifies the thickness of the rule (mandatory)
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \savebox, Next: \sbox, Prev: \rule, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.20 \savebox
-----------------
-
- \savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}
-
- This command typeset `text' in a box just as for `\makebox'.
-However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin
-`cmd', which must have been declared with `\newsavebox'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \sbox, Next: \usebox, Prev: \savebox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.21 \sbox
--------------
-
-`\sbox{text}'
-
- This commands typeset `text' in a box just as for `\mbox'. However,
-instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin `cmd', which
-must have been declared with `\newsavebox'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \usebox, Prev: \sbox, Up: Spaces & Boxes
-
-2.17.22 \usebox
----------------
-
-`\usebox{cmd}'
-
- Prints the box most recently saved in bin `cmd' by a `\savebox'
-command.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Special Characters, Next: Splitting the Input, Prev: Spaces & Boxes, Up: Commands
-
-2.18 Special Characters
-=======================
-
-The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called
-"special printing characters", or simply "special characters".
-
- # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-
- Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you
-are doing something special. If you simply want the character to be
-printed just as any other letter, include a `\' in front of the
-character. For example, `\$' will produce `$' in your output.
-
- One exception to this rule is the `\' itself because `\\' has its
-own special meaning. A `\' is produced by typing `$\backslash$' in
-your file.
-
- Also, `\~' means `place a tilde accent over the following letter',
-so you will probably want to use `\verb' instead.
-
- In addition, you can access any character of a font once you know its
-number by using the `\symbol' command. For example, the character used
-for displaying spaces in the `\verb*' command has the code decimal 32,
-so it can be typed as `\symbol{32}'.
-
- You can also specify octal numbers with `'' or hexadecimal numbers
-with `"', so the previous example could also be written as
-`\symbol{'40}' or `\symbol{"20}'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Splitting the Input, Next: Starting & Ending, Prev: Special Characters, Up: Commands
-
-2.19 Splitting the Input
-========================
-
-A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole
-input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into
-several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use,
-there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type
-when you run LaTeX.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \include:: Conditionally include a file.
-* \includeonly:: Determine which files are included.
-* \input:: Unconditionally include a file.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \include, Next: \includeonly, Prev: Splitting the Input, Up: Splitting the Input
-
-2.19.1 \include
----------------
-
-`\include{file}'
-
- The `\include' command is used in conjunction with the
-`\includeonly' command for selective inclusion of files. The `file'
-argument is the first name of a file, denoting `file.tex'. If `file'
-is one the file names in the file list of the `\includeonly' command or
-if there is no `\includeonly' command, the `\include' command is
-equivalent to
-
- \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
-
- except that if the file `file.tex' does not exist, then a warning
-message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the
-file list, the `\include' command is equivalent to `\clearpage'.
-
- The `\include' command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
-read by another `\include' command.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \includeonly, Next: \input, Prev: \include, Up: Splitting the Input
-
-2.19.2 \includeonly
--------------------
-
-`\includeonly{'file_list`}'
-
- The `\includeonly' command controls which files will be read in by
-an `\include' command. file_list should be a comma-separated list of
-filenames. Each filename must match exactly a filename specified in a
-`\include' command. This command can only appear in the preamble.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \input, Prev: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the Input
-
-2.19.3 \input
--------------
-
-`\input{file}'
-
- The `\input' command causes the indicated `file' to be read and
-processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current
-file at that point. The file name may be a complete file name with
-extension or just a first name, in which case the file `file.tex' is
-used.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Starting & Ending, Next: Table of Contents, Prev: Splitting the Input, Up: Commands
-
-2.20 Starting & Ending
-======================
-
-Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum:
-
- \documentclass{class}
- \begin{document}
- ... your text goes here ...
- \end{document}
-
- where the `class' selected is one of the valid classes for LaTeX.
-*Note Document Classes::, (and *note Overview::), for details of the
-various document classes available locally.
-
- You may include other LaTeX commands between the `\documentclass'
-and the `\begin{document}' commands (i.e., in the `preamble').
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Table of Contents, Next: Terminal Input/Output, Prev: Starting & Ending, Up: Commands
-
-2.21 Table of Contents
-======================
-
-A table of contents is produced with the `\tableofcontents' command.
-You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go;
-LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces a heading, but it does not
-automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table
-of contents, include a `\newpage' command after the `\tableofcontents'
-command.
-
- There are similar commands `\listoffigures' and `\listoftables' for
-producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively.
-Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents.
-
- NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you cannot have
-the `\nofiles' command in your document.
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \addcontentsline:: Add an entry to table of contents etc.
-* \addtocontents:: Add text directly to table of contents file etc.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \addcontentsline, Next: \addtocontents, Prev: Table of Contents, Up: Table of Contents
-
-2.21.1 \addcontentsline
------------------------
-
-`\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}'
-
- The `\addcontentsline' command adds an entry to the specified list
-or table where:
-
- * `file' is the extension of the file on which information is to be
- written: `toc' (table of contents), `lof' (list of figures), or
- `lot' (list of tables).
-
- * `sec_unit' controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one
- of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument:
- 1. `toc' -- the name of the sectional unit, such as part or
- subsection.
-
- 2. `lof' -- figure
-
- 3. `lot' -- table
-
- * `entry' is the text of the entry.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \addtocontents, Prev: \addcontentsline, Up: Table of Contents
-
-2.21.2 \addtocontents
----------------------
-
-`\addtocontents{file}{text}'
-
- The `\addtocontents' command adds text (or formatting commands)
-directly to the file that generates the table of contents or list of
-figures or tables.
-
- * `file' is the extension of the file on which information is to be
- written: `toc' (table of contents), `lof' (list of figures), or
- `lot' (list of tables).
-
- * `text' is the information to be written.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Terminal Input/Output, Next: Typefaces, Prev: Table of Contents, Up: Commands
-
-2.22 Terminal Input/Output
-==========================
-
-* Menu:
-
-* \typein:: Read text from the terminal.
-* \typeout:: Write text to the terminal.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \typein, Next: \typeout, Up: Terminal Input/Output
-
-2.22.1 \typein
---------------
-
-`\typein[cmd]{msg}'
-
- Prints `msg' on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for
-you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the `cmd' argument
-is missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been included in
-the input file in place of the `\typein' command. If the `cmd'
-argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is
-then defined or redefined to be the typed input.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: \typeout, Prev: \typein, Up: Terminal Input/Output
-
-2.22.2 \typeout
----------------
-
-`\typeout{msg}'
-
- Prints `msg' on the terminal and in the `log' file. Commands in
-`msg' that are defined with `\newcommand' or `\renewcommand' are
-replaced by their definitions before being printed.
-
- LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
-and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to `msg'. A `\space'
-command in `msg' causes a single space to be printed. A `^^J' in `msg'
-prints a newline.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Typefaces, Prev: Terminal Input/Output, Up: Commands
-
-2.23 Typefaces
-==============
-
-The `typeface' is specified by giving the "size" and "style". A
-typeface is also called a "font".
-
-* Menu:
-
-* Styles:: Select roman, italics etc.
-* Sizes:: Select point size.
-* Low-level font commands:: Commands for wizards.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Styles, Next: Sizes, Prev: Typefaces, Up: Typefaces
-
-2.23.1 \Styles
---------------
-
-The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
-
- These commands are used like `\textit{italics text}'. The
-corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form", which
-takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
-next type style command or the end of the current group.
-
- The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
-`\sffamily\bfseries' to get sans serif boldface.
-
- You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; e.g.
-`\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'.
-
-`\textrm (\rmfamily)'
- Roman.
-
-`\textit (\itshape)'
-
-`\emph'
- Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm).
-
-`\textmd (\mdseries)'
- Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface.
-
-`\textbf (\bfseries)'
- Boldface.
-
-`\textup (\upshape)'
- Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
-
-`\textsl (\slshape)'
- Slanted.
-
-`\textsf (\sffamily)'
- Sans serif.
-
-`\textsc (\scshape)'
- Small caps.
-
-`\texttt (\ttfamily)'
- Typewriter.
-
-`\textnormal (\normalfont)'
- Main document font.
-
-`\mathrm'
- Roman, for use in math mode.
-
-`\mathbf'
- Boldface, for use in math mode.
-
-`\mathsf'
- Sans serif, for use in math mode.
-
-`\mathtt'
- Typewriter, for use in math mode.
-
-`\mathit'
- Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names with several
- letters.
-
-`\mathnormal'
- For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
-
-`\mathcal'
- `Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
-
- In addition, the command `\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
-switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
-`\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Sizes, Next: Low-level font commands, Prev: Styles, Up: Typefaces
-
-2.23.2 Sizes
-------------
-
-The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX.
-
- The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of the
-declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of
-the current group.
-
- You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
-`\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.
-
-`\tiny'
-
-`\scriptsize'
-
-`\footnotesize'
-
-`\small'
-
-`\normalsize'
- (default)
-
-`\large'
-
-`\Large'
-
-`\LARGE'
-
-`\huge'
-
-`\Huge'
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Low-level font commands, Prev: Sizes, Up: Typefaces
-
-2.23.3 Low-level font commands
-------------------------------
-
-These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
-packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
-ones. For full details, you should consult Chapter 7 of `The LaTeX
-Companion'.
-
-`\fontencoding{enc}'
- Select font encoding. Valid encodings include `OT1' and `T1'.
-
-`\fontfamily{family}'
- Select font family. Valid families include:
-
- * `cmr' for Computer Modern Roman
-
- * `cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif
-
- * `cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter
-
- and numerous others.
-
-`\fontseries{series}'
- Select font series. Valid series include:
-
- * `m' Medium (normal)
-
- * `b' Bold
-
- * `c' Condensed
-
- * `bc' Bold condensed
-
- * `bx' Bold extended
-
- and various other combinations.
-
-`\fontshape{shape}'
- Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
-
- * `n' Upright (normal)
-
- * `it' Italic
-
- * `sl' Slanted (oblique)
-
- * `sc' Small caps
-
- * `ui' Upright italics
-
- * `ol' Outline
-
- The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
-
-`\fontsize{size}{skip}'
- Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to;
- the second is the `\baselineskip' to use. The unit of both
- parameters defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that the
- baselineskip should be 1.2 times the font size.
-
-`\selectfont'
- The changes made by calling the four font commands described above
- do not come into effect until `\selectfont' is called.
-
-`\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}'
- Equivalent to calling `\fontencoding', `\fontfamily',
- `\fontseries' and `\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed
- by `\selectfont'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Parameters, Next: Concept Index, Prev: Commands, Up: Top
-
-3 Parameters
-************
-
-The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX
-uses `.tex' as a default file extension. If you omit the input file
-entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command
-options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g.
-
- `latex ``\scrollmode\input foo.tex'''
-
- will process `foo.tex' without pausing after every error.
-
- Output files are always created in the current directory. When you
-fail to specify an input file name, TeX bases the output names on the
-file specification associated with the logical name TEX_OUTPUT,
-typically `texput.log'.
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Concept Index, Next: Command Index, Prev: Parameters, Up: Top
-
-Concept Index
-*************
-
-
-* Menu:
-
-* Accessing any character of a font: Special Characters. (line 23)
-* Aligning Equations: eqnarray. (line 6)
-* Appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 41)
-* Arrays, math: array. (line 6)
-* article class: Document Classes. (line 6)
-* Author, for titlepage: \author. (line 6)
-* Bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6)
-* Bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6)
-* BibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
-* book class: Document Classes. (line 6)
-* Boxes: Spaces & Boxes. (line 6)
-* Cc list: \cc. (line 6)
-* Centering text: \centering. (line 6)
-* Centering text, environment for: center. (line 6)
-* Characters, reserved: Special Characters. (line 6)
-* Characters, special: Special Characters. (line 6)
-* Classes of document: Document Classes. (line 6)
-* Commands, defining new ones: \newcommand. (line 6)
-* Computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
-* Counters, a list of: Counters. (line 6)
-* Counters, creating: \newcounter. (line 6)
-* Counters, getting the value of: \value. (line 6)
-* Counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 6)
-* Creating letters: Letters. (line 6)
-* Creating pictures: picture. (line 6)
-* Creating tables: table. (line 6)
-* Cross referencing: Cross References. (line 6)
-* Cross referencing using page number: \pageref. (line 6)
-* Cross referencing using section number: \ref. (line 6)
-* Date, for titlepage: \date. (line 6)
-* Defining a new command: \newcommand. (line 6)
-* Defining new environments: \newenvironment. (line 6)
-* Defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 6)
-* Defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 6)
-* Displaying quoted text: quote. (line 6)
-* Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation.
- (line 6)
-* Document Classes: Document Classes. (line 6)
-* Enclosed material: \encl. (line 6)
-* Ending & Starting: Starting & Ending. (line 6)
-* Enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
-* Environments: Environments. (line 6)
-* Environments, defining: \newenvironment. (line 6)
-* Equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 6)
-* Equations, environment for: equation. (line 6)
-* exponent: Math Formulae. (line 32)
-* Figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 6)
-* Flushing a page: \clearpage. (line 6)
-* Font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands.
- (line 6)
-* Font Sizes: Sizes. (line 6)
-* Font Styles: Styles. (line 6)
-* Fonts: Typefaces. (line 6)
-* Fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6)
-* Footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 6)
-* Footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6)
-* Formatting Text: \centering. (line 6)
-* Formulae, environment for: equation. (line 6)
-* Formulae, maths: Math Formulae. (line 6)
-* Global options: Document Classes. (line 75)
-* Greek letters: Math Symbols. (line 6)
-* Hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6)
-* Hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
-* Indent, forcing: \indent. (line 6)
-* Indent, suppressing: \noindent. (line 6)
-* Input file, splitting: Splitting the Input. (line 6)
-* Input/Output: Terminal Input/Output.
- (line 6)
-* Inserting figures: figure. (line 6)
-* Justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 6)
-* Justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 6)
-* Labelled lists, creating: description. (line 6)
-* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 6)
-* Layout commands: Layout. (line 3)
-* Left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 6)
-* Left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
-* Left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 6)
-* Lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 6)
-* Lengths, defining a new: \newlength. (line 6)
-* Lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 6)
-* Lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
-* Lengths, setting value of: \setlength. (line 6)
-* letter class: Document Classes. (line 6)
-* Letters: Letters. (line 6)
-* Letters, ending: \closing. (line 6)
-* Letters, starting: \opening. (line 6)
-* Line Breaking: Line & Page Breaking. (line 6)
-* Line breaks: \linebreak. (line 6)
-* Lines in tables: tabular. (line 6)
-* Lining text up in columns using tab stops: tabbing. (line 6)
-* Lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 6)
-* Lists of items: itemize. (line 6)
-* Lists of items, generic: list. (line 6)
-* Lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 6)
-* Loading additional packages: Document Classes. (line 71)
-* Low-level font commands: Low-level font commands.
- (line 6)
-* LR mode: Modes. (line 6)
-* Making a title page: titlepage. (line 6)
-* Making paragraphs: Making Paragraphs. (line 6)
-* Margin Notes: Margin Notes. (line 6)
-* Math Formulae: Math Formulae. (line 6)
-* Math mode: Modes. (line 6)
-* Math mode, entering: Math Formulae. (line 6)
-* Math mode, spacing: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 6)
-* Maths Miscellany: Math Miscellany. (line 6)
-* Maths symbols: Math Symbols. (line 6)
-* Minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 6)
-* Modes: Modes. (line 6)
-* Multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 6)
-* New line, starting: \\. (line 6)
-* New line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6)
-* New Page: \newpage. (line 6)
-* Notes in the margin: Margin Notes. (line 6)
-* Options, global: Document Classes. (line 75)
-* Overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6)
-* Packages, loading: Document Classes. (line 71)
-* Page break, forcing: \pagebreak. (line 6)
-* Page Breaking: Line & Page Breaking. (line 6)
-* Page Formatting: Line & Page Breaking. (line 6)
-* Page numbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
-* Page styles: Page Styles. (line 6)
-* Paragraph mode: Modes. (line 6)
-* Paragraph, starting a new: \par. (line 6)
-* Paragraphs: Making Paragraphs. (line 6)
-* Pictures, creating: picture. (line 6)
-* Poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6)
-* Predefined lengths: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
-* Programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
-* Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation.
- (line 6)
-* Quoted text, displaying: quote. (line 6)
-* Ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
-* Ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 6)
-* Ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 6)
-* Ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
-* Remarks in the margin: Margin Notes. (line 6)
-* report class: Document Classes. (line 6)
-* Reserved Characters: Special Characters. (line 6)
-* Right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
-* Right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 6)
-* Sectioning: Sectioning. (line 6)
-* Simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6)
-* Sizes of text: Sizes. (line 6)
-* Space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 6)
-* Spaces: Spaces & Boxes. (line 6)
-* Spacing, within Math mode: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 6)
-* Special Characters: Special Characters. (line 6)
-* Splitting the input file: Splitting the Input. (line 6)
-* Starting & Ending: Starting & Ending. (line 6)
-* Starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
-* Styles of text: Styles. (line 6)
-* Styles, page: Page Styles. (line 6)
-* Subscript: Subscripts & Superscripts.
- (line 6)
-* Superscript: Subscripts & Superscripts.
- (line 6)
-* Symbols: Math Symbols. (line 6)
-* Tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 6)
-* Table of Contents, creating: Table of Contents. (line 6)
-* Tables, creating: table. (line 6)
-* Terminal Input/Output: Terminal Input/Output.
- (line 6)
-* Thanks, for titlepage: \thanks. (line 6)
-* Theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6)
-* Theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6)
-* Title making: \maketitle. (line 6)
-* Title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6)
-* Title, for titlepage: \title. (line 6)
-* Typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6)
-* Typeface Sizes: Sizes. (line 6)
-* Typeface Styles: Styles. (line 6)
-* Typefaces: Typefaces. (line 6)
-* Using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
-* Variables, a list of: Counters. (line 6)
-* Verbatim text: \verb. (line 6)
-* Vertical space, inserting: \addvspace. (line 6)
-
-
-File: latex.info, Node: Command Index, Prev: Concept Index, Up: Top
-
-Command Index
-*************
-
-
-* Menu:
-
-* $: Math Formulae. (line 6)
-* \!: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 11)
-* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 46)
-* \(: Math Formulae. (line 6)
-* \): Math Formulae. (line 6)
-* \+: tabbing. (line 38)
-* \,: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 11)
-* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
-* \- (tabbing): tabbing. (line 42)
-* \;: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 11)
-* \<: tabbing. (line 33)
-* \=: tabbing. (line 27)
-* \>: tabbing. (line 30)
-* \[: Math Formulae. (line 6)
-* \\: \\. (line 6)
-* \]: Math Formulae. (line 6)
-* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 52)
-* \a: tabbing. (line 75)
-* \addcontentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
-* \address: \address. (line 6)
-* \addtocontents: \addtocontents. (line 6)
-* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 6)
-* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 6)
-* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 6)
-* \Alph: \alph. (line 6)
-* \alph: \alph. (line 6)
-* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 41)
-* \arabic: \arabic. (line 6)
-* \author: \author. (line 6)
-* \backslash: Special Characters. (line 23)
-* \begin: Environments. (line 6)
-* \bfseries: Styles. (line 31)
-* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6)
-* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
-* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
-* \bigskip: \bigskip. (line 6)
-* \caption: figure. (line 13)
-* \cc: \cc. (line 6)
-* \cdots: Math Miscellany. (line 7)
-* \centering: \centering. (line 6)
-* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 6)
-* \circle: \circle. (line 6)
-* \cite: \cite. (line 6)
-* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
-* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 6)
-* \cline: \cline. (line 6)
-* \closing: \closing. (line 6)
-* \COLON: Spacing in Math Mode. (line 11)
-* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6)
-* \date: \date. (line 6)
-* \ddots: Math Miscellany. (line 11)
-* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 10)
-* \documentclass: Document Classes. (line 6)
-* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 6)
-* \emph: Styles. (line 25)
-* \encl: \encl. (line 6)
-* \end: Environments. (line 6)
-* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
-* \fbox: \fbox. (line 6)
-* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 6)
-* \fnsymbol: \fnsymbol. (line 6)
-* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands.
- (line 12)
-* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands.
- (line 15)
-* \fontseries: Low-level font commands.
- (line 26)
-* \fontshape: Low-level font commands.
- (line 41)
-* \fontsize: Low-level font commands.
- (line 58)
-* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6)
-* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6)
-* \footnotesize: Sizes. (line 20)
-* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6)
-* \frac: Math Miscellany. (line 14)
-* \frame: \frame. (line 6)
-* \framebox <1>: \framebox. (line 6)
-* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6)
-* \fussy: \fussy. (line 6)
-* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 8)
-* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6)
-* \hline: \hline. (line 6)
-* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 6)
-* \hspace: \hspace. (line 6)
-* \Huge: Sizes. (line 35)
-* \huge: Sizes. (line 33)
-* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6)
-* \include: \include. (line 6)
-* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 6)
-* \indent: \indent. (line 6)
-* \input: \input. (line 6)
-* \item: itemize. (line 6)
-* \itshape: Styles. (line 23)
-* \kill: tabbing. (line 61)
-* \label: \label. (line 6)
-* \LARGE: Sizes. (line 31)
-* \Large: Sizes. (line 29)
-* \large: Sizes. (line 27)
-* \ldots: Math Miscellany. (line 17)
-* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 22)
-* \line: \line. (line 6)
-* \linebreak: \linebreak. (line 6)
-* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 6)
-* \listoffigures: Table of Contents. (line 13)
-* \listoftables: Table of Contents. (line 13)
-* \location: \location. (line 6)
-* \makebox: \makebox. (line 6)
-* \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture). (line 6)
-* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6)
-* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6)
-* \markboth: \markboth. (line 6)
-* \markright: \markright. (line 6)
-* \mathbf: Styles. (line 55)
-* \mathcal: Styles. (line 71)
-* \mathit: Styles. (line 64)
-* \mathnormal: Styles. (line 68)
-* \mathrm: Styles. (line 52)
-* \mathsf: Styles. (line 58)
-* \mathtt: Styles. (line 61)
-* \mathversion: Styles. (line 73)
-* \mbox: \mbox. (line 6)
-* \mdseries: Styles. (line 28)
-* \medskip: \medskip. (line 6)
-* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6)
-* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6)
-* \name: \name. (line 6)
-* \newcommand: \newcommand. (line 6)
-* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6)
-* \newenvironment: \newenvironment. (line 6)
-* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6)
-* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6)
-* \newline: \newline. (line 6)
-* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6)
-* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6)
-* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6)
-* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6)
-* \nofiles: Table of Contents. (line 18)
-* \noindent: \noindent. (line 6)
-* \nolinebreak: \nolinebreak. (line 6)
-* \nopagebreak: \nopagebreak. (line 6)
-* \normalfont: Styles. (line 49)
-* \normalsize: Sizes. (line 24)
-* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6)
-* \opening: \opening. (line 6)
-* \oval: \oval. (line 6)
-* \overbrace: Math Miscellany. (line 21)
-* \overline: Math Miscellany. (line 24)
-* \pagebreak: \pagebreak. (line 6)
-* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
-* \pageref: \pageref. (line 6)
-* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 6)
-* \par: \par. (line 6)
-* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
-* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6)
-* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 72)
-* \ps: \ps. (line 6)
-* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 67)
-* \put: \put. (line 6)
-* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
-* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6)
-* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6)
-* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6)
-* \ref: \ref. (line 6)
-* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6)
-* \rmfamily: Styles. (line 20)
-* \Roman: \roman. (line 6)
-* \roman: \roman. (line 6)
-* \rule: \rule. (line 6)
-* \savebox: \savebox. (line 6)
-* \sbox: \sbox. (line 6)
-* \scriptsize: Sizes. (line 18)
-* \scshape: Styles. (line 43)
-* \selectfont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 64)
-* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6)
-* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6)
-* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6)
-* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6)
-* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6)
-* \sffamily: Styles. (line 40)
-* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6)
-* \signature: \signature. (line 6)
-* \sloppy: \sloppy. (line 6)
-* \slshape: Styles. (line 37)
-* \small: Sizes. (line 22)
-* \smallskip: \smallskip. (line 6)
-* \sqrt: Math Miscellany. (line 27)
-* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 6)
-* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6)
-* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 6)
-* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 6)
-* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
-* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 6)
-* \symbol: Special Characters. (line 23)
-* \tableofcontents: Table of Contents. (line 6)
-* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6)
-* \textbf: Styles. (line 31)
-* \textit: Styles. (line 23)
-* \textmd: Styles. (line 28)
-* \textnormal: Styles. (line 49)
-* \textrm: Styles. (line 20)
-* \textsc: Styles. (line 43)
-* \textsf: Styles. (line 40)
-* \textsl: Styles. (line 37)
-* \texttt: Styles. (line 46)
-* \textup: Styles. (line 34)
-* \thanks: \thanks. (line 6)
-* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
-* \tiny: Sizes. (line 16)
-* \title: \title. (line 6)
-* \today: titlepage. (line 13)
-* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 12)
-* \ttfamily: Styles. (line 46)
-* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6)
-* \typein: \typein. (line 6)
-* \typeout: \typeout. (line 6)
-* \underbrace: Math Miscellany. (line 32)
-* \underline: Math Miscellany. (line 35)
-* \upshape: Styles. (line 34)
-* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6)
-* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6)
-* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 68)
-* \usepackage: Document Classes. (line 68)
-* \value: \value. (line 6)
-* \vdots: Math Miscellany. (line 39)
-* \vector: \vector. (line 6)
-* \verb: \verb. (line 6)
-* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6)
-* \vline: \vline. (line 6)
-* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6)
-* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
-* ^: Subscripts & Superscripts.
- (line 6)
-* _: Subscripts & Superscripts.
- (line 6)
-* array: array. (line 6)
-* center: center. (line 6)
-* description: description. (line 6)
-* enumerate: enumerate. (line 6)
-* eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 6)
-* equation: equation. (line 6)
-* figure: figure. (line 6)
-* flushleft: flushleft. (line 6)
-* flushright: flushright. (line 6)
-* itemize: itemize. (line 6)
-* letter: letter. (line 6)
-* list: list. (line 6)
-* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6)
-* minipage: minipage. (line 6)
-* picture: picture. (line 6)
-* quotation: quotation. (line 6)
-* quote: quote. (line 6)
-* tabbing: tabbing. (line 6)
-* table: table. (line 6)
-* tabular: tabular. (line 6)
-* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6)
-* theorem: theorem. (line 6)
-* titlepage: titlepage. (line 6)
-* verbatim: verbatim. (line 6)
-* verse: verse. (line 6)
-
-
-
-Tag Table:
-Node: Top1653
-Node: Overview2255
-Node: Commands3711
-Node: Counters5316
-Node: \addtocounter6763
-Node: \alph7070
-Node: \arabic7466
-Node: \fnsymbol7702
-Node: \newcounter8066
-Node: \refstepcounter8474
-Node: \roman8807
-Node: \stepcounter9191
-Node: \setcounter9439
-Node: \usecounter9708
-Node: \value10016
-Node: Cross References10466
-Node: \label10901
-Node: \pageref11765
-Node: \ref12061
-Node: Definitions12296
-Node: \newcommand12651
-Node: \newenvironment13756
-Node: \newtheorem14961
-Node: \newfont15869
-Node: Document Classes16160
-Node: Layout18210
-Node: \flushbottom18616
-Node: \onecolumn18919
-Node: \raggedbottom19132
-Node: \twocolumn19387
-Node: Environments19677
-Node: array21042
-Node: center21930
-Node: \centering22448
-Node: description23150
-Node: enumerate23528
-Node: eqnarray24270
-Node: equation24999
-Node: figure25300
-Node: flushleft26377
-Node: \raggedright26891
-Node: flushright27465
-Node: \raggedleft27980
-Node: itemize28553
-Node: letter29282
-Node: list29459
-Node: minipage30294
-Node: picture31191
-Node: \circle35158
-Node: \dashbox35509
-Node: \frame35880
-Node: \framebox (picture)36235
-Node: \line36702
-Node: \linethickness37053
-Node: \makebox (picture)37501
-Node: \multiput38195
-Node: \oval38516
-Node: \put39118
-Node: \shortstack39364
-Node: \vector39801
-Node: quotation40095
-Node: quote40499
-Node: tabbing40848
-Node: table43876
-Node: tabular44958
-Node: \cline48169
-Node: \hline48457
-Node: \multicolumn48744
-Node: \vline49281
-Node: thebibliography49598
-Node: \bibitem50456
-Node: \cite51168
-Node: \nocite51662
-Node: Using BibTeX51944
-Node: theorem53126
-Node: titlepage53411
-Node: verbatim53967
-Node: \verb54456
-Node: verse54909
-Node: Footnotes55306
-Node: \footnote55874
-Node: \footnotemark56378
-Node: \footnotetext56902
-Node: Lengths57363
-Node: \newlength57970
-Node: \setlength58283
-Node: \addtolength58660
-Node: \settodepth58965
-Node: \settoheight59236
-Node: \settowidth59511
-Node: Predefined lengths59788
-Node: Letters60309
-Node: \address62243
-Node: \cc62824
-Node: \closing63063
-Node: \encl63274
-Node: \location63451
-Node: \makelabels63709
-Node: \name63993
-Node: \opening64211
-Node: \ps64501
-Node: \signature64653
-Node: \startbreaks64983
-Node: \stopbreaks65201
-Node: \telephone65412
-Node: Line & Page Breaking65640
-Node: \\66876
-Node: \- (hyphenation)67377
-Node: \cleardoublepage67913
-Node: \clearpage68350
-Node: \enlargethispage68639
-Node: \fussy69152
-Node: \hyphenation69549
-Node: \linebreak69903
-Node: \newline70468
-Node: \newpage70699
-Node: \nolinebreak70883
-Node: \nopagebreak71373
-Node: \pagebreak71865
-Node: \sloppy72334
-Node: Making Paragraphs72662
-Node: \indent73202
-Node: \noindent73525
-Node: \par73812
-Node: Margin Notes74011
-Node: Math Formulae74922
-Node: Subscripts & Superscripts76164
-Node: Math Symbols76655
-Node: Spacing in Math Mode77052
-Node: Math Miscellany77611
-Node: Modes78636
-Node: Page Styles80476
-Node: \maketitle80981
-Node: \author81638
-Node: \date82007
-Node: \thanks82249
-Node: \title82442
-Node: \pagenumbering82680
-Node: \pagestyle83112
-Node: \markboth83869
-Node: \markright84452
-Node: \thispagestyle85027
-Node: Sectioning85326
-Node: Spaces & Boxes86691
-Node: \dotfill88102
-Node: \hfill88302
-Node: \hrulefill88551
-Node: \hspace88822
-Node: \addvspace89428
-Node: \bigskip89905
-Node: \medskip90157
-Node: \smallskip90409
-Node: \vfill90686
-Node: \vspace90898
-Node: \fbox91449
-Node: \framebox91725
-Node: lrbox92178
-Node: \makebox92494
-Node: \mbox93123
-Node: \newsavebox93424
-Node: \parbox93684
-Node: \raisebox95114
-Node: \rule95992
-Node: \savebox96452
-Node: \sbox96801
-Node: \usebox97121
-Node: Special Characters97318
-Node: Splitting the Input98618
-Node: \include99266
-Node: \includeonly100130
-Node: \input100576
-Node: Starting & Ending100985
-Node: Table of Contents101639
-Node: \addcontentsline102626
-Node: \addtocontents103418
-Node: Terminal Input/Output103958
-Node: \typein104237
-Node: \typeout104767
-Node: Typefaces105313
-Node: Styles105701
-Node: Sizes107466
-Node: Low-level font commands108045
-Node: Parameters109901
-Node: Concept Index110622
-Node: Command Index123628
-
-End Tag Table
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info b/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..edc546d1656
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf/doc/info/latex2e.info
@@ -0,0 +1,6992 @@
+This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.12 from
+latex2e.texi.
+
+This document is version 2.0 (June 2008) of an unofficial reference
+manual for LaTeX, a document preparation system. LaTeX is a macro
+package for TeX.
+
+ This was originally translated from `LATEX.HLP' v1.0a in the VMS
+Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D.
+Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The LaTeX 2.09 version was
+written by Stephen Gilmore. The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this
+by Torsten Martinsen. Karl Berry made further updates and additions,
+and gratefully acknowledges using `Hypertext Help with LaTeX', by
+Sheldon Green, and the `LaTeX Command Summary' (for LaTeX 2.09) by
+L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer (published by the TeX Users Group as
+`TeXniques' number 10), as reference material (text was not directly
+copied).
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007, 2008 Karl Berry.
+Copyright (C) 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.
+Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
+
+ Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+ Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
+this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
+the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
+permission notice identical to this one.
+
+ Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
+manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
+versions.
+
+INFO-DIR-SECTION TeX
+START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+* LaTeX2e: (latex2e). Unofficial LaTeX reference manual.
+END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Top, Next: Overview, Up: (dir)
+
+LaTeX2e
+*******
+
+This document is version 2.0 (June 2008) of an unofficial reference
+manual for LaTeX, a document preparation system. It is intended to
+cover LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many
+years.
+
+ LaTeX is implemented as a macro package for Donald E. Knuth's TeX
+typesetting program. LaTeX was originally created by Leslie Lamport;
+it is now maintained by a group of volunteers
+(`http://latex-project.org'). The official documentation written by
+the LaTeX project is available there. Again, the present document is
+unofficial and has not been reviewed by the LaTeX maintainers.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Overview:: What is LaTeX?
+* Starting & ending:: The standard beginning and end of a document.
+* Document classes:: Some of the various classes available.
+* Typefaces:: And fonts, such as bold, italics etc.
+* Layout:: Controlling the page layout.
+* Sectioning:: How to section properly.
+* Cross references:: Automatic referencing.
+* Environments:: Such as enumerate & itemize.
+* Line breaking:: Influencing line breaks.
+* Page breaking:: Influencing page breaks.
+* Footnotes:: How to produce footnotes.
+* Definitions:: Define your own commands etc.
+* Counters:: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
+* Lengths:: The length commands.
+* Making paragraphs:: Paragraph commands.
+* Math formulas:: How to create mathematical formulas.
+* Modes:: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+* Page Styles:: Various styles of page layout.
+* Spaces:: Horizontal and vertical space.
+* Boxes:: Making boxes.
+* Special insertions:: Inserting reserved and special characters.
+* Splitting the input:: Dealing with big files by splitting.
+* Front/back matter:: Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
+* Letters:: The letter class.
+* Terminal Input/Output:: User interaction.
+* Command Line:: System-independent command-line behavior.
+* Document templates:: Starter templates for various document classes.
+* Command Index:: Alphabetical list of LaTeX commands.
+* Concept Index:: General index.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Overview, Next: Starting & ending, Prev: Top, Up: Top
+
+1 Overview of LaTeX
+*******************
+
+The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the
+LaTeX "macro package" for TeX. To be more specific, it processes an
+input file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands
+that describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least
+three files as output:
+
+ 1. A main output file, which is one of:
+
+ 1. If invoked as `latex', a "Device Independent" (`.dvi') file.
+ This contains commands that can be translated into commands
+ for a variety of output devices. You can view such `.dvi'
+ output of LaTeX by using a program such as `xdvi' (display
+ directly) or `dvips' (convert to PostScript).
+
+ 2. If invoked as `pdflatex', a "Portable Document Format"
+ (`.pdf') file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with
+ all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but
+ it does make the output much larger than the `.dvi' produced
+ from the same document.
+
+ There are other less-common variants of LaTeX (and TeX) as well,
+ which can produce HTML, XML, and other things.
+
+ 2. A "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary information and
+ diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file.
+
+ 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for
+ things such as sectioning.
+
+ A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a
+`\' followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single
+non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, `[]', are optional
+while arguments contained in braces, `{}', are required.
+
+ LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless
+explicitly directed to do otherwise.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Starting & ending, Next: Document classes, Prev: Overview, Up: Top
+
+2 Starting & ending
+*******************
+
+A minimal input file looks like the following:
+
+ \documentclass{CLASS}
+ \begin{document}
+ YOUR TEXT
+ \end{document}
+
+where the CLASS is a valid document class for LaTeX. *Note Document
+classes::, for details of the various document classes available
+locally.
+
+ You may include other LaTeX commands between the `\documentclass'
+and the `\begin{document}' commands (this area is called the
+"preamble").
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Document classes, Next: Typefaces, Prev: Starting & ending, Up: Top
+
+3 Document classes
+******************
+
+The class of a given document is defined with the command:
+
+ \documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS}
+
+The `\documentclass' command must be the first command in a LaTeX
+source file.
+
+ Built-in LaTeX document CLASS names are (many other document classes
+are available as add-ons; *note Overview::):
+
+ article report book letter slides
+
+ Standard OPTIONS are described below.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Document class options:: Global options.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Document class options, Up: Document classes
+
+3.1 Document class options
+==========================
+
+You can specify so-called "global options" or "class options" to the
+`\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual.
+To specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma:
+
+ \documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS}
+
+ Here is the list of the standard class options.
+
+ All of the standard classes except `slides' accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is `10pt'):
+
+ 10pt 11pt 12pt
+
+ All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the
+paper size (default is `letterpaper'):
+
+ a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+
+ Miscellaneous other options:
+
+`draft, final'
+ mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is
+ `final'.
+
+`fleqn'
+ Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
+
+`landscape'
+ Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
+
+`leqno'
+ Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the
+ right side.
+
+`openbib'
+ Use "open" bibliography format.
+
+`titlepage, notitlepage'
+ Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on
+ the class.
+
+ These options are not available with the slides class:
+
+`onecolumn'
+`twocolumn'
+ Typeset in one or two columns; default is `onecolumn'.
+
+`oneside'
+`twoside'
+ Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is `oneside', except for
+ the `book' class.
+
+ The `\evensidemargin' (`\oddsidemargin' parameter determines the
+ distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the
+ page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper
+ size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For
+ one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided,
+ `\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference between `\paperwidth'
+ and `\textwidth' with `\evensidemargin' the remainder.
+
+`openright'
+`openany'
+ Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default
+ is `openright' for book.
+
+ The `slides' class offers the option `clock' for printing the time
+at the bottom of each note.
+
+ Additional packages are loaded like this:
+
+ \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}
+
+ To specify more than one PKG, you can separate them with a comma, or
+use multiple `\usepackage' commands.
+
+ Any options given in the `\documentclass' command that are unknown
+by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
+`\usepackage'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Typefaces, Next: Layout, Prev: Document classes, Up: Top
+
+4 Typefaces
+***********
+
+Two important aspects of selecting a "font" are specifying a size and a
+style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Font styles:: Select roman, italics etc.
+* Font sizes:: Select point size.
+* Low-level font commands:: Select encoding, family, series, shape.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Font styles, Next: Font sizes, Up: Typefaces
+
+4.1 Font styles
+===============
+
+The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
+
+ These commands are used like `\textit{italic text}'. The
+corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form", which
+takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
+next type style command or the end of the current group.
+
+ The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either
+`\sffamily\bfseries' or `\bfseries\sffamily' to get bold sans serif.
+
+ You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for
+instance, `\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'.
+
+`\textrm (\rmfamily)'
+ Roman.
+
+`\textit (\itshape)'
+ Italics.
+
+`\emph'
+ Emphasis (switches between `\textit' and `\textrm').
+
+`\textmd (\mdseries)'
+ Medium weight (default).
+
+`\textbf (\bfseries)'
+ Boldface.
+
+`\textup (\upshape)'
+ Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+
+`\textsl (\slshape)'
+ Slanted.
+
+`\textsf (\sffamily)'
+ Sans serif.
+
+`\textsc (\scshape)'
+ Small caps.
+
+`\texttt (\ttfamily)'
+ Typewriter.
+
+`\textnormal (\normalfont)'
+ Main document font.
+
+`\mathrm'
+ Roman, for use in math mode.
+
+`\mathbf'
+ Boldface, for use in math mode.
+
+`\mathsf'
+ Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+
+`\mathtt'
+ Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+
+`\mathit'
+`(\mit)'
+ Italics, for use in math mode.
+
+`\mathnormal'
+ For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
+
+`\mathcal'
+ `Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
+
+ In addition, the command `\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+`\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
+
+ LaTeX also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to
+the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. They are used
+differently than the above commands, too: `{\CMD ...}' instead of
+`\CMD{...}'. These are two very different things.
+
+`\bf'
+ Switch to bold face.
+
+`\cal'
+ Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
+
+`\em'
+ Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics).
+
+`\it'
+ Italics.
+
+`\rm'
+ Roman.
+
+`\sc'
+ Small caps.
+
+`\sf'
+ Sans serif.
+
+`\sl'
+ Slanted (oblique).
+
+`\tt'
+ Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Font sizes, Next: Low-level font commands, Prev: Font styles, Up: Typefaces
+
+4.2 Font sizes
+==============
+
+The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The
+table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size
+used (in points) with the `10pt', `11pt', and `12pt' document size
+options, respectively (*note Document class options::).
+
+Command `10pt' `11pt' `12pt'
+--------------------------------------------------
+`\tiny' 5 6 6
+`\scriptsize' 7 8 8
+`\footnotesize' 8 9 10
+`\small' 9 10 10.95
+`\normalsize' (default) 10 10.95 12
+`\large' 12 12 14.4
+`\Large' 14.4 14.4 17.28
+`\LARGE' 17.28 17.28 20.74
+`\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88
+`\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88
+
+ The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of
+the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
+of the current group. You can also use the environment form of these
+commands; for instance, `\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Low-level font commands, Prev: Font sizes, Up: Typefaces
+
+4.3 Low-level font commands
+===========================
+
+These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
+packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
+ones.
+
+`\fontencoding{enc}'
+ Select font encoding. Valid encodings include `OT1' and `T1'.
+
+`\fontfamily{family}'
+ Select font family. Valid families include:
+
+ * `cmr' for Computer Modern Roman
+
+ * `cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif
+
+ * `cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter
+
+ and numerous others.
+
+`\fontseries{series}'
+ Select font series. Valid series include:
+
+ * `m' Medium (normal)
+
+ * `b' Bold
+
+ * `c' Condensed
+
+ * `bc' Bold condensed
+
+ * `bx' Bold extended
+
+ and various other combinations.
+
+`\fontshape{shape}'
+ Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+
+ * `n' Upright (normal)
+
+ * `it' Italic
+
+ * `sl' Slanted (oblique)
+
+ * `sc' Small caps
+
+ * `ui' Upright italics
+
+ * `ol' Outline
+
+ The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
+
+`\fontsize{size}{skip}'
+ Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to
+ and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a
+ parameter named `\baselineskip'. The unit of both parameters
+ defaults to pt. The default `\baselineskip' for the Computer
+ Modern typeface is 1.2 times the `\fontsize'.
+
+ The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the
+ `\baselinestretch' parameter when the type size changes; the
+ default is 1. However, the best way to "double space" a document,
+ if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use
+ the `setspace' package; see
+ `http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace'.
+
+`\selectfont'
+ The changes made by calling the four font commands described above
+ do not come into effect until `\selectfont' is called.
+
+`\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}'
+ The same as invoking `\fontencoding', `\fontfamily', `\fontseries'
+ and `\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by
+ `\selectfont'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Layout, Next: Sectioning, Prev: Typefaces, Up: Top
+
+5 Layout
+********
+
+Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \onecolumn:: Use one-column layout.
+* \twocolumn:: Use two-column layout.
+* \flushbottom:: Make all text pages the same height.
+* \raggedbottom:: Allow text pages of differing height.
+* Page layout parameters:: \headheight \footskip.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \twocolumn, Up: Layout
+
+5.1 `\onecolumn'
+================
+
+The `\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
+single-column output. This is the default.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \twocolumn, Next: \flushbottom, Prev: \onecolumn, Up: Layout
+
+5.2 `\twocolumn'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \twocolumn[TEXT1COL]
+
+ The `\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
+two-column output. If the optional TEXT1COL argument is present, it is
+typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.
+
+ These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
+
+`\columnsep'
+ The distance between columns (35pt by default).
+
+`\columnseprule'
+ The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so
+ there is no rule.
+
+`\columnwidth'
+ The width of the current column; this is equal to `\textwidth' in
+ single-column text.
+
+
+ These parameters control float behavior in two-column output:
+
+`\dbltopfraction'
+ Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
+ occupied by floats. Default `.7', can be usefully redefined to
+ (say) `.9' to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+
+`\dblfloatpagefraction'
+ The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
+ floats, for a two-column float page. Default `.5'.
+
+`\dblfloatsep'
+ Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float
+ page. Default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt'
+ documents, `14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for `12pt'.
+
+`\dbltextfloatsep'
+ Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a
+ page and the main text. Default `20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \twocolumn, Up: Layout
+
+5.3 `\flushbottom'
+==================
+
+The `\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height,
+adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page.
+
+ This is the default if `twocolumn' mode is selected (*note Document
+class options::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: Page layout parameters, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Layout
+
+5.4 `\raggedbottom'
+===================
+
+The `\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the natural height of
+the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Page layout parameters, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: Layout
+
+5.5 Page layout parameters
+==========================
+
+`\headheight'
+ Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is
+ `30pt', except in the `book' class, where it varies with the type
+ size.
+
+`\headsep'
+ Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the
+ top of the main text. Default is `25pt', except in the `book'
+ class, where it varies with the type size.
+
+`\footskip'
+ Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the
+ baseline of the page footer. Default is `30pt', except in the
+ `book' class, where it varies with the type size.
+
+`\linewidth'
+ Width of the current line; the default varies with the font size,
+ paper width, two-column mode, etc. For an `article' document in
+ `10pt', it's set to `345pt'; in two-column mode, that becomes
+ `229.5pt'.
+
+`\textheight'
+ The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies
+ with the font size, document class, etc. For an `article' or
+ `report' document in `10pt', it's set to `43\baselineskip'; for
+ `book', it's `41\baselineskip'. For `11pt', it's
+ `38\baselineskip' and for `12pt', `36\baselineskip'.
+
+`\textwidth'
+ The normal horizontal width of the page body; the default varies as
+ usual. For an `article' or `report' document, it's `345pt' at
+ `10pt', `360pt' at `11pt', and `390pt' at `12pt'. For a `book'
+ document, it's `4.5in' at `10pt', and `5in' at `11pt' or `12pt'.
+
+`\topmargin'
+ Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
+ paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is
+ computed based on many other parameters: `\paperheight - 2in -
+ \headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then
+ divided by two.
+
+`\topskip'
+ Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline
+ of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default
+ is the same as the font size, e.g., `10pt' at `10pt'.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Cross references, Prev: Layout, Up: Top
+
+6 Sectioning
+************
+
+Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units:
+
+`\part'
+
+`\chapter'
+ (report and book class only)
+
+`\section'
+
+`\subsection'
+
+`\subsubsection'
+
+`\paragraph'
+
+`\subparagraph'
+
+ All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g.,
+
+ \chapter[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}
+
+ In addition to providing the heading TITLE in the main text, the
+section title can appear in two other places:
+
+ 1. The table of contents.
+
+ 2. The running head at the top of the page.
+
+ You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text.
+To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument
+TOCTITLE that, when given, specifies the text for these other places.
+
+ Also, all sectioning commands have `*'-forms that print TITLE as
+usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the
+table of contents. For instance:
+
+ \section*{Preamble}
+
+ The `\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units
+are numbered. The `\appendix' command itself generates no text and
+does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command
+is something like
+
+ \chapter{A Chapter}
+ ...
+ \appendix
+ \chapter{The First Appendix}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Cross references, Next: Environments, Prev: Sectioning, Up: Top
+
+7 Cross references
+******************
+
+One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
+the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details."
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \label:: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+* \pageref:: Refer to a page number.
+* \ref:: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \label, Next: \pageref, Up: Cross references
+
+7.1 `\label'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \label{KEY}
+
+ A `\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to KEY the
+number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered
+environment assigns that number to KEY.
+
+ A KEY name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
+punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished.
+
+ To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is
+common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
+colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes:
+
+`ch'
+ for chapters
+
+`sec'
+ for lower-level sectioning commands
+
+`fig'
+ for figures
+
+`tab'
+ for tables
+
+`eq'
+ for equations
+
+ Thus, a label for a figure would look like `fig:snark' or
+`fig.snark'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Cross references
+
+7.2 `\pageref{KEY}'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \pageref{KEY}
+
+ The `\pageref'{KEY} command produces the page number of the place in
+the text where the corresponding `\label'{KEY} command appears.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \ref, Prev: \pageref, Up: Cross references
+
+7.3 `\ref{KEY}'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ref{KEY}
+
+ The `\ref' command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation, footnote, figure, ..., of the corresponding `\label' command
+(*note \label::). It does not produce any text, such as the word
+`Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Environments, Next: Line breaking, Prev: Cross references, Up: Top
+
+8 Environments
+**************
+
+LaTeX provides many environments for marking off certain text. Each
+environment begins and ends in the same manner:
+
+ \begin{ENVNAME}
+ ...
+ \end{ENVNAME}
+
+* Menu:
+
+* abstract:: Produce an abstract.
+* array:: Math arrays.
+* center:: Centred lines.
+* description:: Labelled lists.
+* displaymath:: Formulas that appear on their own line.
+* document:: Enclose the whole document.
+* enumerate:: Numbered lists.
+* eqnarray:: Sequences of aligned equations.
+* equation:: Displayed equation.
+* figure:: Floating figures.
+* flushleft:: Flushed left lines.
+* flushright:: Flushed right lines.
+* itemize:: Bulleted lists.
+* letter:: Letters.
+* list:: Generic list environment.
+* math:: In-line math.
+* minipage:: Miniature page.
+* picture:: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
+* quotation:: Indented environment with paragraph indentation.
+* quote:: Indented environment with no paragraph indentation.
+* tabbing:: Align text arbitrarily.
+* table:: Floating tables.
+* tabular:: Align text in columns.
+* thebibliography:: Bibliography or reference list.
+* theorem:: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+* titlepage:: For hand crafted title pages.
+* verbatim:: Simulating typed input.
+* verse:: For poetry and other things.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: abstract, Next: array, Up: Environments
+
+8.1 `abstract'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+ \begin{abstract}
+ ...
+ \end{abstract}
+
+ Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple
+paragraphs.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: abstract, Up: Environments
+
+8.2 `array'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{array}{TEMPLATE}
+ COL1 TEXT&COL1 TEXT&COLN}\\
+ ...
+ \end{array}
+
+ Math arrays are produced with the `array' environment, normally
+within an `equation' environment (*note equation::). It has a single
+mandatory TEMPLATE argument describing the number of columns and the
+alignment within them. Each column COL is specified by a single letter
+that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows:
+
+`c'
+ centered
+
+`l'
+ flush left
+
+`r'
+ flush right
+
+ Column entries are separated by `&'. Column entries may include
+other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with `\\'.
+
+ In the template, the construct `@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns
+in each row.
+
+ Here's an example:
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \begin{array}{lrc}
+ left1 & right1 & centered1 \\
+ left2 & right2 & centered2 \\
+ \end{array}
+ \end{equation}
+
+ The `\arraycolsep' parameter defines half the width of the space
+separating columns; the default is `5pt'. *Note tabular::, for other
+parameters which affect formatting in `array' environments, namely
+`\arrayrulewidth' and `\arraystretch'.
+
+ The `array' environment can only be used in math mode.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Environments
+
+8.3 `center'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{center}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ \end{center}
+
+ The `center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
+of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the
+current page. Each line is terminated with the string `\\'.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \centering:: Declaration form of the `center' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \centering, Up: center
+
+8.3.1 `\centering'
+------------------
+
+The `\centering' declaration corresponds to the `center' environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or
+in a `parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on
+the page by putting a `\centering' command at the beginning of the
+figure or table environment.
+
+ Unlike the `center' environment, the `\centering' command does not
+start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an
+environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
+
+ Here's an example:
+
+ \begin{quote}
+ \centering
+ first line \\
+ second line \\
+ \end{quote}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: description, Next: displaymath, Prev: center, Up: Environments
+
+8.4 `description'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{description}
+ \item [LABEL1] ITEM1
+ \item [LABEL2] ITEM2
+ ...
+ \end{description}
+
+ The `description' environment is used to make labelled lists. Each
+LABEL is typeset in bold, flush right. The ITEM text may contain
+multiple paragraphs.
+
+ Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if
+you typeset a label in typewriter using `\texttt', you'll get bold
+typewriter: `\item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]'. This may be too
+bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use `\tt', which
+resets all other style variations: `\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'.
+
+ For details about list spacing, see *note itemize::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: displaymath, Next: document, Prev: description, Up: Environments
+
+8.5 `displaymath'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ MATH
+ \end{displaymath}
+
+or
+
+ \[MATH\]
+
+ The `displaymath' environment (`\[...\]' is a synonym) typesets the
+MATH text on its own line, centered by default. The global `fleqn'
+option makes equations flush left; see *note Document class options::.
+
+ No equation number is added to `displaymath' text; to get an
+equation number, use the `equation' environment (*note equation::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: document, Next: enumerate, Prev: displaymath, Up: Environments
+
+8.6 `document'
+==============
+
+The `document' environment encloses the body of a document. It is
+required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting & ending::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: document, Up: Environments
+
+8.7 `enumerate'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item ITEM1
+ \item ITEM2
+ ...
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ The `enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations
+can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
+be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as `itemize'
+(*note itemize::) and `description' (*note description::).
+
+ Each item of an enumerated list begins with an `\item' command.
+There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment.
+
+ By default, the numbering at each level is done like this:
+
+ 1. 1., 2., ...
+
+ 2. (a), (b), ...
+
+ 3. i., ii., ...
+
+ 4. A., B., ...
+
+ The `enumerate' environment uses the counters `\enumi' through
+`\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If the optional argument to
+`\item' is given, the counter is not incremented for that item.
+
+ The `enumerate' environment uses the commands `\labelenumi' through
+`\labelenumiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use
+`\renewcommand' to change the labels (*note \newcommand &
+\renewcommand::). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase
+letters:
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Environments
+
+8.8 `eqnarray'
+==============
+
+ \begin{eqnarray} (or `eqnarray*')
+ FORMULA1 \\
+ FORMULA2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{eqnarray}
+
+ The `eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of
+equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column `array'
+environment, with consecutive rows separated by `\\' and consecutive
+items within a row separated by an `&'.
+
+ `\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal
+meaning of not allowing a page break at that line.
+
+ An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
+`\nonumber' command. Alternatively, The `*'-form of the environment
+(`\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}') will omit equation numbering
+entirely, while otherwise being the same as `eqnarray'.
+
+ The command `\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
+lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
+zero width.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Environments
+
+8.9 `equation'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ MATH
+ \end{equation}
+
+ The `equation' environment starts a `displaymath' environment (*note
+displaymath::), e.g., centering the MATH text on the page, and also
+places an equation number in the right margin.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: figure, Next: flushleft, Prev: equation, Up: Environments
+
+8.10 `figure'
+=============
+
+ \begin{figure}[PLACEMENT]
+ FIGBODY
+ \label{LABEL}
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TEXT}
+ \end{figure}
+
+ Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
+instead "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a page.
+Figures will not be split between two pages.
+
+ The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
+to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly
+put a float:
+
+ 1. `h' (Here) - at the position in the text where the figure
+ environment appears.
+
+ 2. `t' (Top) - at the top of a text page.
+
+ 3. `b' (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page.
+
+ 4. `p' (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which is a page
+ containing no text, only floats.
+
+ The standard report and article classes use the default placement
+`tbp'.
+
+ The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
+etc. you wish.
+
+ The `\caption' command specifies caption TEXT for the figure. The
+caption is numbered by default. If LOFTITLE is present, it is used in
+the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::).
+
+ The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at
+ the bottom; default `.3'.
+
+`\floatpagefraction'
+ The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
+ floats; default `.5'.
+
+`\floatsep'
+ Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default `12pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt'.
+
+`\intextsep'
+ Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
+ default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt' styles,
+ `14pt plus4pt minus4pt' for `12pt'.
+
+`\textfloatsep'
+ Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+ default `20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+`\textfraction'
+ Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+ much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+ different page. The default is `.2'.
+
+`\topfraction'
+ Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+ floats; default is `.7'.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: figure, Up: Environments
+
+8.11 `flushleft'
+================
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ The `flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
+right Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \raggedright:: Declaration form of the `flushleft' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedright, Up: flushleft
+
+8.11.1 `\raggedright'
+---------------------
+
+The `\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the `flushleft'
+environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such
+as `quote' or in a `parbox'.
+
+ Unlike the `flushleft' environment, the `\raggedright' command does
+not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: Environments
+
+8.12 `flushright'
+=================
+
+ \begin{flushright}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{flushright}
+
+ The `flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph
+consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
+left. Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \raggedleft:: Declaration form of the `flushright' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedleft, Up: flushright
+
+8.12.1 `\raggedleft'
+--------------------
+
+The `\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the `flushright'
+environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such
+as `quote' or in a `parbox'.
+
+ Unlike the `flushright' environment, the `\raggedleft' command does
+not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command that ends the
+paragraph unit.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: itemize, Next: letter, Prev: flushright, Up: Environments
+
+8.13 `itemize'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item ITEM1
+ \item ITEM2
+ ...
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ The `itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list.
+Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
+They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments,
+such as `enumerate' (*note enumerate::).
+
+ Each item of an `itemize' list begins with an `\item' command.
+There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment.
+
+ By default, the marks at each level look like this:
+
+ 1. *
+
+ 2. -- (bold en-dash)
+
+ 3. *
+
+ 4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period)
+
+ The `itemize' environment uses the commands `\labelitemi' through
+`\labelitemiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use
+`\renewcommand' to change the labels. For instance, to have the first
+level use diamonds:
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+
+ The `\leftmargini' through `\leftmarginvi' parameters define the
+distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the
+left margin of the list. By convention, `\leftmargin' is set to the
+appropriate `\leftmarginN' when a new level of nesting is entered.
+
+ The defaults vary from `.5em' (highest levels of nesting) to `2.5em'
+(first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. This example
+greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists:
+
+ \setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
+
+ Some parameters that affect list formatting:
+
+`\itemindent'
+ Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero.
+
+`\labelsep'
+ Space between the label and text of an item; default `.5em'.
+
+`\labelwidth'
+ Width of the label; default `2em', or `1.5em' in two-column mode.
+
+`\listparindent'
+ Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within
+ a list item; default `0pt'.
+
+`\rightmargin'
+ Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the
+ enclosing environment; default `0pt', except in the `quote',
+ `quotation', and `verse' environments, where it is set equal to
+ `\leftmargin'.
+
+
+ Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather
+loose, by default).
+
+`\itemsep'
+ Vertical space between items. The default is `2pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt' for `10pt' documents, `3pt plus2pt minus1pt' for `11pt',
+ and `4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt' for `12pt'.
+
+`\parsep'
+ Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item.
+ Defaults are the same as `\itemsep'.
+
+`\topsep'
+ Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph.
+ The default is `4pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' documents, `6pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt' for `11pt', and `9pt plus3pt minus5pt' for
+ `12pt'.
+
+`\partopsep'
+ Extra space added to `\topsep' when the list environment starts a
+ paragraph. The default is `2pt plus1pt minus1pt' for `10pt'
+ documents, `3pt plus1pt minus1pt' for `11pt', and `3pt plus2pt
+ minus2pt' for `12pt'.
+
+`\topsep'
+ Extra vertical space added before an initial and after a final list
+ item. Its value is changed with list level and font size changes;
+ for instance, within a first-level list at `10pt', it is `4pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt'.
+
+
+ Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
+space between items. Here is an example defining an `itemize*'
+environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
+within a single item (`\parskip' is not list-specific, *note
+\parskip::):
+
+ \newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: letter, Next: list, Prev: itemize, Up: Environments
+
+8.14 `letter' environment: writing letters
+==========================================
+
+This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: list, Next: math, Prev: letter, Up: Environments
+
+8.15 `list'
+===========
+
+The `list' environment is a generic environment which is used for
+defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in
+documents, but often in macros.
+
+ \begin{list}{LABELING}{SPACING}
+ \item ITEM1
+ \item ITEM2
+ ...
+ \end{list}
+
+ The mandatory LABELING argument specifies how items should be
+labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to `\item'). This
+argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the
+label. It can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands.
+
+ The mandatory SPACING argument contains commands to change the
+spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be
+empty, i.e., `{}', which leaves the default spacing.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: math, Next: minipage, Prev: list, Up: Environments
+
+8.16 `math'
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{math}
+ MATH
+ \end{math}
+
+ The `math' environment inserts the given MATH within the running
+text. `\(...\))' and `$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: minipage, Next: picture, Prev: math, Up: Environments
+
+8.17 `minipage'
+===============
+
+ \begin{minipage}[POSITION]{WIDTH}
+ TEXT
+ \end{minipage}
+
+ The `minipage' environment typesets its body TEXT in a block that
+will not be broken across pages (similar to the `\parbox' command,
+*note \parbox::). You may use other paragraph-making environments
+inside a minipage (unlike `\parbox').
+
+ It takes an optional POSITION argument for placing TEXT, and a
+mandatory WIDTH argument for specifying the line width.
+
+ By default, paragraphs are not indented in the `minipage'
+environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as
+`\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' command.
+
+ Footnotes in a `minipage' environment are handled in a way that is
+particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
+`\footnote' or `\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom
+of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
+`\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary `footnote' counter (*note
+Counters::).
+
+ However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
+footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation, Prev: minipage, Up: Environments
+
+8.18 `picture'
+==============
+
+ \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ ... PICTURE COMMANDS ...
+ \end{picture}
+
+ The `picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind
+of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You
+tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their
+coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point
+and a minus sign--a number like `5', `0.3' or `-3.1416'. A coordinate
+specifies a length in multiples of the unit length `\unitlength', so if
+`\unitlength' has been set to `1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies
+a length of 2.54 centimeters. You should only change the value of
+`\unitlength', using the `\setlength' command, outside of a `picture'
+environment.
+
+ A position is a pair of coordinates, such as `(2.4,-5)', specifying
+the point with x-coordinate `2.4' and y-coordinate `-5'. Coordinates
+are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
+normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a
+position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the
+parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
+
+ The `picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
+`position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
+produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
+argument's x- and y-coordinates.
+
+ The `picture' environment also has an optional `position' argument,
+following the `size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike
+ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square
+brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at
+the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin).
+For example, if `\unitlength' has been set to `1mm', the command
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+ produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200
+millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
+upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first
+draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the origin
+at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by
+shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional argument.
+
+ The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of
+the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture
+really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the
+picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by
+LaTeX in determining how much room to leave for it.
+
+ Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the `\put' command.
+The command
+
+ \put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
+puts the object specified by `...' in the picture, with its reference
+point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various
+objects will be described below.
+
+ The `\put' command creates an "LR box". You can put anything that
+can go in an `\mbox' (*note \mbox::) in the text argument of the `\put'
+command. When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left
+corner of the box.
+
+ The `picture' commands are described in the following sections.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \circle:: Draw a circle.
+* \makebox (picture):: Draw a box of the specified size.
+* \framebox (picture):: Draw a box with a frame around it.
+* \dashbox:: Draw a dashed box.
+* \frame:: Draw a frame around an object.
+* \line:: Draw a straight line.
+* \linethickness:: Set the line thickness.
+* \thicklines:: A heavier line thickness.
+* \thinlines:: The default line thickness.
+* \multiput:: Draw multiple instances of an object.
+* \oval:: Draw an ellipse.
+* \put:: Place an object at a specified place.
+* \shortstack:: Make a pile of objects.
+* \vector:: Draw a line with an arrow.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \circle, Next: \makebox (picture), Up: picture
+
+8.18.1 `\circle'
+----------------
+
+ \circle[*]{DIAMETER}
+
+ The `\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
+the specified one as possible. The `*'-form of the command draws a
+solid circle.
+
+ Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox (picture), Next: \framebox (picture), Prev: \circle, Up: picture
+
+8.18.2 `\makebox'
+-----------------
+
+`\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}'
+
+ The `\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the
+normal `\makebox' command except that you must specify a `width' and
+`height' in multiples of `\unitlength'.
+
+ The optional argument, `[position]', specifies the quadrant that
+your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:
+
+ * `t' - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
+
+ * `b' - Moves the item to the bottom
+
+ * `l' - Moves the item to the left
+
+ * `r' - Moves the item to the right
+
+ *Note \makebox::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \framebox (picture), Next: \dashbox, Prev: \makebox (picture), Up: picture
+
+8.18.3 `\framebox'
+------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \framebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POS]{...}
+
+ The `\framebox' command is like `\makebox' (see previous section),
+except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
+creates.
+
+ The `\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule',
+and leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the
+box.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \dashbox, Next: \frame, Prev: \framebox (picture), Up: picture
+
+8.18.4 `\dashbox'
+-----------------
+
+Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis:
+
+ \dashbox{DLEN}(RWIDTH,RHEIGHT)[POS]{TEXT}
+
+ `\dashbox' creates a dashed rectangle around TEXT in a `picture'
+environment. Dashes are DLEN units long, and the rectangle has overall
+width RWIDTH and height RHEIGHT. The TEXT is positioned at optional
+POS. A dashed box looks best when the `rwidth' and `rheight' are
+multiples of the `dlen'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \frame, Next: \line, Prev: \dashbox, Up: picture
+
+8.18.5 `\frame'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \frame{TEXT}
+
+ The `\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around TEXT. The
+reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra space
+is put between the frame and the object.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \line, Next: \linethickness, Prev: \frame, Up: picture
+
+8.18.6 `\line'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \line(XSLOPE,YSLOPE){LENGTH}
+
+ The `\line' command draws a line with the given LENGTH and slope
+XSLOPE/YSLOPE.
+
+ Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with SLOPE = x/y, where x and y
+have integer values from -6 through 6. For lines of any slope, not to
+mention other shapes, see the `curve2e' and many many other packages on
+CTAN.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \linethickness, Next: \thicklines, Prev: \line, Up: picture
+
+8.18.7 `\linethickness'
+-----------------------
+
+The `\linethickness{DIM}' command declares the thickness of horizontal
+and vertical lines in a picture environment to be DIM, which must be a
+positive length.
+
+ `\linethickness' does not affect the thickness of slanted lines,
+circles, or the quarter circles drawn by `\oval'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \thicklines, Next: \thinlines, Prev: \linethickness, Up: picture
+
+8.18.8 `\thicklines'
+--------------------
+
+The `\thicklines' command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal
+and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness::
+and *note \thinlines::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinlines, Next: \multiput, Prev: \thicklines, Up: picture
+
+8.18.9 `\thinlines'
+-------------------
+
+The `\thinlines' command is the default line thickness for horizontal
+and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness::
+and *note \thicklines::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \multiput, Next: \oval, Prev: \thinlines, Up: picture
+
+8.18.10 `\multiput'
+-------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+ \multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ}
+
+ The `\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern
+across a picture. OBJ is first placed at position (x,y), then at
+(x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, N times.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \oval, Next: \put, Prev: \multiput, Up: picture
+
+8.18.11 `\oval'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]
+
+ The `\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
+optional argument PORTION allows you to select part of the oval via the
+following:
+
+`t'
+ selects the top portion;
+
+`b'
+ selects the bottom portion;
+
+`r'
+ selects the right portion;
+
+`l'
+ selects the left portion.
+
+ The "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
+maximum radius of 20pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes with
+rounded corners.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \put, Next: \shortstack, Prev: \oval, Up: picture
+
+8.18.12 `\put'
+--------------
+
+`\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }'
+
+ The `\put' command places the item specified by the mandatory
+argument at the given coordinates.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \shortstack, Next: \vector, Prev: \put, Up: picture
+
+8.18.13 `\shortstack'
+---------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \shortstack[POSITION]{...\\...\\...}
+
+ The `\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects. The valid
+positions are:
+
+`r'
+ Move the objects to the right of the stack.
+
+`l'
+ Move the objects to the left of the stack
+
+`c'
+ Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
+
+ Objects are separated with `\\'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \vector, Prev: \shortstack, Up: picture
+
+8.18.14 `\vector'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \vector(X-SLOPE,Y-SLOPE){LENGTH}
+
+ The `\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
+length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -4 and +4,
+inclusive.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: quotation, Next: quote, Prev: picture, Up: Environments
+
+8.19 `quotation'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{quotation}
+ TEXT
+ \end{quotation}
+
+ The margins of the `quotation' environment are indented on both the
+left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a
+blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
+
+ Unlike the `quote' environment, each paragraph is indented normally.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: quotation, Up: Environments
+
+8.20 `quote'
+============
+
+Snyopsis:
+
+ \begin{quote}
+ TEXT
+ \end{quote}
+
+ The margins of the `quote' environment are indented on both the left
+and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank
+line between text produces a new paragraph.
+
+ Unlike the `quotation' environment, paragraphs are not indented.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quote, Up: Environments
+
+8.21 `tabbing'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ ROW1COL1 \= ROW1COL2 \= ROW1COL3 \= ROW1COL4 \\
+ ROW2COL1 \> \> ROW2COL3 \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+ The `tabbing' environment provides a way to align text in columns.
+It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on
+an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where the width of
+each column is constant and known in advance.
+
+ This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the `tabular'
+environment.
+
+ The following commands can be used inside a `tabbing' enviroment:
+
+`\\ tabbing'
+ End a line.
+
+`\= (tabbing)'
+ Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+
+`\> (tabbing)'
+ Advances to the next tab stop.
+
+`\<'
+ Put following text to the left of the local margin (without
+ changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
+
+`\+'
+ Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
+ one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
+
+`\-'
+ Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
+ one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
+
+`\' (tabbing)'
+ Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
+ i.e. everything from the most recent `\>', `\<', `\'', `\\', or
+ `\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush
+ against the current column's tab stop.
+
+`\` (tabbing)'
+ Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including
+ tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last
+ column because there's no tab stop there. The `\`' command moves
+ all the text that follows it, up to the `\\' or `\end{tabbing}'
+ command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing
+ environment. There must be no `\>' or `\'' command between the
+ `\`' and the command that ends the line.
+
+`\a (tabbing)'
+ In a `tabbing' environment, the commands `\=', `\'' and `\`' do
+ not produce accents as usual (*note Accents::). Instead, the
+ commands `\a=', `\a'' and `\a`' are used.
+
+`\kill'
+ Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like `\\'
+ except that it throws away the current line instead of producing
+ output for it. The effect of any `\=', `\+' or `\-' commands in
+ that line remain in effect.
+
+`\poptabs'
+ Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last `\pushtabs'.
+
+`\pushtabs'
+ Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
+ changing tab stop positions in the middle of a `tabbing'
+ environment.
+
+`\tabbingsep'
+ Distance to left of tab stop moved by `\''.
+
+
+ This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format:
+
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
+ \> begin \= \+ \\
+ \> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
+ fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
+ else \+ \\
+ fact := 1; \-\- \\
+ end;\\
+ \end{tabbing}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: table, Next: tabular, Prev: tabbing, Up: Environments
+
+8.22 `table'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{table}[placement]
+
+ body of the table
+
+ \caption{table title}
+ \end{table}
+
+ Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
+usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
+Tables will not be split between two pages.
+
+ The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
+to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
+a float:
+
+ * `h': Here - at the position in the text where the table
+ environment appears.
+
+ * `t': Top - at the top of a text page.
+
+ * `b': Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
+
+ * `p': Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page
+ containing no text, only floats.
+
+ The standard `report' and `article' classes use the default
+placement `[tbp]'.
+
+ The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
+etc., you wish. The `\caption' command allows you to title your table.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: tabular, Next: thebibliography, Prev: table, Up: Environments
+
+8.23 `tabular'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ or
+
+ \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular*}
+
+ These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
+items, aligned vertically in columns.
+
+ `\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table,
+except for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command
+(to put a rule below the table) follows.
+
+ The mandatory and optional arguments consist of:
+
+`width'
+ Specifies the width of the `tabular*' environment. There must be
+ rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the
+ specified width.
+
+`pos'
+ Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the
+ centre of the environment.
+
+ * `t' - align on top row
+
+ * `b' - align on bottom row
+
+`cols'
+ Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the
+ following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and
+ intercolumn material.
+
+ * `l' - A column of left-aligned items.
+
+ * `r' - A column of right-aligned items.
+
+ * `c' - A column of centred items.
+
+ * `|' - A vertical line the full height and depth of the
+ environment.
+
+ * `@{text}' - This inserts `text' in every row. An @-expression
+ suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between
+ columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the
+ adjacent items must be included in text. An
+ `\extracolsep{wd}' command in an @-expression causes an extra
+ space of width `wd' to appear to the left of all subsequent
+ columns, until countermanded by another `\extracolsep'
+ command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space
+ is not suppressed by an @-expression. An `\extracolsep'
+ command can be used only in an @-expression in the `cols'
+ argument.
+
+ * `p{wd}' - Produces a column with each item typeset in a
+ parbox of width `wd', as if it were the argument of a
+ `\parbox[t]{wd}' command. However, a `\\' may not appear in
+ the item, except in the following situations:
+ 1. inside an environment like `minipage', `array', or
+ `tabular'.
+
+ 2. inside an explicit `\parbox'.
+
+ 3. in the scope of a `\centering', `\raggedright', or
+ `\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must
+ appear inside braces or an environment when used in a
+ `p'-column element.
+
+ * `*{num}{cols}' - Equivalent to `num' copies of `cols', where
+ `num' is any positive integer and `cols' is any list of
+ column-specifiers, which may contain another `*-expression'.
+
+
+
+ Parameters that control formatting:
+
+`\arrayrulewidth'
+ Thickness of the rule created by `|', `\hline', and `\vline' in
+ the `tabular' and `array' environments; the default is `.4pt'.
+
+`\arraystretch'
+ Scaling of spacing between rows in the `tabular' and `array'
+ environments; default is `1',for no scaling.
+
+`\doublerulesep'
+ Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by `||' in
+ the `tabular' and `array' environments; default is `2pt'.
+
+`\tabcolsep'
+ Half the width of the space between columns; default is `6pt'.
+
+
+ These commands can be used inside a `tabular' environment:
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \multicolumn:: Make an item spanning several columns.
+* \cline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+* \hline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+* \vline:: Draw a vertical line.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \cline, Up: tabular
+
+8.23.1 `\multicolumn'
+---------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+ \multicolumn{COLS}{POS}{TEXT}
+
+ The `\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several
+columns. The first mandatory argument, COLS, specifies the number of
+columns to span. The second mandatory argument, POS, specifies the
+formatting of the entry; `c' for centered, `l' for flushleft, `r' for
+flushright. The third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to
+put in the entry.
+
+ Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash;
+`\multicolumn' is used for the heading:
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
+ \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
+ 0x80&0x7FF \cr
+ 0x800&0xFFFF \cr
+ 0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
+ \end{tabular}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular
+
+8.23.2 `\cline'
+---------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \cline{I-J}
+
+ The `\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns
+specified, beginning in column I and ending in column J, which are
+specified in the mandatory argument.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hline, Next: \vline, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular
+
+8.23.3 `\hline'
+---------------
+
+The `\hline' command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing
+`tabular' or `array' environment. It's most commonly used to draw a
+line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \vline, Prev: \hline, Up: tabular
+
+8.23.4 `\vline'
+---------------
+
+The `\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full
+height and depth of its row. An `\hfill' command can be used to move
+the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an
+@-expression.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: thebibliography, Next: theorem, Prev: tabular, Up: Environments
+
+8.24 `thebibliography'
+======================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}{WIDEST-LABEL}
+ \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
+ ...
+ \end{thebibliography}
+
+ The `thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or
+reference list.
+
+ In the `article' class, this reference list is labelled
+"References"; in the `report' class, it is labelled "Bibliography".
+You can change the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the
+command `\refname'. For instance, this eliminates it entirely:
+
+ \renewcommand{\refname}{}
+
+ The mandatory WIDEST-LABEL argument is text that, when typeset, is
+as wide as the widest item label produced by the `\bibitem' commands.
+It is typically given as `9' for bibliographies with less than 10
+references, `99' for ones with less than 100, etc.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \bibitem:: Specify a bibliography item.
+* \cite:: Refer to a bibliography item.
+* \nocite:: Include an item in the bibliography.
+* Using BibTeX:: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \bibitem, Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography
+
+8.24.1 `\bibitem'
+-----------------
+
+Synopsis:
+ \bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
+
+ The `\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the
+LABEL argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using
+the `enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is any sequence of letters, numbers,
+and punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
+
+ This command writes an entry to the `.aux' file containing the
+item's CITE_KEY and label. When the `.aux' file is read by the
+`\begin{document}' command, the item's `label' is associated with
+`cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a `\cite' command (see
+next section) to produce the associated label.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography
+
+8.24.2 `\cite'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS
+
+ The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated
+by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the
+references associated with KEYS by entries in the `.aux' file.
+
+ The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the
+citation. For example, `\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce `[Knuth,
+p. 314]'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \nocite, Next: Using BibTeX, Prev: \cite, Up: thebibliography
+
+8.24.3 `\nocite'
+----------------
+
+`\nocite{key_list}'
+
+ The `\nocite' command produces no text, but writes `key_list', which
+is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux' file.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Using BibTeX, Prev: \nocite, Up: thebibliography
+
+8.24.4 Using BibTeX
+-------------------
+
+If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if
+you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain
+your bibliography, you don't use the `thebibliography' environment
+(*note thebibliography::). Instead, you include the lines
+
+ \bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE}
+ \bibliography{BIBFILE1,BIBFILE2}
+
+ The `\bibliographystyle' command does not produce any output of its
+own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be
+produced: BIBSTYLE refers to a file BIBSTYLE`.bst', which defines how
+your citations will look. The standard STYLE names distributed with
+BibTeX are:
+
+`alpha'
+ Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and
+ year of publication.
+
+`plain'
+ Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+
+`unsrt'
+ Like `plain', but entries are in order of citation.
+
+`abbrv'
+ Like `plain', but more compact labels.
+
+ In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the
+demands of various publications. See
+`http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib'.
+
+ The `\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
+bibliography. The argument to `\bibliography' refers to files named
+`BIBFILE.bib', which should contain your database in BibTeX format.
+Only the entries referred to via `\cite' and `\nocite' will be listed
+in the bibliography.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments
+
+8.25 `theorem'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{theorem}
+ THEOREM-TEXT
+ \end{theorem}
+
+ The `theorem' environment produces "Theorem N" in boldface followed
+by THEOREM-TEXT, where the numbering possibilities for N are described
+under `\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: titlepage, Next: verbatim, Prev: theorem, Up: Environments
+
+8.26 `titlepage'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ TEXT
+ \end{titlepage}
+
+ The `titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with
+no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page
+to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you.
+The `\today' command may be useful on title pages (*note \today::).
+
+ You can use the `\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce
+a standard title page without a `titlepage' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Environments
+
+8.27 `verbatim'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ LITERAL-TEXT
+ \end{verbatim}
+
+ The `verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in
+which LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the `\'
+character produces a printed `\'. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter
+with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that they would
+on a typewriter.
+
+ The `verbatim' uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (`\tt').
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \verb:: The macro form of the `verbatim' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \verb, Up: verbatim
+
+8.27.1 `\verb'
+--------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \verbCHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR
+ \verb*CHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR
+
+ The `\verb' command typesets LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including
+special characters and spaces, using the typewriter (`\tt') font. No
+spaces are allowed between `\verb' or `\verb*' and the delimiter CHAR,
+which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear
+in LITERAL-TEXT.
+
+ The `*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible
+space" character.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: verse, Prev: verbatim, Up: Environments
+
+8.28 `verse'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ LINE1 \\
+ LINE2 \\
+ ...
+ \end{verse}
+
+ The `verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
+other uses for it.
+
+ The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are
+not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each
+stanza with `\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the
+stanzas.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes, Next: Definitions, Prev: Page breaking, Up: Top
+
+9 Footnotes
+***********
+
+Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced
+with one command, the `\footnote' command. They can also be produced
+with two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext' commands.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \footnote:: Insert a footnote.
+* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only.
+* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only.
+* Footnote parameters:: Parameters for footnote formatting.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnote, Next: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
+
+9.1 `\footnote'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT}
+
+ The `\footnote' command places the numbered footnote TEXT at the
+bottom of the current page. The optional argument NUMBER changes the
+default footnote number.
+
+ This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you
+cannot use it in sectioning commands like `\chapter', in figures,
+tables or in a `tabular' environment. (See following sections.)
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote, Up: Footnotes
+
+9.2 `\footnotemark'
+===================
+
+With no optional argument, the `\footnotemark' command puts the current
+footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner
+paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, with the
+`\footnotetext' command.
+
+ This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote
+markers referring to the same footnote with
+
+ \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+ after the first `\footnote' command.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotetext, Next: Footnote parameters, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
+
+9.3 `\footnotetext'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT}
+
+ The `\footnotetext' command places TEXT at the bottom of the page as
+a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the `\footnotemark'
+command. The `\footnotetext' command must appear in outer paragraph
+mode.
+
+ The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnote parameters, Prev: \footnotetext, Up: Footnotes
+
+9.4 Footnote parameters
+=======================
+
+`\footnoterule'
+ Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the
+ page's footnotes. Default dimensions: `0.4pt' thick (or wide), and
+ `0.4\columnwidth' long in the standard document classes (except
+ slides, where it does not appear).
+
+`\footnotesep'
+ The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote.
+ By default, this is set to the normal strut for `\footnotesize'
+ fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no extra space
+ between footnotes. This is `6.65pt' for `10pt', `7.7pt' for
+ `11pt', and `8.4pt' for `12pt'.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Definitions, Next: Counters, Prev: Footnotes, Up: Top
+
+10 Definitions
+**************
+
+LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \newcommand & \renewcommand:: (Re)define a new command.
+* \newcounter:: Define a new counter.
+* \newlength:: Define a new length.
+* \newsavebox:: Define a new box.
+* \newenvironment & \renewenvironment:: Define a new environment.
+* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment.
+* \newfont:: Define a new font name.
+* \protect:: Using tricky commands.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Next: \newcounter, Up: Definitions
+
+10.1 `\newcommand' & `\renewcommand'
+====================================
+
+`\newcommand' and `\renewcommand' define and redefine a command,
+respectively. Synopses:
+
+ \newcommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand{CMD}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand{CMD}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+CMD
+ The command name beginning with `\'. For `\newcommand', it must
+ not be already defined and must not begin with `\end'; for
+ `\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
+
+NARGS
+ An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments
+ that the command will take. The default is for the command to
+ have no arguments.
+
+DEFAULT
+ If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's
+ first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the
+ default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not
+ specified in the call) is the string `def'.
+
+DEFN
+ The text to be substituted for every occurrence of `cmd'; a
+ construct of the form `#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the
+ Nth argument.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \newlength, Prev: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions
+
+10.2 `\newcounter'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newcounter{CNT}[COUNTERNAME]
+
+ The `\newcounter' command defines a new counter named CNT. The new
+counter is initialized to zero.
+
+ Given the optional argument `[COUNTERNAME]', CNT will be reset
+whenever COUNTERNAME is incremented.
+
+ *Note Counters::, for more information about counters.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newlength, Next: \newsavebox, Prev: \newcounter, Up: Definitions
+
+10.3 `\newlength'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newlength{\ARG}
+
+ The `\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a
+`length' command with a value of `0in'. The argument must be a control
+sequence, as in `\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if `\foo' is
+already defined.
+
+ *Note Lengths::, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value,
+and for more information about lengths in general.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newsavebox, Next: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Prev: \newlength, Up: Definitions
+
+10.4 `\newsavebox'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newsavebox{CMD}
+
+ Defines `\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to
+refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Next: \newtheorem, Prev: \newsavebox, Up: Definitions
+
+10.5 `\newenvironment' & `\renewenvironment'
+============================================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+
+ These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is,
+`\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'.
+
+ENV
+ The name of the environment. For `\newenvironment', ENV must not
+ be an existing environment, and the command `\ENV' must be
+ undefined. For `\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an
+ existing environment.
+
+NARGS
+ An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the
+ newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
+
+DEFAULT
+ If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and DEFAULT
+ gives the default value for that argument.
+
+BEGDEF
+ The text expanded at every occurrence of `\begin{ENV}'; a
+ construct of the form `#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of
+ the Nth argument.
+
+ENDDEF
+ The text expanded at every occurrence of `\end{ENV}'. It may not
+ contain any argument parameters.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newtheorem, Next: \newfont, Prev: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Up: Definitions
+
+10.6 `\newtheorem'
+==================
+
+ \newtheorem{NEWENV}{LABEL}[WITHIN]
+ \newtheorem{NEWENV}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{LABEL}
+
+ This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments:
+
+NEWENV
+ The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of
+ an existing environment or otherwise defined.
+
+LABEL
+ The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
+ number. For example, `Theorem'.
+
+NUMBERED_LIKE
+ (Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like
+ environment; the new environment will be numbered just like
+ NUMBERED_LIKE.
+
+WITHIN
+ (Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional
+ unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as
+ the WITHIN counter.
+
+
+ At most one of NUMBERED_LIKE and WITHIN can be specified, not both.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newfont, Next: \protect, Prev: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions
+
+10.7 `\newfont'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \newfont{CMD}{FONTNAME}
+
+ Defines a control sequence `\CMD', which must not already be
+defined, to make FONTNAME be the current font. The file looked for on
+the system is named `FONTNAME.tfm'.
+
+ This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font.
+More commonly, fonts are defined in families through `.fd' files.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \protect, Prev: \newfont, Up: Definitions
+
+10.8 `\protect'
+===============
+
+Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and
+many more are so-called "fragile" commands. When a fragile command is
+used in certain contexts, called "moving arguments", it must be
+preceded by `\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the
+arguments must have their own `\protect'.
+
+ Some examples of moving arguments are `\caption' (*note figure::),
+`\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in `tabular' and
+`array' environments (*note tabular::).
+
+ Commands which are not fragile are called "robust". They must not
+be preceded by `\protect'.
+
+ See also:
+
+`http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html'
+`http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect'
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Counters, Next: Lengths, Prev: Definitions, Up: Top
+
+11 Counters
+***********
+
+Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
+name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or
+command that produces the number, except with no `\'.
+(`enumi'-`enumiv' are used for the nested enumerate environment.)
+Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document
+classes to control numbering.
+
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter.
+* \usecounter:: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+* \value:: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+* \setcounter:: Set the value of a counter.
+* \addtocounter:: Add a quantity to a counter.
+* \refstepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+* \stepcounter:: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+* \day \month \year:: Numeric date values.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Next: \usecounter, Up: Counters
+
+11.1 `\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
+=====================================================================
+
+All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
+instance, `\alph{enumi}'.
+
+`\alph'
+ prints COUNTER using lowercase letters: `a', `b', ...
+
+`\Alph'
+ uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', ...
+
+`\arabic'
+ uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', ...
+
+`\roman'
+ uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', ...
+
+`\roman'
+ uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', ...
+
+`\fnsymbol'
+ prints the value of COUNTER in a specific sequence of nine symbols
+ (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of
+ COUNTER must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.
+
+ The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the
+ names:
+ asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel
+ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters
+
+11.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}'
+===========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usecounter{COUNTER}
+
+ The `\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the
+`list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list
+items.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \value, Next: \setcounter, Prev: \usecounter, Up: Counters
+
+11.3 `\value{COUNTER}'
+======================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \value{COUNTER}
+
+ The `\value' command produces the value of COUNTER. It can be used
+anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example:
+
+ \setcounter{myctr}{3}
+ \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
+ \hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \setcounter, Next: \addtocounter, Prev: \value, Up: Counters
+
+11.4 `\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
+==================================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \setcounter{\COUNTER}{VALUE}
+
+ The `\setcounter' command sets the value of \COUNTER to the VALUE
+argument.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Counters
+
+11.5 `\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
+====================================
+
+The `\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified
+by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Counters
+
+11.6 `\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'
+===============================
+
+The `\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as `\stepcounter'
+*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current `\ref' value
+to be the result of `\thecounter'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \day \month \year, Prev: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters
+
+11.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
+============================
+
+The `\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all
+subsidiary counters.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \day \month \year, Prev: \stepcounter, Up: Counters
+
+11.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters
+=============================================
+
+LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (`\day', 1-31), month
+of the year (`\month', 1-12), and year (`\year', Common Era). When TeX
+starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where TeX
+is running. They are not updated as the job progresses.
+
+ The related command `\today' produces a string representing the
+current day (*note \today::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Lengths, Next: Making paragraphs, Prev: Counters, Up: Top
+
+12 Lengths
+**********
+
+A `length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
+as an argument.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \setlength:: Set the value of a length.
+* \addtolength:: Add a quantity to a length.
+* \settodepth:: Set a length to the depth of something.
+* \settoheight:: Set a length to the height of something.
+* \settowidth:: Set a length to the width of something.
+* Predefined lengths:: Lengths that are, like, predefined.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Up: Lengths
+
+12.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
+==============================
+
+The `\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which
+can be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches
+(`in'), millimeters (`mm'), points (`pt'), big points (`bp', etc.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths
+
+12.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
+===============================
+
+The `\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the
+amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \settodepth, Next: \settoheight, Prev: \addtolength, Up: Lengths
+
+12.3 `\settodepth'
+==================
+
+`\settodepth{\gnat}{text}'
+
+ The `\settodepth' command sets the value of a `length' command equal
+to the depth of the `text' argument.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Lengths
+
+12.4 `\settoheight'
+===================
+
+`\settoheight{\gnat}{text}'
+
+ The `\settoheight' command sets the value of a `length' command
+equal to the height of the `text' argument.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \settowidth, Next: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Lengths
+
+12.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
+==============================
+
+The `\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the
+width of the TEXT argument.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settowidth, Up: Lengths
+
+12.6 Predefined lengths
+=======================
+
+`\width'
+
+ `\height'
+
+ `\depth'
+
+ `\totalheight'
+
+ These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
+box-making commands (*note Boxes::). They specify the natural width
+etc. of the text in the box. `\totalheight' equals `\height' +
+`\depth'. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
+size, e.g., say
+
+ `\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}'
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Line breaking, Next: Page breaking, Prev: Environments, Up: Top
+
+13 Line breaking
+****************
+
+The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
+translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To
+produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines
+(and these lines must be broken into pages).
+
+ LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some
+environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the `\\' command,
+and you can always manually force breaks.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \\:: Start a new line.
+* \obeycr & \restorecr:: Make each input line start a new output line.
+* \newline:: Break the line
+* \- (hyphenation):: Insert explicit hyphenation.
+* \fussy:: Be fussy about line breaking.
+* \hyphenation:: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
+* \linebreak & \nolinebreak:: Forcing & avoiding line breaks.
+* \sloppy:: Be sloppy about line breaking.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \\, Next: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking
+
+13.1 `\\'[*][MORESPACE]
+=======================
+
+The `\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional
+argument, MORESPACE, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to
+be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount.
+
+ The `\\*' command is the same as the ordinary `\\' command except
+that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \obeycr & \restorecr, Next: \newline, Prev: \\, Up: Line breaking
+
+13.2 `\obeycr' & `\restorecr'
+=============================
+
+The `\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file (`^^M',
+internally) the same as `\\' (followed by `\relax'). So each new line
+in the input will also be a new line in the output.
+
+ `\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newline, Next: \- (hyphenation), Prev: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking
+
+13.3 `\newline'
+===============
+
+The `\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no
+stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph
+mode.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \fussy, Prev: \newline, Up: Line breaking
+
+13.4 `\-' (discretionary hyphen)
+================================
+
+The `\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
+point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find
+most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an
+incorrect one. The `\-' command is used for the exceptional cases.
+
+ When you insert `\-' commands in a word, the word will only be
+hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points
+that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \fussy, Next: \hyphenation, Prev: \- (hyphenation), Up: Line breaking
+
+13.5 `\fussy'
+=============
+
+The declaration `\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about
+line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at
+the cost of an occasional overfull box.
+
+ This command cancels the effect of a previous `\sloppy' command
+(*note \sloppy::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \sloppy, Prev: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Up: Line breaking
+
+13.6 `\sloppy'
+==============
+
+The declaration `\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking.
+This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing.
+
+ Lasts until a `\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hyphenation, Next: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Prev: \fussy, Up: Line breaking
+
+13.7 `\hyphenation'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \hyphenation{WORD-ONE WORD-TWO}
+
+ The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with
+a `-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces.
+TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are
+tried. Multiple `\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples
+(the default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these
+words):
+
+ \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Next: \sloppy, Prev: \hyphenation, Up: Line breaking
+
+13.8 `\linebreak' & `\nolinebreak'
+==================================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \linebreak[PRIORITY]
+ \nolinebreak[PRIORITY]
+
+ By default, the `\linebreak' (`\nolinebreak') command forces
+(prevents) a line break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the
+spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right
+margin as usual.
+
+ With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the command
+from a demand to a request. The PRIORITY must be a number from 0 to 4.
+The higher the number, the more insistent the request.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Page breaking, Next: Footnotes, Prev: Line breaking, Up: Top
+
+14 Page breaking
+****************
+
+LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has
+accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but
+sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \cleardoublepage:: Start a new right-hand page.
+* \clearpage:: Start a new page.
+* \newpage:: Start a new page.
+* \enlargethispage:: Enlarge the current page a bit.
+* \pagebreak & \nopagebreak:: Forcing & avoiding page breaks.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \cleardoublepage, Next: \clearpage, Up: Page breaking
+
+14.1 `\cleardoublepage'
+=======================
+
+The `\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all
+figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
+In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
+(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \clearpage, Next: \newpage, Prev: \cleardoublepage, Up: Page breaking
+
+14.2 `\clearpage'
+=================
+
+The `\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures
+and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \clearpage, Up: Page breaking
+
+14.3 `\newpage'
+===============
+
+The `\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats
+(see `\clearpage' above).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \newpage, Up: Page breaking
+
+14.4 `\enlargethispage'
+=======================
+
+`\enlargethispage{size}'
+
+ `\enlargethispage*{size}'
+
+ Enlarge the `\textheight' for the current page by the specified
+amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one
+additional line.
+
+ The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page
+as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
+`\pagebreak'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \enlargethispage, Up: Page breaking
+
+14.5 `\pagebreak' & `\nopagebreak'
+==================================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \pagebreak[PRIORITY]
+ \nopagebreak[PRIORITY]
+
+ By default, the `\pagebreak' (`\nopagebreak') command forces
+(prevents) a page break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the
+vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it
+extends to the normal bottom margin.
+
+ With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the
+`\pagebreak' command from a demand to a request. The number must be a
+number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the
+request is.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Making paragraphs, Next: Math formulas, Prev: Lengths, Up: Top
+
+15 Making paragraphs
+********************
+
+A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines--lines not
+containing even a `%'. A blank line should not appear where a new
+paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
+a sectioning command.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \indent:: Indent this paragraph.
+* \noindent:: Do not indent this paragraph.
+* \parskip:: Space added before paragraphs.
+* Marginal notes:: Putting remarks in the margin.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \indent, Next: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs
+
+15.1 `\indent'
+==============
+
+`\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of
+the `\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used
+to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+
+ The default value for `\parindent' is `1em' in two-column mode,
+otherwise `15pt' for `10pt' documents, `17pt' for `11pt', and `1.5em'
+for `12pt'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \noindent, Next: \parskip, Prev: \indent, Up: Making paragraphs
+
+15.2 `\noindent'
+================
+
+When used at the beginning of the paragraph, `\noindent' suppresses any
+paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a
+paragraph.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \parskip, Next: Marginal notes, Prev: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs
+
+15.3 `\parskip'
+===============
+
+`\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added
+before each paragraph. The default is `0pt plus1pt'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Marginal notes, Prev: \parskip, Up: Making paragraphs
+
+15.4 Marginal notes
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \marginpar[LEFT]{RIGHT}
+
+ The `\marginpar' command creates a note in the margin. The first
+line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text
+where the `\marginpar' occurs.
+
+ When you only specify the mandatory argument RIGHT, the text will be
+placed
+
+ * in the right margin for one-sided layout;
+
+ * in the outside margin for two-sided layout;
+
+ * in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
+
+ The command `\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in
+the opposite (inside) margin. `\normalmarginpar' places them in the
+default position.
+
+ When you specify both arguments, LEFT is used for the left margin,
+and RIGHT is used for the right margin.
+
+ The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
+hyphenation there by beginning the node with `\hspace{0pt}'.
+
+ These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
+
+`\marginparpush'
+ Minimum vertical space between notes; default `7pt' for `12pt'
+ documents, `5pt' else.
+
+`\marginparsep'
+ Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
+ `11pt' for `10pt' documents, `10pt' else.
+
+`\marginparwidth'
+ Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided `10pt' document
+ is `90pt', `83pt' for `11pt', and `68pt' for `12pt'; `17pt' more
+ in each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the
+ default is `48pt'.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math formulas, Next: Modes, Prev: Making paragraphs, Up: Top
+
+16 Math formulas
+****************
+
+There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
+
+`math'
+ For formulas that appear right in the text.
+
+`displaymath'
+ For formulas that appear on their own line.
+
+`equation'
+ The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an
+ equation number in the right margin.
+
+ The `math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
+but the `displaymath' and `equation' environments can be used only in
+paragraph mode. The `math' and `displaymath' environments are used so
+often that they have the following short forms:
+
+ \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
+ \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
+ In fact, the `math' environment is so common that it has an even
+shorter form:
+
+ $ ... $ instead of \(...\)
+
+ The `\boldmath' command changes math letters and symbols to be in a
+bold font. It is used _outside_ of math mode. Conversely, the
+`\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it
+too is used _outside_ of math mode.
+
+ The `\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the
+formula to be that of `displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below
+summations. For example
+ $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Subscripts & Superscripts:: Also known as exponent or index.
+* Math symbols:: Various mathematical squiggles.
+* Math functions:: Math function names like sin and exp.
+* Math accents:: Accents in math.
+* Spacing in math mode:: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
+* Math Miscellany:: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Subscripts & Superscripts, Next: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.1 Subscripts & Superscripts
+==============================
+
+To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type
+`_{'exp`}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type
+`^{'exp`}'. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that
+stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when something
+has both a subscript and a superscript.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math symbols, Next: Math functions, Prev: Subscripts & Superscripts, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.2 Math symbols
+=================
+
+LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need.
+The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For
+example, if you include `$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi
+symbol (\pi) in your output.
+
+`\|'
+ \|
+
+`\aleph'
+ \aleph
+
+`\alpha'
+ \alpha
+
+`\amalg'
+ \amalg (binary operation)
+
+`\angle'
+ \angle
+
+`\approx'
+ \approx (relation)
+
+`\ast'
+ \ast (binary operation)
+
+`\asymp'
+ \asymp (relation)
+
+`\backslash'
+ \ (delimiter)
+
+`\beta'
+ \beta
+
+`\bigcap'
+ \bigcap
+
+`\bigcirc'
+ \bigcirc (binary operation)
+
+`\bigcup'
+ \bigcup
+
+`\bigodot'
+ \bigodot
+
+`\bigoplus'
+ \bigoplus
+
+`\bigotimes'
+ \bigotimes
+
+`\bigtriangledown'
+ \bigtriangledown (binary operation)
+
+`\bigtriangleup'
+ \bigtriangleup (binary operation)
+
+`\bigsqcup'
+ \bigsqcup
+
+`\biguplus'
+ \biguplus
+
+`\bigcap'
+ \bigvee
+
+`\bigwedge'
+ \bigwedge
+
+`\bot'
+ \bot
+
+`\bowtie'
+ \bowtie (relation)
+
+`\Box'
+ (square open box symbol)
+
+`\bullet'
+ \bullet (binary operation)
+
+`\cap'
+ \cap (binary operation)
+
+`\cdot'
+ \cdot (binary operation)
+
+`\chi'
+ \chi
+
+`\circ'
+ \circ (binary operation)
+
+`\clubsuit'
+ \clubsuit
+
+`\cong'
+ \cong (relation)
+
+`\coprod'
+ \coprod
+
+`\cup'
+ \cup (binary operation)
+
+`\dagger'
+ \dagger (binary operation)
+
+`\dashv'
+ \dashv (relation)
+
+`\ddagger'
+ \dagger (binary operation)
+
+`\Delta'
+ \Delta
+
+`\delta'
+ \delta
+
+`\Diamond'
+ bigger \diamond
+
+`\diamond'
+ \diamond (binary operation)
+
+`\diamondsuit'
+ \diamondsuit
+
+`\div'
+ \div (binary operation)
+
+`\doteq'
+ \doteq (relation)
+
+`\downarrow'
+ \downarrow (delimiter)
+
+`\Downarrow'
+ \Downarrow (delimiter)
+
+`\ell'
+ \ell
+
+`\emptyset'
+ \emptyset
+
+`\epsilon'
+ \epsilon
+
+`\equiv'
+ \equiv (relation)
+
+`\eta'
+ \eta
+
+`\exists'
+ \exists
+
+`\flat'
+ \flat
+
+`\forall'
+ \forall
+
+`\frown'
+ \frown (relation)
+
+`\Gamma'
+ \Gamma
+
+`\gamma'
+ \gamma
+
+`\ge'
+ \ge
+
+`\geq'
+ \geq (relation)
+
+`\gets'
+ \gets
+
+`\gg'
+ \gg (relation)
+
+`\hbar'
+ \hbar
+
+`\heartsuit'
+ \heartsuit
+
+`\hookleftarrow'
+ \hookleftarrow
+
+`\hookrightarrow'
+ \hookrightarrow
+
+`\iff'
+ \iff
+
+`\Im'
+ \Im
+
+`\in'
+ \in (relation)
+
+`\infty'
+ \infty
+
+`\int'
+ \int
+
+`\iota'
+ \iota
+
+`\Join'
+ condensed bowtie symbol (relation)
+
+`\kappa'
+ \kappa
+
+`\Lambda'
+ \Lambda
+
+`\lambda'
+ \lambda
+
+`\land'
+ \land
+
+`\langle'
+ \langle (delimiter)
+
+`\lbrace'
+ \lbrace (delimiter)
+
+`\lbrack'
+ \lbrack (delimiter)
+
+`\lceil'
+ \lceil (delimiter)
+
+`\le'
+ \le
+
+`\leadsto'
+
+`\Leftarrow'
+ \Leftarrow
+
+`\leftarrow'
+ \leftarrow
+
+`\leftharpoondown'
+ \leftharpoondown
+
+`\leftharpoonup'
+ \leftharpoonup
+
+`\Leftrightarrow'
+ \Leftrightarrow
+
+`\leftrightarrow'
+ \leftrightarrow
+
+`\leq'
+ \leq (relation)
+
+`\lfloor'
+ \lfloor (delimiter)
+
+`\lhd'
+ (left-pointing arrow head)
+
+`\ll'
+ \ll (relation)
+
+`\lnot'
+ \lnot
+
+`\longleftarrow'
+ \longleftarrow
+
+`\longleftrightarrow'
+ \longleftrightarrow
+
+`\longmapsto'
+ \longmapsto
+
+`\longrightarrow'
+ \longrightarrow
+
+`\lor'
+ \lor
+
+`\mapsto'
+ \mapsto
+
+`\mho'
+
+`\mid'
+ \mid (relation)
+
+`\models'
+ \models (relation)
+
+`\mp'
+ \mp (binary operation)
+
+`\mu'
+ \mu
+
+`\nabla'
+ \nabla
+
+`\natural'
+ \natural
+
+`\ne'
+ \ne
+
+`\nearrow'
+ \nearrow
+
+`\neg'
+ \neg
+
+`\neq'
+ \neq (relation)
+
+`\ni'
+ \ni (relation)
+
+`\not'
+ Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=.
+
+`\notin'
+ \ni
+
+`\nu'
+ \nu
+
+`\nwarrow'
+ \nwarrow
+
+`\odot'
+ \odot (binary operation)
+
+`\oint'
+ \oint
+
+`\Omega'
+ \Omega
+
+`\omega'
+ \omega
+
+`\ominus'
+ \ominus (binary operation)
+
+`\oplus'
+ \oplus (binary operation)
+
+`\oslash'
+ \oslash (binary operation)
+
+`\otimes'
+ \otimes (binary operation)
+
+`\owns'
+ \owns
+
+`\parallel'
+ \parallel (relation)
+
+`\partial'
+ \partial
+
+`\perp'
+ \perp (relation)
+
+`\phi'
+ \phi
+
+`\Pi'
+ \Pi
+
+`\pi'
+ \pi
+
+`\pm'
+ \pm (binary operation)
+
+`\prec'
+ \prec (relation)
+
+`\preceq'
+ \preceq (relation)
+
+`\prime'
+ \prime
+
+`\prod'
+ \prod
+
+`\propto'
+ \propto (relation)
+
+`\Psi'
+ \Psi
+
+`\psi'
+ \psi
+
+`\rangle'
+ \rangle (delimiter)
+
+`\rbrace'
+ \rbrace (delimiter)
+
+`\rbrack'
+ \rbrack (delimiter)
+
+`\rceil'
+ \rceil (delimiter)
+
+`\Re'
+ \Re
+
+`\rfloor'
+ \rfloor
+
+`\rhd'
+ (binary operation)
+
+`\rho'
+ \rho
+
+`\Rightarrow'
+ \Rightarrow
+
+`\rightarrow'
+ \rightarrow
+
+`\rightharpoondown'
+ \rightharpoondown
+
+`\rightharpoonup'
+ \rightharpoonup
+
+`\rightleftharpoons'
+ \rightleftharpoons
+
+`\searrow'
+ \searrow
+
+`\setminus'
+ \setminus (binary operation)
+
+`\sharp'
+ \sharp
+
+`\Sigma'
+ \Sigma
+
+`\sigma'
+ \sigma
+
+`\sim'
+ \sim (relation)
+
+`\simeq'
+ \simeq (relation)
+
+`\smallint'
+ \smallint
+
+`\smile'
+ \smile (relation)
+
+`\spadesuit'
+ \spadesuit
+
+`\sqcap'
+ \sqcap (binary operation)
+
+`\sqcup'
+ \sqcup (binary operation)
+
+`\sqsubset'
+ (relation)
+
+`\sqsubseteq'
+ \sqsubseteq (relation)
+
+`\sqsupset'
+ (relation)
+
+`\sqsupseteq'
+ \sqsupseteq (relation)
+
+`\star'
+ \star (binary operation)
+
+`\subset'
+ \subset (relation)
+
+`\subseteq'
+ \subseteq (relation)
+
+`\succ'
+ \succ (relation)
+
+`\succeq'
+ \succeq (relation)
+
+`\sum'
+ \sum
+
+`\supset'
+ \supset (relation)
+
+`\supseteq'
+ \supseteq (relation)
+
+`\surd'
+ \surd
+
+`\swarrow'
+ \swarrow
+
+`\tau'
+ \tau
+
+`\theta'
+ \theta
+
+`\times'
+ \times (binary operation)
+
+`\to'
+ \to
+
+`\top'
+ \top
+
+`\triangle'
+ \triangle
+
+`\triangleleft'
+ \triangleleft (binary operation)
+
+`\triangleright'
+ \triangleright (binary operation)
+
+`\unlhd'
+ left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
+
+`\unrhd'
+ right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
+
+`\Uparrow'
+ \Uparrow (delimiter)
+
+`\uparrow'
+ \uparrow (delimiter)
+
+`\Updownarrow'
+ \Updownarrow (delimiter)
+
+`\updownarrow'
+ \updownarrow (delimiter)
+
+`\uplus'
+ \uplus (binary operation)
+
+`\Upsilon'
+ \Upsilon
+
+`\upsilon'
+ \upsilon
+
+`\varepsilon'
+ \varepsilon
+
+`\varphi'
+ \varphi
+
+`\varpi'
+ \varpi
+
+`\varrho'
+ \varrho
+
+`\varsigma'
+ \varsigma
+
+`\vartheta'
+ \vartheta
+
+`\vdash'
+ \vdash (relation)
+
+`\vee'
+ \vee (binary operation)
+
+`\Vert'
+ \Vert (delimiter)
+
+`\vert'
+ \vert (delimiter)
+
+`\wedge'
+ \wedge (binary operation)
+
+`\wp'
+ \wp
+
+`\wr'
+ \wr (binary operation)
+
+`\Xi'
+ \Xi
+
+`\xi'
+ \xi
+
+`\zeta'
+ \zeta
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math functions, Next: Math accents, Prev: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.3 Math functions
+===================
+
+These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
+spacing.
+
+`\arccos'
+ \arccos
+
+`\arcsin'
+ \arcsin
+
+`\arctan'
+ \arctan
+
+`\arg'
+ \arg
+
+`\bmod'
+ Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y)
+
+`\cos'
+ \cos
+
+`\cosh'
+ \cosh
+
+`\cot'
+ \cos
+
+`\coth'
+ \cosh
+
+`\csc'
+ \csc
+
+`\deg'
+ \deg
+
+`\det'
+ \deg
+
+`\dim'
+ \dim
+
+`\exp'
+ \exp
+
+`\gcd'
+ \gcd
+
+`\hom'
+ \hom
+
+`\inf'
+ \inf
+
+`\ker'
+ \ker
+
+`\lg'
+ \lg
+
+`\lim'
+ \lim
+
+`\liminf'
+ \liminf
+
+`\limsup'
+ \limsup
+
+`\ln'
+ \ln
+
+`\log'
+ \log
+
+`\max'
+ \max
+
+`\min'
+ \min
+
+`\pmod'
+ parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1)
+
+`\Pr'
+ \Pr
+
+`\sec'
+ \sec
+
+`\sin'
+ \sin
+
+`\sinh'
+ \sinh
+
+`\sup'
+ \sup
+
+`\tan'
+ \tan
+
+`\tanh'
+ \tanh
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math accents, Next: Spacing in math mode, Prev: Math functions, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.4 Math accents
+=================
+
+LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in
+math. These are different from accents in normal text (*note
+Accents::).
+
+`\acute'
+ Math acute accent: \acutex.
+
+`\breve'
+ Math breve accent: \brevex.
+
+`\check'
+ Math ha'c<ek (check) accent: \checkx.
+
+`\ddot'
+ Math dieresis accent: \ddotx.
+
+`\dot'
+ Math dot accent: \dotx.
+
+`\grave'
+ Math grave accent: \gravex.
+
+`\hat'
+ Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hatx.
+
+`\imath'
+ Math dotless i.
+
+`\jmath'
+ Math dotless j.
+
+`\tilde'
+ Math tilde accent: \tildex.
+
+`\vec'
+ Math vector symbol: \vecx.
+
+`\widehat'
+ Math wide hat accent: \widehatx+y.
+
+`\widehat'
+ Math wide tilde accent: \widetildex+y.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Spacing in math mode, Next: Math Miscellany, Prev: Math accents, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.5 Spacing in math mode
+=========================
+
+In a `math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in
+the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If
+you want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following commands for
+use in math mode:
+
+`\;'
+ A thick space (5\over18\,quad).
+
+`\:'
+`\>'
+ Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad).
+
+`\,'
+ A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode.
+
+`\!'
+ A negative thin space (-1\over6\,quad).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Math Miscellany, Prev: Spacing in math mode, Up: Math formulas
+
+16.6 Math Miscellany
+====================
+
+`\*'
+ A "discretionary" multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
+ allowed.
+
+`\cdots'
+ A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the
+ line.
+
+`\ddots'
+ A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots.
+
+`\frac{num}{den}'
+ Produces the fraction `num' divided by `den'.
+
+`\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2'
+ The two delimiters need not match; `.' acts as a null delimiter,
+ producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the
+ math in between. Example: `\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]'.
+
+`\overbrace{TEXT}'
+ Generates a brace over TEXT. For example, \overbracex+\cdots+x^k
+ \rm\;times.
+
+`\overline{TEXT}'
+ Generates a horizontal line over TEX. For exampe, \overlinex+y.
+
+`\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}'
+ Produces the representation of the square root of ARG. The
+ optional argument ROOT determines what root to produce. For
+ example, the cube root of `x+y' would be typed as
+ `$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$'.
+
+`\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}'
+ Puts TEXT above RELATION. For example,
+ `\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.
+
+`\underbrace{math}'
+ Generates MATH with a brace underneath.
+
+`\underline{text}'
+ Causes TEXT, which may be either math mode or not, to be
+ underlined.
+
+`\vdots'
+ Produces a vertical ellipsis.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Modes, Next: Page Styles, Prev: Math formulas, Up: Top
+
+17 Modes
+********
+
+When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
+modes:
+
+ * Paragraph mode
+
+ * Math mode
+
+ * Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
+
+ LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
+different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes.
+Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when
+LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands.
+
+ "Paragraph mode" is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when
+processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into
+lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in "math mode" when
+it's generating a mathematical formula. In "LR mode", as in paragraph
+mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of
+words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX
+keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode.
+Even if you put a hundred words into an `\mbox', LaTeX would keep
+typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then
+complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.
+
+ LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an `\mbox'
+command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for
+example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box.
+There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
+making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of
+these commands or environments will be called a `parbox'. When LaTeX
+is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner
+paragraph mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is
+called "outer paragraph mode".
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Page Styles, Next: Spaces, Prev: Modes, Up: Top
+
+18 Page Styles
+**************
+
+The `\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the
+page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \maketitle:: Generate a title page.
+* \pagenumbering:: Set the style used for page numbers.
+* \pagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style.
+* \thispagestyle:: Change the headings/footings style for this page.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \maketitle, Next: \pagenumbering, Up: Page Styles
+
+18.1 `\maketitle'
+=================
+
+The `\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title
+page--except in the `article' class, where the title is placed at the
+top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is
+obtained from the following declarations:
+
+`\author{NAME \and NAME2}'
+ The `\author' command declares the document author(s), where the
+ argument is a list of authors separated by `\and' commands. Use
+ `\\' to separate lines within a single author's entry--for
+ example, to give the author's institution or address.
+
+`\date{TEXT}'
+ The `\date' command declares TEXT to be the document's date. With
+ no `\date' command, the current date (*note \today::) is used.
+
+`\thanks{TEXT}'
+ The `\thanks' command produces a `\footnote' to the title, usually
+ used for credit acknowledgements.
+
+`\title{TEXT}'
+ The `\title' command declares TEXT to be the title of the
+ document. Use `\\' to force a line break, as usual.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagenumbering, Next: \pagestyle, Prev: \maketitle, Up: Page Styles
+
+18.2 `\pagenumbering'
+=====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \pagenumbering{STYLE}
+
+ Specifies the style of page numbers, according to STYLE:
+
+`arabic'
+ arabic numerals
+
+`roman'
+ lowercase Roman numerals
+
+`Roman'
+ uppercase Roman numerals
+
+`alph'
+ lowercase letters
+
+`Alph'
+ uppercase letters
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \pagestyle, Next: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagenumbering, Up: Page Styles
+
+18.3 `\pagestyle'
+=================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \pagestyle{STYLE}
+
+ The `\pagestyle' command specifies how the headers and footers are
+typeset from the current page onwards. Values for STYLE:
+
+`plain'
+ Just a plain page number.
+
+`empty'
+ Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers.
+
+`headings'
+ Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies
+ what goes in the headers.
+
+`myheadings'
+ Custom headers, specified via the `\markboth' or the `\markright'
+ commands.
+
+
+ Here are the descriptions of `\markboth' and `\markright':
+
+`\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}'
+ Sets both the left and the right heading. A "left-hand heading"
+ (LEFT) is generated by the last `\markboth' command before the end
+ of the page, while a "right-hand heading" (RIGHT is generated by
+ the first `\markboth' or `\markright' that comes on the page if
+ there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
+
+`\markright{RIGHT}'
+ Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \thispagestyle, Prev: \pagestyle, Up: Page Styles
+
+18.4 `\thispagestyle{STYLE}'
+============================
+
+The `\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the
+`\pagestyle' command (see previous section) except that it changes to
+STYLE for the current page only.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Spaces, Next: Boxes, Prev: Page Styles, Up: Top
+
+19 Spaces
+*********
+
+LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
+
+ Another space-producing command is `\,' to produce a "thin" space
+(usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is more often
+useful in math mode (*note Spacing in math mode::).
+
+* Menu:
+
+Horizontal space
+* \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space.
+* \SPACE:: Normal interword space.
+* \AT:: Ending a sentence.
+* \thinspace:: One-sixth of an em.
+* \/:: Per-character italic correction.
+* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space.
+* \hrulefill:: Stretchable horizontal rule.
+* \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal dots.
+
+Vertical space
+* \addvspace:: Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
+* \bigskip \medskip \smallskip:: Fixed vertical spaces.
+* \vfill:: Infinitely stretchable vertical space.
+* \vspace:: Add arbitrary vertical space.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hspace, Next: \SPACE, Up: Spaces
+
+19.1 `\hspace'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \hspace[*]{LENGTH}
+
+ The `\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The LENGTH argument
+can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands: points, inches,
+etc. It is a rubber length. You can add both negative and positive
+space with an `\hspace' command; adding negative space is like
+backspacing.
+
+ LaTeX normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning
+or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional `*' form.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \hrulefill, Prev: \/, Up: Spaces
+
+19.2 `\hfill'
+=============
+
+The `\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which has no
+natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed.
+
+ The `\fill' parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the
+glue value `0pt plus1fill'); thus, `\hspace\fill' is equivalent to
+`\hfill'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \SPACE, Next: \AT, Prev: \hspace, Up: Spaces
+
+19.3 `\SPACE'
+=============
+
+The `\ ' (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's
+useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example
+`Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental'. It is
+also often used after control sequences, as in `\TeX\ is a nice system.'
+
+ In normal circumstances, `\'<tab> and `\'<newline> are equivalent to
+`\ '.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \AT, Next: \thinspace, Prev: \SPACE, Up: Spaces
+
+19.4 `\@'
+=========
+
+The `\@' command makes the following punctuation character end a
+sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a
+capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without `\@':
+
+ ... in C\@. Pascal, though ...
+ ... in C. Pascal, though ...
+
+produces
+
+ ... in C. Pascal, though ... ... in C. Pascal, though ...
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinspace, Next: \/, Prev: \AT, Up: Spaces
+
+19.5 `\thinspace'
+=================
+
+`\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is
+1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as in
+'".
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \/, Next: \hfill, Prev: \thinspace, Up: Spaces
+
+19.6 `\/'
+=========
+
+The `\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small
+space defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the
+character colliding with whatever follows. The italic f character
+typically has a large italic correction value.
+
+ If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary
+to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a
+very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as
+normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the `f's
+are nicely separated) with f: f;.
+
+ Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic
+correction. Compare pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space
+after the `f') with pdfTeX.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hrulefill, Next: \dotfill, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces
+
+19.7 `\hrulefill'
+=================
+
+The `\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
+stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
+rule.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \dotfill, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \hrulefill, Up: Spaces
+
+19.8 `\dotfill'
+===============
+
+The `\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that fills with dots
+instead of just white space.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addvspace, Next: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Prev: \dotfill, Up: Spaces
+
+19.9 `\addvspace'
+=================
+
+`\addvspace{length}'
+
+ The `\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height
+length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
+point in the output by a previous `\addvspace' command, then this
+command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length
+of the total vertical space equal to `length'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Next: \vfill, Prev: \addvspace, Up: Spaces
+
+19.10 `\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
+====================================
+
+These commands produce a given amount of space.
+
+`\bigskip'
+ The same as `\vspace{bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line
+ space (with stretch and shrink).
+
+`\medskip'
+ The same as `\vspace{medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a
+ line space (with stretch and shrink).
+
+`\smallskip'
+ The same as `\vspace{smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter
+ of a line space (with stretch and shrink).
+
+
+ The `\...amount' parameters are determined by the document class.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \vfill, Next: \vspace, Prev: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Up: Spaces
+
+19.11 `\vfill'
+==============
+
+The `\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can
+stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to
+`\vspace{\fill}' (*note \hfill::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \vspace, Prev: \vfill, Up: Spaces
+
+19.12 `\vspace[*]{LENGTH}'
+==========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \vspace[*]{LENGTH}
+
+ The `\vspace' command adds the vertical space LENGTH, i.e., a rubber
+length. LENGTH can be negative or positive.
+
+ Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by `\vspace' at the
+top or bottom of a page. With the optional `*' argument, the space is
+not removed.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Boxes, Next: Special insertions, Prev: Spaces, Up: Top
+
+20 Boxes
+********
+
+All the predefined length parameters (*note Predefined lengths::) can be
+used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \mbox:: Horizontal boxes.
+* \fbox and \framebox:: Put a frame around a box.
+* lrbox:: An environment like \sbox.
+* \makebox:: Box, adjustable position.
+* \parbox:: Box with text in paragraph mode.
+* \raisebox:: Raise or lower text.
+* \savebox:: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
+* \sbox:: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
+* \usebox:: Print saved text.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \mbox, Next: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.1 `\mbox{TEXT}'
+==================
+
+The `\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text
+created by its argument. The TEXT is not broken into lines, so it can
+be used to prevent hyphenation.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \fbox and \framebox, Next: lrbox, Prev: \mbox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.2 `\fbox' and `\framebox'
+============================
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \fbox{TEXT}
+ \framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ The `\fbox' and `\framebox' commands are like `\mbox', except that
+they put a frame around the outside of the box being created.
+
+ In addition, the `\framebox' command allows for explicit
+specification of the box width with the optional WIDTH argument (a
+dimension), and positioning with the optional POSITION argument. Both
+commands produce a rule of thickness `\fboxrule' (default `.4pt'), and
+leave a space of `\fboxsep' (default `3pt') between the rule and the
+contents of the box.
+
+ *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the `\framebox' command in the
+`picture' environment.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: lrbox, Next: \makebox, Prev: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.3 `lrbox'
+============
+
+`\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}'
+
+ This is the environment form of `\sbox'.
+
+ The text inside the environment is saved in the box `cmd', which
+must have been declared with `\newsavebox'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox, Next: \parbox, Prev: lrbox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.4 `\makebox'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
+
+ The `\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the
+TEXT specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional
+WIDTH argument. The position of the text within the box is determined
+by the optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:
+
+`c'
+ Centered (default).
+
+`l'
+ Flush left.
+
+`r'
+ Flush right.
+
+`s'
+ Stretch (justify) across entire WIDTH; TEXT must contain
+ stretchable space for this to work.
+
+ `\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note
+\makebox (picture)::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \makebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.5 `\parbox'
+==============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{TEXT}
+
+ The `\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in
+`paragraph' mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of
+text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any
+paragraph-making environments inside a `\parbox' argument. For larger
+pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making
+environment, you should use a `minipage' environment (*note minipage::).
+
+ `\parbox' has two mandatory arguments:
+
+WIDTH
+ the width of the parbox;
+
+TEXT
+ the text that goes inside the parbox.
+
+ The optional POSITION argument allows you to align either the top or
+bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text
+(default is top).
+
+ The optional HEIGHT argument overrides the natural height of the box.
+
+ The INNER-POS argument controls the placement of the text inside the
+box, as follows; if it is not specified, POSITION is used.
+
+`t'
+ text is placed at the top of the box.
+
+`c'
+ text is centered in the box.
+
+`b'
+ text is placed at the bottom of the box.
+
+`s'
+ stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable
+ space for this to work.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \raisebox, Next: \savebox, Prev: \parbox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.6 `\raisebox'
+================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \raisebox{distance}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{text}
+
+ The `\raisebox' command raises or lowers TEXT. The first mandatory
+argument specifies how high TEXT is to be raised (or lowered if it is a
+negative amount). TEXT itself is processed in LR mode.
+
+ The optional arguments HEIGHT and DEPTH are dimensions. If they are
+specified, LaTeX treats TEXT as extending a certain distance above the
+baseline (height) or below (depth), ignoring its natural height and
+depth.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \savebox, Next: \sbox, Prev: \raisebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.7 `\savebox'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \savebox{\BOXCMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT}
+
+ This command typeset TEXT in a box just as with `\makebox' (*note
+\makebox::), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it
+saves it in the box labeled \BOXCMD, which must have been declared with
+`\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \sbox, Next: \usebox, Prev: \savebox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.8 `\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}'
+===========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}
+
+ `\sbox' types TEXT in a box just as with `\mbox' (*note \mbox::)
+except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal
+output, it is saved in the box labeled \BOXCMD. \BOXCMD must have been
+previously declared with `\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \usebox, Prev: \sbox, Up: Boxes
+
+20.9 `\usebox{\BOXCMD'
+======================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \usebox{\BOXCMD}
+
+ `\usebox' producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by
+a `\savebox' command (*note \savebox::).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Special insertions, Next: Splitting the input, Prev: Boxes, Up: Top
+
+21 Special insertions
+*********************
+
+LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special
+meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Reserved characters:: Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+* Text symbols:: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
+* Accents:: Inserting accents.
+* Non-English characters:: Inserting other non-English characters.
+* \rule:: Inserting lines and rectangles.
+* \today:: Inserting today's date.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Reserved characters, Next: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions
+
+21.1 Reserved characters
+========================
+
+The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called
+"reserved characters" or "special characters".
+
+ # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+ Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX
+will do something special. If you simply want the character to be
+printed as itself, include a `\' in front of the character. For
+example, `\$' will produce `$' in your output.
+
+ One exception to this rule is `\' itself, because `\\' has its own
+special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing
+`$\backslash$' in your file, and a typewriter `\' is produced by using
+`\' in a verbatim command (*note verbatim::).
+
+ Also, `\~' and `\^' place tilde and circumflex accents over the
+following letter, as in o~ and o^ (*note Accents::); to get a
+standalone `~' or `^', you can again use a verbatim command.
+
+ Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you
+know its number by using the `\symbol' command. For example, the
+visible space character used in the `\verb*' command has the code
+decimal 32, so it can be typed as `\symbol{32}'.
+
+ You can also specify octal numbers with `'' or hexadecimal numbers
+with `"', so the previous example could also be written as
+`\symbol{'40}' or `\symbol{"20}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Text symbols, Next: Accents, Prev: Reserved characters, Up: Special insertions
+
+21.2 Text symbols
+=================
+
+LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
+running text.
+
+`\copyright'
+ The copyright symbol, (C).
+
+`\dag'
+ The dagger symbol (in text).
+
+`\ddag'
+ The double dagger symbol (in text).
+
+`\LaTeX'
+ The LaTeX logo.
+
+`\ldots'
+ An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `...'. This command
+ also works in math mode.
+
+`\lq'
+ Left (opening) quote: `.
+
+`\P'
+ Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+
+`\pounds'
+ English pounds sterling.
+
+`\rq'
+ Right (closing) quote: '.
+
+`\S'
+ Section symbol.
+
+`\TeX'
+ The TeX logo.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Accents, Next: Non-English characters, Prev: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions
+
+21.3 Accents
+============
+
+LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
+through the `babel' package and related support. This section does not
+attempt to cover all that support. It merely the core LaTeX commands
+for creating accented characters.
+
+`\"'
+ Produces an umlaut, as in o".
+
+`\''
+ Produces an acute accent, as in o'. In the `tabbing' environment,
+ pushes current column to the right of the previous column (*note
+ tabbing::).
+
+`\.'
+ Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o..
+
+`\='
+ Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o=.
+
+`\^'
+ Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o^.
+
+`\`'
+ Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o`. In the
+ `tabbing' environment, move following text to the right margin
+ (*note tabbing::).
+
+`\~'
+ Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n~.
+
+`\b'
+ Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_.
+
+`\bar'
+ Produces a macron accent over the following, as in o=.
+
+`\c'
+ Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in
+
+`\d'
+ Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o.
+
+`\H'
+ Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in
+ o''.
+
+`\i'
+ Produces a dotless i, as in `i'.
+
+`\j'
+ Produces a dotless j, as in `j'.
+
+`\t'
+ Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['.
+
+`\u'
+ Produces a breve accent, as in `o('.
+
+`\v'
+ Produces a ha'c<ek (check) accent, as in `o<'.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Non-English characters, Next: \rule, Prev: Accents, Up: Special insertions
+
+21.4 Non-English characters
+===========================
+
+Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting characters commonly
+used in languages other than English.
+
+`\aa'
+`\AA'
+ aa and AA.
+
+`\ae'
+`\AE'
+ ae and AE.
+
+`\l'
+`\L'
+ /l and /L.
+
+`\o'
+`\O'
+ /o and /O.
+
+`\oe'
+`\OE'
+ oe and OE.
+
+`\ss'
+ ss.
+
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \rule, Next: \today, Prev: Non-English characters, Up: Special insertions
+
+21.5 `\rule'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \rule[RAISE]{WIDTH}{THICKNESS}
+
+ The `\rule' command produces "rules", that is, lines or rectangles.
+The arguments are:
+
+RAISE
+ How high to raise the rule (optional).
+
+WIDTH
+ The length of the rule (mandatory).
+
+THICKNESS
+ The thickness of the rule (mandatory).
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \today, Prev: \rule, Up: Special insertions
+
+21.6 `\today'
+=============
+
+The `\today' command produces today's date, in the format `MONTH DD,
+YYYY'; for example, `July 4, 1976'. It uses the predefined counters
+`\day', `\month', and `\year' (*note \day \month \year::) to do this.
+It is not updated as the program runs.
+
+ The `datetime' package, among others, can produce a wide variety of
+other date formats.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Splitting the input, Next: Front/back matter, Prev: Special insertions, Up: Top
+
+22 Splitting the input
+**********************
+
+A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole
+input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into
+several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use,
+there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type
+when you run LaTeX.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \include:: Conditionally include a file.
+* \includeonly:: Determine which files are included.
+* \input:: Unconditionally include a file.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \include, Next: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input
+
+22.1 `\include'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \include{FILE}
+
+ If no `\includeonly' command is present, the `\include' command
+executes `\clearpage' to start a new page (*note \clearpage::), then
+reads FILE, then does another `\clearpage'.
+
+ Given an `\includeonly' command, the `\include' actions are only run
+if FILE is listed as an argument to `\includeonly'. See the next
+section.
+
+ The `\include' command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
+read by another `\include' command.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \includeonly, Next: \input, Prev: \include, Up: Splitting the input
+
+22.2 \`includeonly'
+===================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \includeonly{FILE1,FILE2,...}
+
+ The `\includeonly' command controls which files will be read by
+subsequent `\include' commands. The list of filenames is
+comma-separated. Each FILE must exactly match a filename specified in a
+`\include' command for the selection to be effective.
+
+ This command can only appear in the preamble.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \input, Prev: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input
+
+22.3 \input
+===========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \input{FILE}
+
+ The `\input' command causes the specified FILE to be read and
+processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at
+that point.
+
+ If FILE does not end in `.tex' (e.g., `foo' or `foo.bar'), it is
+first tried with that extension (`foo.tex' or `foo.bar.tex'). If that
+is not found, the original FILE is tried (`foo' or `foo.bar').
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Front/back matter, Next: Letters, Prev: Splitting the input, Up: Top
+
+23 Front/back matter
+********************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* Tables of contents::
+* Glossaries::
+* Indexes::
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Tables of contents, Next: Glossaries, Up: Front/back matter
+
+23.1 Tables of contents
+=======================
+
+A table of contents is produced with the `\tableofcontents' command.
+You put the command right where you want the table of contents to go;
+LaTeX does the rest for you. A previous run must have generated a
+`.toc' file.
+
+ The `\tableofcontents' command produces a heading, but it does not
+automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the table
+of contents, write a `\newpage' command after the `\tableofcontents'
+command.
+
+ The analagous commands `\listoffigures' and `\listoftables' produce
+a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively. Everything works
+exactly the same as for the table of contents.
+
+ The command `\nofiles' overrides these commands, and _prevents_ any
+of these lists from being generated.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \addcontentsline:: Add an entry to table of contents etc.
+* \addtocontents:: Add text directly to table of contents file etc.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addcontentsline, Next: \addtocontents, Up: Tables of contents
+
+23.1.1 \addcontentsline
+-----------------------
+
+The `\addcontentsline' command adds an entry to the specified list or
+table where:
+
+EXT
+ The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
+ typically one of: `toc' (table of contents), `lof' (list of
+ figures), or `lot' (list of tables).
+
+UNIT
+ The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the
+ following, matching the value of the EXT argument:
+
+ `toc'
+ The name of the sectional unit: `part', `chapter', `section',
+ `subsection', `subsubsection'.
+
+ `lof'
+ For the list of figures.
+
+ `lot'
+ For the list of tables.
+
+ENTRY
+ The actual text of the entry.
+
+ What is written to the `.EXT' file is the command
+`\contentsline{UNIT}{NAME}'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocontents, Prev: \addcontentsline, Up: Tables of contents
+
+23.1.2 \addtocontents
+---------------------
+
+The `\addtocontents' command adds text (or formatting commands)
+directly to the `.'EXT file that generates the table of contents or
+lists of figures or tables.
+
+EXT
+ The extension of the file on which information is to be written:
+ `toc' (table of contents), `lof' (list of figures), or `lot' (list
+ of tables).
+
+TEXT
+ The text to be written.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Glossaries, Next: Indexes, Prev: Tables of contents, Up: Front/back matter
+
+23.2 Glossaries
+===============
+
+The command `\makeglossary' enables creating glossaries.
+
+ The command `\glossary{TEXT}' writes a glossary entry for TEXT to an
+auxiliary file with the `.glo' extension.
+
+ Specifically, what gets written is the command
+`\glossaryentry{TEXT}{PAGENO}', where PAGENO is the current `\thepage'
+value.
+
+ The `glossary' package on CTAN provides support for fancier
+glossaries.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Indexes, Prev: Glossaries, Up: Front/back matter
+
+23.3 Indexes
+============
+
+The command `\makeindex' enables creating indexes.
+
+ The command `\index{TEXT}' writes a glossary entry for TEXT to an
+auxiliary file with the `.idx' extension.
+
+ Specifically, what gets written is the command
+`\indexentry{TEXT}{PAGENO}', where PAGENO is the current `\thepage'
+value.
+
+ The rubber length `\indexspace' is inserted before each new letter
+in the index; its default value is `10pt plus5pt minus3pt'.
+
+ The `.idx' file can then be sorted with an external command,
+typically `makeindex' or `xindy', resulting in a `.ind' file, which can
+then be used to typeset the index.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Letters, Next: Terminal Input/Output, Prev: Front/back matter, Up: Top
+
+24 Letters
+**********
+
+You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The
+`letter' document class is designed to make a number of letters at
+once, although you can make just one if you so desire.
+
+ Your `.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the other
+document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a
+minimum:
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
+ ... letters ...
+ \end{document}
+
+ Each letter is a `letter' environment, whose argument is the name
+and address of the recipient. For example, you might have:
+
+ \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
+ \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ ...
+ \end{letter}
+
+ The letter itself begins with the `\opening' command. The text of
+the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that
+make no sense in a letter, like `\chapter', do not work. The letter
+closes with a `\closing' command.
+
+ After the `closing', you can have additional material. The `\cc'
+command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar `\encl'
+command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use `\\' to
+separate the items.
+
+ These commands are used with the `letter' class.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \address:: Your return address.
+* \cc:: Cc list.
+* \closing:: Saying goodbye.
+* \encl:: List of enclosed material.
+* \location:: Your organisation's address.
+* \makelabels:: Making address labels.
+* \name:: Your name, for the return address.
+* \opening:: Saying hello.
+* \ps:: Adding a postscript.
+* \signature:: Your signature.
+* \startbreaks:: Allow page breaks.
+* \stopbreaks:: Disallow page breaks.
+* \telephone:: Your phone number.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \address, Next: \cc, Up: Letters
+
+24.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS}
+=============================
+
+The `\address' specifies the return address of a letter, as it should
+appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address
+should be separated by `\\' commands.
+
+ If you do not make an `\address' declaration, then the letter will
+be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard letterhead.
+(*Note Overview::, for details on your local implementation). If you
+give an `\address' declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a
+personal letter.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \cc, Next: \closing, Prev: \address, Up: Letters
+
+24.2 `\cc'
+==========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \cc{NAME1\\NAME2}
+
+ Produce a list of NAMEs the letter was copied to. Each name is
+printed on a separate line.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \closing, Next: \encl, Prev: \cc, Up: Letters
+
+24.3 `\closing'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \closing{text}
+
+ A letter closes with a `\closing' command, for example,
+ \closing{Best Regards,}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \encl, Next: \location, Prev: \closing, Up: Letters
+
+24.4 `\encl'
+============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \encl{LINE1\\LINE2}
+
+ Declare a list of one more enclosures.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \location, Next: \makelabels, Prev: \encl, Up: Letters
+
+24.5 `\location'
+================
+
+`\location{address}'
+
+ This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only
+appears if the `firstpage' pagestyle is selected.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \makelabels, Next: \name, Prev: \location, Up: Letters
+
+24.6 `\makelabels'
+==================
+
+`\makelabels{number}'
+
+ If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet
+of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \name, Next: \opening, Prev: \makelabels, Up: Letters
+
+24.7 `\name'
+============
+
+`\name{June Davenport}'
+
+ Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return
+address.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \opening, Next: \ps, Prev: \name, Up: Letters
+
+24.8 `\opening{TEXT}'
+=====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \opening{TEXT}
+
+ A letter begins with the `\opening' command. The mandatory
+argument, TEXT, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. For
+instance:
+
+ \opening{Dear Joe,}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \ps, Next: \signature, Prev: \opening, Up: Letters
+
+24.9 `\ps'
+==========
+
+Use the `\ps' command to start a postscript in a letter, after
+`\closing'.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \signature, Next: \startbreaks, Prev: \ps, Up: Letters
+
+24.10 `\signature{TEXT}'
+========================
+
+Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the
+space for your signature. `\\' starts a new line within TEXT as usual.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \startbreaks, Next: \stopbreaks, Prev: \signature, Up: Letters
+
+24.11 `\startbreaks'
+====================
+
+`\startbreaks'
+
+ Used after a `\stopbreaks' command to allow page breaks again.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \stopbreaks, Next: \telephone, Prev: \startbreaks, Up: Letters
+
+24.12 `\stopbreaks'
+===================
+
+`\stopbreaks'
+
+ Inhibit page breaks until a `\startbreaks' command occurs.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \telephone, Prev: \stopbreaks, Up: Letters
+
+24.13 `\telephone'
+==================
+
+`\telephone{number}'
+
+ This is your telephone number. This only appears if the `firstpage'
+pagestyle is selected.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Terminal Input/Output, Next: Command Line, Prev: Letters, Up: Top
+
+25 Terminal Input/Output
+************************
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \typein:: Read text from the terminal.
+* \typeout:: Write text to the terminal.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \typein, Next: \typeout, Up: Terminal Input/Output
+
+25.1 `\typein[CMD]{MSG}'
+========================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \typein[\CMD]{MSG}
+
+ `\typein' prints MSG on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and
+wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the
+optional \CMD argument is omitted, the typed input is processed as if
+it had been included in the input file in place of the `\typein'
+command. If the \CMD argument is present, it must be a command name.
+This command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \typeout, Prev: \typein, Up: Terminal Input/Output
+
+25.2 `\typeout{MSG}'
+====================
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \typeout{MSG}
+
+ Prints `msg' on the terminal and in the `log' file. Commands in
+`msg' that are defined with `\newcommand' or `\renewcommand' (among
+others) are replaced by their definitions before being printed.
+
+ LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to `msg'. A `\space'
+command in `msg' causes a single space to be printed, independent of
+surrounding spaces. A `^^J' in `msg' prints a newline.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Command Line, Next: Document templates, Prev: Terminal Input/Output, Up: Top
+
+26 Command Line
+***************
+
+The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX
+uses `.tex' as a default file extension. If you omit the input file
+entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command
+options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g.
+
+ latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+
+will process `foo.tex' without pausing after every error.
+
+ If LaTeX stops in the middle of the document and gives you a `*'
+prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type `\stop' (and return) and
+it will prematurely end the document.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Document templates, Next: Command Index, Prev: Command Line, Up: Top
+
+Appendix A Document templates
+*****************************
+
+Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
+be useful.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* book template::
+* beamer template::
+* tugboat template::
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: book template, Next: beamer template, Up: Document templates
+
+A.1 `book' template
+===================
+
+\documentclass{book}
+\title{Book Class Template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\chapter{First}
+Some text.
+
+\chapter{Second}
+Some other text.
+
+\section{A subtopic}
+The end.
+\end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: beamer template, Next: tugboat template, Prev: book template, Up: Document templates
+
+A.2 `beamer' template
+=====================
+
+The `beamer' class creates slides presentations.
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+\title{Beamer Class template}
+\author{Alex Author}
+\date{July 31, 2007}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% without [fragile], any {verbatim} code gets mysterious errors.
+\begin{frame}[fragile]
+ \frametitle{First Slide}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+ This is \verbatim!
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: tugboat template, Prev: beamer template, Up: Document templates
+
+A.3 `tugboat' template
+======================
+
+`TUGboat' is the journal of the TeX Users Group,
+`http://tug.org/TUGboat'.
+
+\documentclass{ltugboat} % ltugproc for proceedings
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+\usepackage{ifpdf}
+\ifpdf
+ \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
+ urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
+\else
+ \usepackage{url}
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Example \TUB\ Regular Article}
+
+% repeat info for each author.
+\author{First Last}
+\address{Street Address \\ Town, Postal \\ Country}
+\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
+\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
+
+\maketitle
+
+% The abstract comes after \maketitle in ltugboat.
+\begin{abstract}
+This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is an example article for \TUB, from
+\url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/location.html}.
+
+We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the hyperref
+package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output). \TUB\ is produced
+using \acro{PDF} files exclusively, nowadays.
+
+The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others:
+
+{\small
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
+\BibTeX \CandT \CTAN \DTD \DVItoVDU \HTML
+\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \JoT \LAMSTeX \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \pcMF \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG
+\tug \UG \UNIX \VAX \VorTeX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
+
+\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
+\careof \thinskip
+
+\acro{FRED} -> {\sc fred} % please use!
+\cs{fred} -> \fred
+\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
+\meta{fred} -> <fred>
+\nth{n} -> 1st, 2nd, ...
+\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
+\booktitle{Book of Fred}
+\end{verbatim}
+}
+
+For more information, see the ltubguid document at:
+\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+
+Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
+
+
+\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
+\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
+\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
+
+
+\makesignature % not in ltugproc
+\end{document}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Concept Index, Prev: Command Index, Up: Top
+
+Concept Index
+*************
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* * prompt: Command Line. (line 15)
+* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 38)
+* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 8)
+* .idx file: Indexes. (line 8)
+* .ind file: Indexes. (line 18)
+* abstracts: abstract. (line 6)
+* accents: Accents. (line 6)
+* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 6)
+* accessing any character of a font: Reserved characters. (line 25)
+* acute accent: Accents. (line 15)
+* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 11)
+* ae ligature: Non-English characters.
+ (line 15)
+* aligning Equations: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 6)
+* appendix, creating: Sectioning. (line 44)
+* aring: Non-English characters.
+ (line 11)
+* arrays, math: array. (line 6)
+* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 12)
+* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 23)
+* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 37)
+* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6)
+* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* black boxes, omitting: Document class options.
+ (line 27)
+* bold font: Font styles. (line 84)
+* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 18)
+* boxes: Boxes. (line 6)
+* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6)
+* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6)
+* breve accent: Accents. (line 62)
+* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 14)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 87)
+* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 6)
+* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 87)
+* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 6)
+* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 43)
+* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 6)
+* centering text, environment for: center. (line 6)
+* characters, accented: Accents. (line 6)
+* characters, non-English: Non-English characters.
+ (line 6)
+* characters, reserved: Reserved characters. (line 6)
+* check accent: Accents. (line 65)
+* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 17)
+* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 26)
+* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 29)
+* class options: Document class options.
+ (line 6)
+* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 6)
+* closing letters: \closing. (line 6)
+* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 35)
+* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
+* command Line: Command Line. (line 6)
+* commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
+* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 10)
+* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 6)
+* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 6)
+* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 6)
+* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* creating letters: Letters. (line 6)
+* creating pictures: picture. (line 6)
+* creating tables: table. (line 6)
+* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 22)
+* cross references: Cross references. (line 6)
+* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 6)
+* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 6)
+* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 13)
+* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 18)
+* datetime package: \today. (line 11)
+* defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 6)
+* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* definitions: Definitions. (line 6)
+* description lists, creating: description. (line 6)
+* discretionary multiplication: Math Miscellany. (line 7)
+* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation.
+ (line 6)
+* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quote.
+ (line 6)
+* document class options: Document class options.
+ (line 6)
+* document classes: Document classes. (line 6)
+* document templates: Document templates. (line 6)
+* dot accent: Accents. (line 20)
+* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 23)
+* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 20)
+* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 46)
+* dotless i: Accents. (line 53)
+* dotless i, math: Math accents. (line 32)
+* dotless j: Accents. (line 56)
+* dotless j, math: Math accents. (line 35)
+* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 16)
+* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 20)
+* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 22)
+* emphasis: Font styles. (line 26)
+* enclosure list: \encl. (line 6)
+* ending & starting: Starting & ending. (line 6)
+* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
+* environments: Environments. (line 6)
+* environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
+* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 20)
+* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* equations, environment for: equation. (line 6)
+* es-zet German letter: Non-English characters.
+ (line 30)
+* exponent: Subscripts & Superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
+* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 22)
+* figures, inserting: figure. (line 6)
+* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 108)
+* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 6)
+* font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 6)
+* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 6)
+* font styles: Font styles. (line 6)
+* fonts: Typefaces. (line 6)
+* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 6)
+* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
+* footnote parameters: Footnote parameters. (line 6)
+* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 22)
+* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6)
+* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 6)
+* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* fragile commands: \protect. (line 6)
+* functions, math: Math functions. (line 6)
+* global options: Document class options.
+ (line 6)
+* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 6)
+* grave accent: Accents. (line 29)
+* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 26)
+* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* ha'c<ek accent, math: Math accents. (line 17)
+* hacek accent: Accents. (line 65)
+* hat accent: Accents. (line 26)
+* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 29)
+* header style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* header, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 49)
+* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6)
+* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
+* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox. (line 6)
+* in-line formulas: math. (line 6)
+* indent, forcing: \indent. (line 6)
+* indent, suppressing: \noindent. (line 6)
+* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 18)
+* indexes: Indexes. (line 6)
+* input file: Splitting the input. (line 6)
+* input/Output: Terminal Input/Output.
+ (line 6)
+* inserting figures: figure. (line 6)
+* italic font: Font styles. (line 93)
+* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* Knuth, Donald E.: Top. (line 11)
+* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 6)
+* Lamport, Leslie: Top. (line 11)
+* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 19)
+* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 6)
+* LaTeX Project team: Top. (line 11)
+* layout commands: Layout. (line 6)
+* layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* left quote: Text symbols. (line 26)
+* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
+* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 6)
+* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 6)
+* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 6)
+* lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 6)
+* lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
+* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 6)
+* letters: Letters. (line 6)
+* letters, accented: Accents. (line 6)
+* letters, ending: \closing. (line 6)
+* letters, non-English: Non-English characters.
+ (line 6)
+* letters, starting: \opening. (line 6)
+* line break, forcing: \\. (line 6)
+* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 6)
+* line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* lines in tables: tabular. (line 6)
+* lining text up in columns using tab stops: tabbing. (line 6)
+* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 6)
+* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 6)
+* lists of items: itemize. (line 6)
+* lists of items, generic: list. (line 6)
+* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 6)
+* loading additional packages: Document class options.
+ (line 74)
+* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 19)
+* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 41)
+* low-level font commands: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 6)
+* lR mode: Modes. (line 6)
+* macron accent: Accents. (line 23)
+* makeindex program: Indexes. (line 18)
+* making a title page: titlepage. (line 6)
+* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
+* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 6)
+* math accents: Math accents. (line 6)
+* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* math functions: Math functions. (line 6)
+* math Miscellany: Math Miscellany. (line 6)
+* math mode: Modes. (line 6)
+* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 6)
+* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 6)
+* modes: Modes. (line 6)
+* monospace font: Font styles. (line 108)
+* moving arguments: \protect. (line 6)
+* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 6)
+* multiplication symbol, discretionary line break: Math Miscellany.
+ (line 7)
+* nested \include, not allowed: \include. (line 18)
+* new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr.
+ (line 6)
+* new line, starting: \\. (line 6)
+* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6)
+* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6)
+* non-English characters: Non-English characters.
+ (line 6)
+* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6)
+* null delimiter: Math Miscellany. (line 21)
+* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 6)
+* oblique font: Font styles. (line 105)
+* oe ligature: Non-English characters.
+ (line 27)
+* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 6)
+* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 26)
+* options, document class: Document class options.
+ (line 6)
+* options, global: Document class options.
+ (line 81)
+* oslash: Non-English characters.
+ (line 23)
+* overbar accent: Accents. (line 23)
+* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 23)
+* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6)
+* packages, loading: Document class options.
+ (line 74)
+* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 6)
+* page layout parameters: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 6)
+* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
+* page styles: Page Styles. (line 6)
+* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 18)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation. (line 6)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quote. (line 6)
+* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 6)
+* paragraph sign: Text symbols. (line 29)
+* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
+* parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* pictures, creating: picture. (line 6)
+* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 29)
+* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6)
+* polish l: Non-English characters.
+ (line 19)
+* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 6)
+* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 32)
+* preamble, defined: Starting & ending. (line 17)
+* predefined lengths: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
+* prompt, *: Command Line. (line 15)
+* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation.
+ (line 6)
+* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quote.
+ (line 6)
+* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 6)
+* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
+* redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6)
+* reserved characters: Reserved characters. (line 6)
+* right quote: Text symbols. (line 35)
+* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 6)
+* robust commands: \protect. (line 16)
+* roman font: Font styles. (line 96)
+* running header and footer: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 102)
+* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 87)
+* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
+* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 38)
+* sectioning: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* setspace package: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 63)
+* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* sharp S letters: Non-English characters.
+ (line 30)
+* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6)
+* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 6)
+* slanted font: Font styles. (line 105)
+* small caps font: Font styles. (line 99)
+* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* spaces: Spaces. (line 6)
+* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 6)
+* special characters: Non-English characters.
+ (line 6)
+* splitting the input file: Splitting the input. (line 6)
+* starting & ending: Starting & ending. (line 6)
+* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6)
+* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage. (line 6)
+* starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
+* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 32)
+* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
+* styles of text: Font styles. (line 6)
+* styles, page: Page Styles. (line 6)
+* subscript: Subscripts & Superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* superscript: Subscripts & Superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 6)
+* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
+* table of contents, creating: Tables of contents. (line 6)
+* tables, creating: table. (line 6)
+* terminal Input/Output: Terminal Input/Output.
+ (line 6)
+* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 41)
+* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 6)
+* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 22)
+* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6)
+* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 59)
+* tilde accent: Accents. (line 34)
+* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 38)
+* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6)
+* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 26)
+* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 6)
+* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 6)
+* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6)
+* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 6)
+* typeface styles: Font styles. (line 6)
+* typefaces: Typefaces. (line 6)
+* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 108)
+* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 18)
+* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 12)
+* unordered lists: itemize. (line 6)
+* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 6)
+* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 41)
+* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 6)
+* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 6)
+* vertical space: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* vertical space before paragraphs: \parskip. (line 6)
+* visible space: \verb. (line 17)
+* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 44)
+* wide tile accent, math: Math accents. (line 47)
+* xindy program: Indexes. (line 18)
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Command Index, Next: Concept Index, Prev: Document templates, Up: Top
+
+Command Index
+*************
+
+
+* Menu:
+
+* $: Math formulas. (line 26)
+* 10pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 14)
+* 11pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 14)
+* 12pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 14)
+* @{...}: array. (line 31)
+* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 12)
+* \#: Reserved characters. (line 11)
+* \$: Reserved characters. (line 11)
+* \%: Reserved characters. (line 11)
+* \&: Reserved characters. (line 11)
+* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 15)
+* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 45)
+* \(: Math formulas. (line 18)
+* \): Math formulas. (line 18)
+* \*: Math Miscellany. (line 6)
+* \+: tabbing. (line 37)
+* \,: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 19)
+* \-: tabbing. (line 41)
+* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
+* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 20)
+* \/: \/. (line 6)
+* \:: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 16)
+* \;: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 12)
+* \<: tabbing. (line 33)
+* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 23)
+* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 27)
+* \> <1>: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 16)
+* \>: tabbing. (line 31)
+* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 30)
+* \@: \AT. (line 6)
+* \[: Math formulas. (line 18)
+* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 22)
+* \\ (for array): array. (line 28)
+* \\ (for center): center. (line 13)
+* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 12)
+* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 12)
+* \\ for \author: \maketitle. (line 12)
+* \\ for \title: \maketitle. (line 26)
+* \\ for flushleft: flushleft. (line 12)
+* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 32)
+* \\ for tabular: tabular. (line 23)
+* \\ for verse: verse. (line 17)
+* \\ force line break: \\. (line 6)
+* \\ tabbing: tabbing. (line 24)
+* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 17)
+* \]: Math formulas. (line 18)
+* \^: Reserved characters. (line 21)
+* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 26)
+* \_: Reserved characters. (line 11)
+* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 29)
+* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 51)
+* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 60)
+* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61)
+* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61)
+* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61)
+* \AA (AA): Non-English characters.
+ (line 11)
+* \aa (aa): Non-English characters.
+ (line 11)
+* \acute: Math accents. (line 10)
+* \addcontentsline{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT}: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
+* \address: \address. (line 6)
+* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 6)
+* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 6)
+* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 6)
+* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* \AE (AE): Non-English characters.
+ (line 15)
+* \ae (ae): Non-English characters.
+ (line 15)
+* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 14)
+* \Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 12)
+* \alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 9)
+* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 42)
+* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 17)
+* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 20)
+* \and for \author: \maketitle. (line 12)
+* \angle: Math symbols. (line 23)
+* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 44)
+* \approx: Math symbols. (line 26)
+* \arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 15)
+* \arccos: Math functions. (line 9)
+* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 12)
+* \arctan: Math functions. (line 15)
+* \arg: Math functions. (line 18)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 43)
+* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 90)
+* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 94)
+* \ast: Math symbols. (line 29)
+* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 32)
+* \author{NAME \and NAME2}: \maketitle. (line 11)
+* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 37)
+* \backslash <1>: Reserved characters. (line 16)
+* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 35)
+* \bar (macron, bar-over accent): Accents. (line 40)
+* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 57)
+* \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 63)
+* \begin: Environments. (line 6)
+* \beta: Math symbols. (line 38)
+* \bf: Font styles. (line 83)
+* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 32)
+* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6)
+* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
+* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 41)
+* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 44)
+* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 47)
+* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 50)
+* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 53)
+* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 56)
+* \bigskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 9)
+* \bigskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 9)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 65)
+* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 59)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 62)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 68)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 74)
+* \bmod: Math functions. (line 21)
+* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 31)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 77)
+* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 40)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 80)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 83)
+* \breve: Math accents. (line 13)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 86)
+* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 43)
+* \cal: Font styles. (line 86)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 89)
+* \caption: figure. (line 36)
+* \cc: \cc. (line 6)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 92)
+* \cdots: Math Miscellany. (line 10)
+* \centering: \centering. (line 6)
+* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 10)
+* \check: Math accents. (line 16)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 95)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 98)
+* \circle: \circle. (line 6)
+* \cite: \cite. (line 6)
+* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
+* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 6)
+* \cline: \cline. (line 6)
+* \closing: \closing. (line 6)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 101)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 16)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 19)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 23)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 104)
+* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 31)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 107)
+* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 9)
+* \cos: Math functions. (line 24)
+* \cosh: Math functions. (line 27)
+* \cot: Math functions. (line 30)
+* \coth: Math functions. (line 33)
+* \csc: Math functions. (line 36)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 110)
+* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 46)
+* \dag: Text symbols. (line 12)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 113)
+* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 116)
+* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 17)
+* \day: \day \month \year. (line 6)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 35)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 39)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 44)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 30)
+* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 15)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 119)
+* \ddot: Math accents. (line 19)
+* \ddots: Math Miscellany. (line 14)
+* \deg: Math functions. (line 39)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 125)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 122)
+* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 10)
+* \det: Math functions. (line 42)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 131)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 128)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 134)
+* \dim: Math functions. (line 45)
+* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 36)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 137)
+* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 6)
+* \dot: Math accents. (line 22)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 140)
+* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 6)
+* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 98)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 146)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 143)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 149)
+* \em: Font styles. (line 89)
+* \emph: Font styles. (line 26)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 152)
+* \encl: \encl. (line 6)
+* \end: Environments. (line 6)
+* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
+* \enumi: enumerate. (line 32)
+* \enumii: enumerate. (line 32)
+* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 32)
+* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 32)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 155)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 158)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 161)
+* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
+ (line 55)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 164)
+* \exp: Math functions. (line 48)
+* \fbox: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6)
+* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 16)
+* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture). (line 14)
+* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 16)
+* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). (line 14)
+* \fill: \hfill. (line 9)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 167)
+* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 43)
+* \floatsep: figure. (line 47)
+* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 6)
+* \fnsymbol: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 24)
+* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 11)
+* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 14)
+* \fontseries: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 25)
+* \fontshape: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 40)
+* \fontsize: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 57)
+* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6)
+* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6)
+* \footnoterule: Footnote parameters. (line 6)
+* \footnotesep: Footnote parameters. (line 12)
+* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6)
+* \footskip: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 16)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 170)
+* \frac: Math Miscellany. (line 18)
+* \frac{num}{den}: Math Miscellany. (line 17)
+* \frame: \frame. (line 6)
+* \framebox <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6)
+* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 173)
+* \fussy: \fussy. (line 6)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 179)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 176)
+* \gcd: Math functions. (line 51)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 182)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 185)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 188)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 191)
+* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 8)
+* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 11)
+* \grave: Math accents. (line 25)
+* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 49)
+* \hat: Math accents. (line 28)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 194)
+* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* \headsep: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 11)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 197)
+* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 8)
+* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6)
+* \hline: \hline. (line 6)
+* \hom: Math functions. (line 54)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 200)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 203)
+* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 6)
+* \hspace: \hspace. (line 6)
+* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \huge: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6)
+* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 53)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 206)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 209)
+* \imath: Math accents. (line 31)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 212)
+* \include: \include. (line 6)
+* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 6)
+* \indent: \indent. (line 6)
+* \index: Indexes. (line 8)
+* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 11)
+* \inf: Math functions. (line 57)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 215)
+* \input: \input. (line 6)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 218)
+* \intextsep: figure. (line 51)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 221)
+* \it: Font styles. (line 92)
+* \item <1>: itemize. (line 6)
+* \item <2>: enumerate. (line 19)
+* \item: description. (line 14)
+* \itemindent: itemize. (line 52)
+* \itemsep: itemize. (line 75)
+* \itshape: Font styles. (line 23)
+* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 56)
+* \jmath: Math accents. (line 34)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 224)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 227)
+* \ker: Math functions. (line 60)
+* \kill: tabbing. (line 65)
+* \L (/L): Non-English characters.
+ (line 19)
+* \l (/l): Non-English characters.
+ (line 19)
+* \label: \label. (line 6)
+* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 36)
+* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 36)
+* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 36)
+* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 36)
+* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 32)
+* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 32)
+* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 32)
+* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 32)
+* \labelsep: itemize. (line 55)
+* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 58)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 233)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 230)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 236)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 239)
+* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \Large: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \large: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 18)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 242)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 245)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 248)
+* \ldots: Text symbols. (line 21)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 251)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 254)
+* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math Miscellany. (line 20)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 259)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 256)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 25)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 262)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 265)
+* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 39)
+* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 39)
+* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 39)
+* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 39)
+* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 39)
+* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 39)
+* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 39)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 271)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 268)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 274)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 277)
+* \lg: Math functions. (line 63)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 280)
+* \lim: Math functions. (line 66)
+* \liminf: Math functions. (line 69)
+* \limsup: Math functions. (line 72)
+* \line: \line. (line 6)
+* \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 6)
+* \linewidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 21)
+* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 16)
+* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 16)
+* \listparindent: itemize. (line 61)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 283)
+* \ln: Math functions. (line 75)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 286)
+* \location: \location. (line 6)
+* \log: Math functions. (line 78)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 289)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 292)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 295)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 298)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 301)
+* \lq: Text symbols. (line 25)
+* \makebox: \makebox. (line 6)
+* \makebox (picture): \makebox (picture). (line 6)
+* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 6)
+* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 6)
+* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6)
+* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 304)
+* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 6)
+* \marginparpush: Marginal notes. (line 35)
+* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 39)
+* \marginparwidth: Marginal notes. (line 43)
+* \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 30)
+* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 37)
+* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 56)
+* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 72)
+* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 69)
+* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 53)
+* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 59)
+* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 62)
+* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 74)
+* \max: Math functions. (line 81)
+* \mbox: \mbox. (line 6)
+* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 29)
+* \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 13)
+* \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 13)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 307)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 309)
+* \min: Math functions. (line 84)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 312)
+* \month: \day \month \year. (line 6)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 315)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 318)
+* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6)
+* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 321)
+* \name: \name. (line 6)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 324)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 327)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 330)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 333)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 336)
+* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
+* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6)
+* \newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6)
+* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6)
+* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 6)
+* \newline: \newline. (line 6)
+* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6)
+* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6)
+* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 339)
+* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6)
+* \nofiles: Tables of contents. (line 20)
+* \noindent: \noindent. (line 6)
+* \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 20)
+* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 50)
+* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 23)
+* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 342)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 345)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 348)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 351)
+* \O (/O): Non-English characters.
+ (line 23)
+* \o (/o): Non-English characters.
+ (line 23)
+* \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
+ (line 6)
+* \oddsidemargin: Document class options.
+ (line 55)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 354)
+* \OE (OE): Non-English characters.
+ (line 27)
+* \oe (oe): Non-English characters.
+ (line 27)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 357)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 363)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 360)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 366)
+* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6)
+* \opening: \opening. (line 6)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 369)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 372)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 375)
+* \oval: \oval. (line 6)
+* \overbrace{TEXT}: Math Miscellany. (line 25)
+* \overline{TEXT}: Math Miscellany. (line 29)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 378)
+* \P: Text symbols. (line 28)
+* \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
+ (line 6)
+* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
+* \pageref: \pageref. (line 6)
+* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 19)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 381)
+* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6)
+* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 6)
+* \parindent: minipage. (line 18)
+* \parsep: itemize. (line 80)
+* \parskip: \parskip. (line 6)
+* \parskip example: itemize. (line 103)
+* \part: Sectioning. (line 8)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 384)
+* \partopsep: itemize. (line 90)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 387)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 390)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 396)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 393)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 399)
+* \pmod: Math functions. (line 87)
+* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 71)
+* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 31)
+* \Pr: Math functions. (line 90)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 402)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 405)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 408)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 411)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 414)
+* \protect: \protect. (line 6)
+* \ps: \ps. (line 6)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 420)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 417)
+* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 74)
+* \put: \put. (line 6)
+* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
+* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6)
+* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6)
+* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 423)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 426)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 429)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 432)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 435)
+* \ref: \ref. (line 6)
+* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6)
+* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 6)
+* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
+ (line 6)
+* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 23)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 438)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 441)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 444)
+* \right: Math Miscellany. (line 21)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 450)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 447)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 453)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 456)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 459)
+* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 65)
+* \rm: Font styles. (line 95)
+* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 20)
+* \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 18)
+* \rq: Text symbols. (line 34)
+* \rule: \rule. (line 6)
+* \S: Text symbols. (line 37)
+* \savebox: \savebox. (line 6)
+* \sbox: \sbox. (line 6)
+* \sc: Font styles. (line 98)
+* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \scshape: Font styles. (line 44)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 462)
+* \sec: Math functions. (line 93)
+* \section: Sectioning. (line 13)
+* \selectfont: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 71)
+* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 465)
+* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6)
+* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6)
+* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6)
+* \sf: Font styles. (line 101)
+* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 41)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 468)
+* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 474)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 471)
+* \signature: \signature. (line 6)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 477)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 480)
+* \sin: Math functions. (line 96)
+* \sinh: Math functions. (line 99)
+* \sl: Font styles. (line 104)
+* \slshape: Font styles. (line 38)
+* \small: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 483)
+* \smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 17)
+* \smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
+ (line 17)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 486)
+* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 6)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 489)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 492)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 495)
+* \sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: Math Miscellany. (line 32)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 498)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 501)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 504)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 507)
+* \ss (ss): Non-English characters.
+ (line 30)
+* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math Miscellany. (line 38)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 510)
+* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 6)
+* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6)
+* \stop: Command Line. (line 15)
+* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 6)
+* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 21)
+* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 15)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 513)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 516)
+* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 17)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 519)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 522)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 525)
+* \sup: Math functions. (line 102)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 528)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 531)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 534)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 537)
+* \symbol: Reserved characters. (line 25)
+* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 59)
+* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 6)
+* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 79)
+* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 102)
+* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 6)
+* \tan: Math functions. (line 105)
+* \tanh: Math functions. (line 108)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 540)
+* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6)
+* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 40)
+* \textbf: Font styles. (line 32)
+* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 56)
+* \textfraction: figure. (line 60)
+* \textheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 27)
+* \textit: Font styles. (line 23)
+* \textmd: Font styles. (line 29)
+* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 50)
+* \textrm: Font styles. (line 20)
+* \textsc: Font styles. (line 44)
+* \textsf: Font styles. (line 41)
+* \textsl: Font styles. (line 38)
+* \texttt: Font styles. (line 47)
+* \textup: Font styles. (line 35)
+* \textwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 34)
+* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 21)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 543)
+* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 6)
+* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 6)
+* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 6)
+* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
+* \tilde: Math accents. (line 37)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 546)
+* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 11)
+* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 25)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 549)
+* \today: \today. (line 6)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 552)
+* \topfraction: figure. (line 65)
+* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 40)
+* \topsep: itemize. (line 84)
+* \topskip: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 47)
+* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 12)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 555)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 558)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 561)
+* \tt: Font styles. (line 107)
+* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 47)
+* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6)
+* \typein: \typein. (line 6)
+* \typeout: \typeout. (line 6)
+* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 62)
+* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 31)
+* \underbrace{math}: Math Miscellany. (line 42)
+* \underline{text}: Math Miscellany. (line 45)
+* \unitlength: picture. (line 10)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 564)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 567)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 573)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 570)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 579)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 576)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 582)
+* \upshape: Font styles. (line 35)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 588)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 585)
+* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6)
+* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6)
+* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 75)
+* \usepackage: Document class options.
+ (line 74)
+* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 65)
+* \value: \value. (line 6)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 591)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 594)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 597)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 600)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 603)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 606)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 609)
+* \vdots: Math Miscellany. (line 49)
+* \vec: Math accents. (line 40)
+* \vector: \vector. (line 6)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 612)
+* \verb: \verb. (line 6)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 618)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 615)
+* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6)
+* \vline: \vline. (line 6)
+* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 621)
+* \widehat: Math accents. (line 43)
+* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 624)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 627)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 633)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 630)
+* \year: \day \month \year. (line 6)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 636)
+* \{: Reserved characters. (line 11)
+* \|: Math symbols. (line 11)
+* \}: Reserved characters. (line 11)
+* \~: Reserved characters. (line 21)
+* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 34)
+* ^: Subscripts & Superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* _: Subscripts & Superscripts.
+ (line 6)
+* a4paper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* a5paper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* abstract environment: abstract. (line 6)
+* array environment: array. (line 6)
+* article class: Document classes. (line 13)
+* b5paper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* book class: Document classes. (line 13)
+* center environment: center. (line 6)
+* description environment: description. (line 6)
+* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 6)
+* document environment: document. (line 6)
+* draft option: Document class options.
+ (line 24)
+* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 6)
+* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 6)
+* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* equation environment: equation. (line 6)
+* executivepaper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* figure: figure. (line 6)
+* final option: Document class options.
+ (line 24)
+* fleqn option: Document class options.
+ (line 24)
+* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 6)
+* flushright environment: flushright. (line 6)
+* itemize environment: itemize. (line 6)
+* landscape option: Document class options.
+ (line 24)
+* legalpaper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* leqno option: Document class options.
+ (line 24)
+* letter: letter. (line 6)
+* letter class: Document classes. (line 13)
+* letterpaper option: Document class options.
+ (line 19)
+* list: list. (line 6)
+* lR box: picture. (line 62)
+* lrbox: lrbox. (line 6)
+* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
+* math environment: math. (line 6)
+* minipage environment: minipage. (line 6)
+* notitlepage option: Document class options.
+ (line 24)
+* onecolumn option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* oneside option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* openany option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* openbib option: Document class options.
+ (line 24)
+* openright option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* picture: picture. (line 6)
+* quotation: quotation. (line 6)
+* quote: quote. (line 6)
+* report class: Document classes. (line 13)
+* slides class: Document classes. (line 13)
+* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 6)
+* table: table. (line 6)
+* tabular environment: tabular. (line 6)
+* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6)
+* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6)
+* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 6)
+* titlepage option: Document class options.
+ (line 24)
+* twocolumn option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* twoside option: Document class options.
+ (line 49)
+* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6)
+* verse environment: verse. (line 6)
+
+
+
+Tag Table:
+Node: Top1693
+Node: Overview3875
+Node: Starting & ending5743
+Node: Document classes6305
+Node: Document class options6881
+Node: Typefaces9473
+Node: Font styles9915
+Node: Font sizes12241
+Node: Low-level font commands13476
+Node: Layout15704
+Node: \onecolumn16173
+Node: \twocolumn16386
+Node: \flushbottom17891
+Node: \raggedbottom18253
+Node: Page layout parameters18539
+Node: Sectioning20630
+Node: Cross references21954
+Node: \label22385
+Node: \pageref23250
+Node: \ref23549
+Node: Environments23939
+Node: abstract25394
+Node: array25635
+Node: center26966
+Node: \centering27443
+Node: description28283
+Node: displaymath29097
+Node: document29664
+Node: enumerate29921
+Node: eqnarray31213
+Node: equation32223
+Node: figure32596
+Node: flushleft34802
+Node: \raggedright35287
+Node: flushright35846
+Node: \raggedleft36334
+Node: itemize36891
+Node: letter40693
+Node: list40931
+Node: math41755
+Node: minipage42057
+Node: picture43275
+Node: \circle47268
+Node: \makebox (picture)47601
+Node: \framebox (picture)48300
+Node: \dashbox48790
+Node: \frame49317
+Node: \line49643
+Node: \linethickness50112
+Node: \thicklines50533
+Node: \thinlines50843
+Node: \multiput51145
+Node: \oval51511
+Node: \put52128
+Node: \shortstack52376
+Node: \vector52852
+Node: quotation53158
+Node: quote53614
+Node: tabbing54046
+Node: table57209
+Node: tabular58287
+Node: \multicolumn62221
+Node: \cline63019
+Node: \hline63339
+Node: \vline63653
+Node: thebibliography63966
+Node: \bibitem65106
+Node: \cite65837
+Node: \nocite66337
+Node: Using BibTeX66621
+Node: theorem68113
+Node: titlepage68499
+Node: verbatim69100
+Node: \verb69727
+Node: verse70277
+Node: Footnotes70771
+Node: \footnote71315
+Node: \footnotemark71831
+Node: \footnotetext72398
+Node: Footnote parameters72882
+Node: Definitions73611
+Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand74326
+Node: \newcounter75541
+Node: \newlength76009
+Node: \newsavebox76521
+Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment76828
+Node: \newtheorem78095
+Node: \newfont79061
+Node: \protect79541
+Node: Counters80405
+Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol81646
+Node: \usecounter82691
+Node: \value83053
+Node: \setcounter83438
+Node: \addtocounter83729
+Node: \refstepcounter84025
+Node: \stepcounter84370
+Node: \day \month \year84621
+Node: Lengths85166
+Node: \setlength85735
+Node: \addtolength86077
+Node: \settodepth86372
+Node: \settoheight86647
+Node: \settowidth86926
+Node: Predefined lengths87190
+Node: Line breaking87704
+Node: \\88762
+Node: \obeycr & \restorecr89232
+Node: \newline89636
+Node: \- (hyphenation)89926
+Node: \fussy90536
+Node: \sloppy90934
+Node: \hyphenation91261
+Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak91887
+Node: Page breaking92556
+Node: \cleardoublepage93164
+Node: \clearpage93571
+Node: \newpage93847
+Node: \enlargethispage94082
+Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak94607
+Node: Making paragraphs95300
+Node: \indent95872
+Node: \noindent96344
+Node: \parskip96630
+Node: Marginal notes96888
+Node: Math formulas98407
+Node: Subscripts & Superscripts100191
+Node: Math symbols100658
+Node: Math functions107472
+Node: Math accents108416
+Node: Spacing in math mode109281
+Node: Math Miscellany109913
+Node: Modes111335
+Node: Page Styles113168
+Node: \maketitle113662
+Node: \pagenumbering114734
+Node: \pagestyle115151
+Node: \thispagestyle116293
+Node: Spaces116599
+Node: \hspace117659
+Node: \hfill118219
+Node: \SPACE118615
+Node: \AT119082
+Node: \thinspace119543
+Node: \/119802
+Node: \hrulefill120634
+Node: \dotfill120900
+Node: \addvspace121124
+Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip121616
+Node: \vfill122295
+Node: \vspace122600
+Node: Boxes123030
+Node: \mbox123749
+Node: \fbox and \framebox124036
+Node: lrbox124836
+Node: \makebox125153
+Node: \parbox125869
+Node: \raisebox127202
+Node: \savebox127799
+Node: \sbox128214
+Node: \usebox128663
+Node: Special insertions128921
+Node: Reserved characters129565
+Node: Text symbols130967
+Node: Accents131686
+Node: Non-English characters133321
+Node: \rule133751
+Node: \today134178
+Node: Splitting the input134623
+Node: \include135264
+Node: \includeonly135851
+Node: \input136342
+Node: Front/back matter136833
+Node: Tables of contents137038
+Node: \addcontentsline138066
+Node: \addtocontents138948
+Node: Glossaries139448
+Node: Indexes139967
+Node: Letters140668
+Node: \address142608
+Node: \cc143213
+Node: \closing143449
+Node: \encl143682
+Node: \location143874
+Node: \makelabels144136
+Node: \name144424
+Node: \opening144646
+Node: \ps144971
+Node: \signature145154
+Node: \startbreaks145437
+Node: \stopbreaks145659
+Node: \telephone145874
+Node: Terminal Input/Output146106
+Node: \typein146371
+Node: \typeout146952
+Node: Command Line147575
+Node: Document templates148270
+Node: book template148585
+Node: beamer template148928
+Node: tugboat template149466
+Node: Concept Index151691
+Node: Command Index179292
+
+End Tag Table
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.html b/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.html
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b69c317200..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6090 +0,0 @@
-<html lang="en">
-<head>
-<title>Untitled</title>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html">
-<meta name="description" content="Untitled">
-<meta name="generator" content="makeinfo 4.7">
-<link title="Top" rel="top" href="#Top">
-<link href="http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/" rel="generator-home" title="Texinfo Homepage">
-<!--
-This file documents LaTeX2e, a document preparation system. LaTeX2e is a
-macro package for TeX.
-
-This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation, and is for the Texinfo
-that is distributed as part of Version 19 of GNU Emacs. It uses version
-2.134 or later of the texinfo.tex input file.
-
-This is translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The
-pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam
-Houston State University.
-
-The LaTeX 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore <stg@dcs.ed.ac.uk>.
-
-The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen
-<bullestock@dk-online.dk>.
-
-Copyright 1988,1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-Copyright 1994-1996 Torsten Martinsen.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
-resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
-notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
-into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
-except that the sections entitled ``Distribution'' and ``General Public
-License'' may be included in a translation approved by the author instead
-of in the original English.-->
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css">
-<style type="text/css"><!--
- pre.display { font-family:inherit }
- pre.format { font-family:inherit }
- pre.smalldisplay { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller }
- pre.smallformat { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller }
- pre.smallexample { font-size:smaller }
- pre.smalllisp { font-size:smaller }
- span.sc { font-variant:small-caps }
- span.roman { font-family: serif; font-weight: normal; }
---></style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Top"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Overview">Overview</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#dir">(dir)</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#dir">(dir)</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
- <p>LaTeX2e is a document preparation system implemented as a macro package
-for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program.
-
- <p>LaTeX was originally conceived by Leslie Lamport.
-
- <p>This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Overview">Overview</a>: What is LaTeX?
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Commands">Commands</a>: Commands within a LaTeX document.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>: The command line.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>: An alphabetical list of LaTeX commands.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>: An alphabetical list of concepts.
-
- </ul>
-
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- ************** OVERVIEW **************** -->
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Overview"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Commands">Commands</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Top">Top</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="chapter">1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</h2>
-
-<p><a name="index-Overview-of-LaTeX-1"></a><a name="index-LaTeX-overview-2"></a>
-The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the
-LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it processes an input
-file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that
-describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least three
-files as output:
-
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li>A &ldquo;Device Independent&rdquo;, or <span class="file">.dvi</span> file. This contains commands that
-can be translated into commands for a variety of output devices. You
-can view the output of LaTeX by using a program such as <code>xdvi</code>,
-which actually uses the <span class="file">.dvi</span> file.
-<li>A &ldquo;transcript&rdquo; or <span class="file">.log</span> file that contains summary information and
-diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file.
-<li>An &ldquo;auxiliary&rdquo; or <span class="file">.aux</span> file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for
-things such as sectioning.
- </ol>
-
- <p>For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should consult
-<cite>The TeXbook</cite> by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published
-jointly by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley
-Publishing Company.
-
- <p>For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:
-
- <p><cite>LaTeX: A Document Preparation System</cite>, by Leslie Lamport,
-Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994.
-
- <p><cite>The LaTeX Companion</cite>, by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and
-Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994.
-
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- ************** COMMANDS **************** -->
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Commands"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Overview">Overview</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="chapter">2 Commands</h2>
-
-<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a
-<code>\</code> followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single
-non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, <code>[]</code>, are
-optional while arguments contained in braces, <code>{}</code>, are required.
-
- <p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case
-unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Counters">Counters</a>: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>: Automatic referencing.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>: Define your own commands etc.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>: Some of the various classes available.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#Environments">Environments</a>: Such as enumerate &amp; itemize.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>: How to produce footnotes.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#Layout">Layout</a>: Controlling the page layout.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>: The length commands.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#Letters">Letters</a>: The letter class.
-<li><a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>: How to insert pagebreaks etc.
-<li><a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>: Paragraph commands.
-<li><a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>: Putting remarks in the margin.
-<li><a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>: How to create mathematical formulae.
-<li><a href="#Modes">Modes</a>: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
-<li><a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>: Various styles of page layout.
-<li><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>: How to section properly.
-<li><a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>: All the associated commands.
-<li><a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>: Special reserved characters.
-<li><a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>: Dealing with big files by splitting.
-<li><a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a>: The formal start &amp; end layouts.
-<li><a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>: How to create a table of contents.
-<li><a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>: User interaction.
-<li><a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>: Such as bold, italics etc.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************************************** -->
-<!-- **** Command's LEVEL2 Starts Here. **** -->
-<!-- *************************************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ******* Counters ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Counters"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Commands">Commands</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.1 Counters</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Counters_002c-a-list-of-3"></a><a name="index-Variables_002c-a-list-of-4"></a>
-Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
-name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or
-command that produces the number, except with no <code>\</code>. (enumi -
-enumiv are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list
-of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control
-numbering.
-
-<pre class="example"> part paragraph figure enumi
- chapter subparagraph table enumii
- section page footnote enumiii
- subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
- subsubsection
-</pre>
- <ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a>: Add a quantity to a counter.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>: Print value of a counter using letters.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>: Print value of a counter using numerals.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>: Print value of a counter using symbols.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>: Define a new counter.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>: Print value of a counter using roman numerals.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>: Set the value of a counter.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-<li><a href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
-<li><a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a>: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- ** \addtocounter ** -->
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddtocounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Counters">Counters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.1 \addtocounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddtocounter-5"></a>
-<code>\addtocounter{counter}{value}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addtocounter</code> command increments the <code>counter</code> by the
-amount specified by the <code>value</code> argument. The <code>value</code>
-argument can be negative.
-
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- ** \alph *** -->
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005calph"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.2 \alph</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005calph-6"></a><a name="index-_005cAlph-7"></a>
-<code>\alph{counter}</code>
-
- <p>This command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be printed in
-alphabetic characters. The <code>\alph</code> command uses lower case
-alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., <code>a, b, c...</code> while the
-<code>\Alph</code> command uses upper case alphabetic characters, i.e.,
-<code>A, B, C...</code>.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** \arabic *** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005carabic"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.3 \arabic</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005carabic-8"></a>
-<code>\arabic{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\arabic</code> command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be
-printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., <code>3</code>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \fnsymbol ** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfnsymbol"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.4 \fnsymbol</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfnsymbol-9"></a>
-<code>\fnsymbol{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\fnsymbol</code> command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to
-be printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for
-numbering footnotes.
-
- <p>NB. <code>counter</code> must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \newcounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewcounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.5 \newcounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewcounter-10"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-creating-11"></a>
-<code>\newcounter{foo}[counter]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\newcounter</code> command defines a new counter named <code>foo</code>.
-The counter is initialized to zero.
-
- <p>The optional argument <code>[counter]</code> causes the counter <code>foo</code> to
-be reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is
-incremented.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \refstepcounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005crefstepcounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.6 \refstepcounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005crefstepcounter-12"></a>
-<code>\refstepcounter{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\refstepcounter</code> command works like <code>\stepcounter</code>
-See <a href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>, except it also defines the current <code>\ref</code>
-value to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>.
-
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- ** \roman ** -->
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005croman"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.7 \roman</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005croman-13"></a><a name="index-_005cRoman-14"></a>
-<code>\roman{counter}</code>
-
- <p>This command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be printed in
-Roman numerals. The <code>\roman</code> command uses lower case Roman
-numerals, i.e., <code>i, ii, iii...</code>, while the <code>\Roman</code> command
-uses upper case Roman numerals, i.e., <code>I, II, III...</code>.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \stepcounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cstepcounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.8 \stepcounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cstepcounter-15"></a>
-<code>\stepcounter{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\stepcounter</code> command adds one to the <code>counter</code> and
-resets all subsidiary counters.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \setcounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csetcounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.9 \setcounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csetcounter-16"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-setting-17"></a>
-<code>\setcounter{counter}{value}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\setcounter</code> command sets the value of the <code>counter</code> to
-that specified by the <code>value</code> argument.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \usecounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cusecounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvalue">\value</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.10 \usecounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cusecounter-18"></a>
-<code>\usecounter{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\usecounter</code> command is used in the second argument of the
-<code>list</code> environment to allow the counter specified to be used to
-number the list items.
-
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- ** \value ** -->
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvalue"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.11 \value</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvalue-19"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-getting-the-value-of-20"></a>
-<code>\value{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\value</code> command produces the value of the <code>counter</code> named
-in the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an
-integer or number, such as the second argument of a <code>\setcounter</code>
-or <code>\addtocounter</code> command, or in:
-
-<pre class="example"> \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
-</pre>
- <p>It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Cross References *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Cross-References"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Counters">Counters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.2 Cross References</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Cross-referencing-21"></a>
-One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
-the reader to them, as in &ldquo;See Figure 3 for more details.&rdquo;
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005clabel">\label</a>: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>: Refer to a page number.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cref">\ref</a>: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \label ************* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005clabel"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.2.1 \label</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005clabel-22"></a>
-<code>\label{key}</code>
-
- <p>A <code>\label</code> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the
-<code>key</code> the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
-inside a numbered environment assigns that number to the <code>key</code>.
-
- <p>A <code>key</code> can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
-punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are different.
-
- <p>To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is
-common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
-colon. The prefixes conventionally used are
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>cha</code>
-for chapters
-<li><code>sec</code>
-for lower-level sectioning commands
-<li><code>fig</code>
-for figures
-<li><code>tab</code>
-for tables
-<li><code>eq</code>
-for equations
-</ul>
-
- <p>Thus, a label for a figure would look like <code>fig:bandersnatch</code>.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \pageref *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpageref"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cref">\ref</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clabel">\label</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.2.2 \pageref</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpageref-23"></a><a name="index-Cross-referencing-using-page-number-24"></a>
-<code>\pageref{key}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\pageref</code> command produces the page number of the place in the
-text where the corresponding <code>\label</code> command appears. ie. where
-<code>\label{key}</code> appears.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \ref *************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cref"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.2.3 \ref</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cref-25"></a><a name="index-Cross-referencing-using-section-number-26"></a>
-<code>\ref{key}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\ref</code> command produces the number of the sectional unit,
-equation number, ... of the corresponding <code>\label</code> command.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Definitions ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Definitions"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.3 Definitions</h3>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a>: Define a new command.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>: Define a new environment.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>: Define a new theorem-like environment.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a>: Define a new font name.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \newcommand ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewcommand"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.3.1 \newcommand</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewcommand-27"></a><a name="index-Commands_002c-defining-new-ones-28"></a><a name="index-Defining-a-new-command-29"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
- \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
- \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
- \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
-</pre>
- <p>These commands define (or redefine) a command.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>cmd</code><dd>A command name beginning with a <code>\</code>. For <code>\newcommand</code> it
-must not be already defined and must not begin with <code>\end</code>; for
-<code>\renewcommand</code> it must already be defined.
-
- <br><dt><code>args</code><dd>An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the command
-being defined. The default is for the command to have no arguments.
-
- <br><dt><code>def</code><dd>If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's first
-argument is optional. The default value of the optional argument is
-<code>def</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>definition</code><dd>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <code>cmd</code>; a
-parameter of the form <code>#n</code> in <code>cmd</code> is replaced by the text of
-the nth argument when this substitution takes place.
-
- </dl>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \newenvironment **** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewenvironment"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.3.2 \newenvironment</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewenvironment-30"></a><a name="index-Environments_002c-defining-31"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-environments-32"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
- \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
- \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
-</pre>
- <p>These commands define or redefine an environment.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>nam</code><dd>The name of the environment. For <code>\newenvironment</code> there must be
-no currently defined environment by that name, and the command
-<code>\nam</code> must be undefined. For <code>\renewenvironment</code> the
-environment must already be defined.
-
- <br><dt><code>args</code><dd>An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
-the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
-
- <br><dt><code>default</code><dd>If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and <code>default</code>
-gives the default value for that argument.
-
- <br><dt><code>begdef</code><dd>The text substituted for every occurrence of <code>\begin{nam}</code>; a
-parameter of the form <code>#n</code> in <code>cmd</code> is replaced by the text of
-the nth argument when this substitution takes place.
-
- <br><dt><code>enddef</code><dd>The text substituted for every occurrence of <code>\end{nam}</code>. It may
-not contain any argument parameters.
-
- </dl>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \newtheorem ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewtheorem"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.3.3 \newtheorem</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewtheorem-33"></a><a name="index-Theorems_002c-defining-34"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-theorems-35"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
- \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
-</pre>
- <p>This command defines a theorem-like environment.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>env_name</code><dd>The name of the environment to be defined. A string of letters. It must
-not be the name of an existing environment or counter.
-
- <br><dt><code>caption</code><dd>The text printed at the beginning of the environment, right before the
-number. This may simply say &ldquo;Theorem&rdquo;, for example.
-
- <br><dt><code>within</code><dd>The name of an already defined counter, usually of a sectional unit.
-Provides a means of resetting the new theorem counter <strong>within</strong>
-the sectional unit.
-
- <br><dt><code>numbered_like</code><dd>The name of an already defined theorem-like environment.
-
- </dl>
-
- <p>The <code>\newtheorem</code> command may have at most one optional argument.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \newfont *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewfont"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.3.4 \newfont</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewfont-36"></a><a name="index-Fonts_002c-new-commands-for-37"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-fonts-38"></a>
-<code>\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</code>
-
- <p>Defines the command name <code>cmd</code>, which must not be currently
-defined, to be a declaration that selects the font named
-<code>font_name</code> to be the current font.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Document Classes **** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Document-Classes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Environments">Environments</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.4 Document Classes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Document-Classes-39"></a><a name="index-Classes-of-document-40"></a><a name="index-article-class-41"></a><a name="index-report-class-42"></a><a name="index-book-class-43"></a><a name="index-letter-class-44"></a><a name="index-_005cdocumentclass-45"></a>
-Valid LaTeX document classes include:
-
- <ul>
-<li>article
-<li>report
-<li>letter
-<li>book
-<li>slides
-</ul>
-
- <p>Other document classes are often available. See <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>, for details.
-They are selected with the following command:
-
- <p><code>\documentclass [options] {class}</code>
-
- <p>All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following options
-for selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default):
-
- <p>10pt, 11pt, 12pt
-
- <p>All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size (default
-is letter):
-
- <p>a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper, legalpaper, executivepaper
-
- <p>Miscellaneous options:
-
- <ul>
-<li>landscape &mdash; selects landscape format. Default is portrait.
-<li>titlepage, notitlepage &mdash; selects if there should be a separate title
-page.
-<li>leqno &mdash; equation number on left side of equations. Default is right side.
-<li>fleqn &mdash; displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred.
-<li>openbib &mdash; use &ldquo;open&rdquo; bibliography format.
-<li>draft, final &mdash; mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule.
-Default is final.
-</ul>
-
- <p>These options are not available with the slides class:
-
- <ul>
-<li>oneside, twoside &mdash; selects one- or twosided layout. Default is
-oneside, except for the book class.
-<li>openright, openany &mdash; determines if a chapter should start on a
-right-hand page. Default is openright for book.
-<li>onecolumn, twocolumn &mdash; one or two columns. Defaults to one column.
-</ul>
-
- <p>The slides class offers the option <code>clock</code> for printing the time at
-the bottom of each note.
-
- <p>If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a comma.
-
- <p>Additional packages are loaded by a
-
- <p><code>\usepackage[options]{pkg}</code>
-<a name="index-_005cusepackage-46"></a>
-command. If you specify more than one package, they must be separated by
-a comma.
-<a name="index-Packages_002c-loading-47"></a><a name="index-Loading-additional-packages-48"></a>
-Any options given in the <code>\documentclass</code> command that are unknown
-by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
-<code>\usepackage</code>.
-<a name="index-Global-options-49"></a><a name="index-Options_002c-global-50"></a>
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Layout"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<p><a name="index-Layout-commands-51"></a>
-
-<h3 class="section">2.5 Layout</h3>
-
-<p>Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>: Make all text pages the same height.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>: Use one-column layout.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>: Allow text pages of differing height.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>: Use two-column layout.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \flushbottom ******* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cflushbottom"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.5.1 \flushbottom</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cflushbottom-52"></a>
-The <code>\flushbottom</code> declaration makes all text pages the same
-height, adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page.
-
- <p>This is the standard if twocolumn mode is selected.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \onecolumn ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005conecolumn"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.5.2 \onecolumn</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005conecolumn-53"></a>
-The <code>\onecolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces
-single-column output.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \raggedbottom ****** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005craggedbottom"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.5.3 \raggedbottom</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005craggedbottom-54"></a>
-The <code>\raggedbottom</code> declaration makes all pages the height of the
-text on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \twocolumn ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctwocolumn"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.5.4 \twocolumn</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctwocolumn-55"></a><a name="index-Multicolumn-text-56"></a>
-<code>\twocolumn[text]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\twocolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the optional <code>text</code> argument is present, it
-is typeset in one-column mode.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Environments ******* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Environments"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.6 Environments</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Environments-57"></a><a name="index-_005cbegin-58"></a><a name="index-_005cend-59"></a>
-LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments.
-Each environment begins and ends in the same manner.
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{environment-name}
- .
- .
- .
- \end{environment-name}
-</pre>
- <ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#array">array</a>: Math arrays.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#center">center</a>: Centred lines.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#description">description</a>: Labelled lists.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>: Numbered lists.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>: Sequences of aligned equations.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#equation">equation</a>: Displayed equation.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#figure">figure</a>: Floating figures.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>: Flushed left lines.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#flushright">flushright</a>: Flushed right lines.
-<li><a href="#itemize">itemize</a>: Bulleted lists.
-<li><a href="#letter">letter</a>: Letters.
-<li><a href="#list">list</a>: Generic list environment.
-<li><a href="#minipage">minipage</a>: Miniature page.
-<li><a href="#picture">picture</a>: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
-<li><a href="#quotation">quotation</a>: Indented environment with paragraph indentation.
-<li><a href="#quote">quote</a>: Indented environment with no paragraph indentation.
-<li><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>: Align text arbitrarily.
-<li><a href="#table">table</a>: Floating tables.
-<li><a href="#tabular">tabular</a>: Align text in columns.
-<li><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>: Bibliography or reference list.
-<li><a href="#theorem">theorem</a>: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
-<li><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>: For hand crafted title pages.
-<li><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>: Simulating typed input.
-<li><a href="#verse">verse</a>: For poetry and other things.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** array ************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="array"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#center">center</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Environments">Environments</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.1 array</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Arrays_002c-math-60"></a><a name="index-array-61"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
- column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{array}
-</pre>
- <p>Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has a single
-mandatory argument describing the number of columns and the alignment
-within them. Each column, <code>coln</code>, is specified by a single letter
-that tells how items in that row should be formatted.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>c</code> &mdash; for centred
-<li><code>l</code> &mdash; for flush left
-<li><code>r</code> &mdash; for flush right
-</ul>
-
- <p>Column entries must be separated by an <code>&amp;</code>. Column entries may
-include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be terminated
-with the string <code>\\</code>.
-
- <p>Note that the <code>array</code> environment can only be used in math mode, so
-normally it is used inside an <code>equation</code> environment.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** center ************* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="center"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#description">description</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#array">array</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.2 center</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-center-62"></a><a name="index-Centering-text_002c-environment-for-63"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{center}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{center}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>center</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of
-lines that are centred within the left and right margins on the current
-page. Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a>: The declaration form of the <code>center</code> environment.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \centering *** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccentering"></a>Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#center">center</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.2.1 \centering</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccentering-64"></a><a name="index-Centering-text-65"></a><a name="index-Formatting-Text-66"></a>
-This declaration corresponds to the <code>center</code> environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in
-a <code>parbox</code>. The text of a figure or table can be centred on the
-page by putting a <code>\centering</code> command at the beginning of the
-figure or table environment.
-
- <p>Unlike the <code>center</code> environment, the <code>\centering</code> command does
-not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
-units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an
-environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** description ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="description"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#center">center</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.3 description</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-description-67"></a><a name="index-Labelled-lists_002c-creating-68"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{description}
- \item [label] First item
- \item [label] Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{description}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>description</code> environment is used to make labelled lists. The
-<code>label</code> is bold face and flushed right.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** enumerate ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="enumerate"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#description">description</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.4 enumerate</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-enumerate-69"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items_002c-numbered-70"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{enumerate}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{enumerate}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>enumerate</code> environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations
-can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
-be nested within other paragraph-making environments.
-
- <p>Each item of an enumerated list begins with an <code>\item</code> command.
-There must be at least one <code>\item</code> command within the environment.
-
- <p>The <code>enumerate</code> environment uses the <code>enumi</code> through
-<code>enumiv</code> counters (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be
-changed by redefining <code>\theenumi</code> etc.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** eqnarray *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="eqnarray"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#equation">equation</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.5 eqnarray</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-eqnarray-71"></a><a name="index-Equations_002c-aligning-72"></a><a name="index-Aligning-Equations-73"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{eqnarray}
- math formula 1 \\
- math formula 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{eqnarray}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>eqnarray</code> environment is used to display a sequence of
-equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column
-<code>array</code> environment, with consecutive rows separated by <code>\\</code>
-and consecutive items within a row separated by an <code>&amp;</code>.
-
- <p>An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
-<code>\nonumber</code> command.
-
- <p><a name="index-_005clefteqn-74"></a>
-The command <code>\lefteqn</code> is used for splitting long formulas across
-lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
-zero width.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** equation *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="equation"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#figure">figure</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.6 equation</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-equation-75"></a><a name="index-Equations_002c-environment-for-76"></a><a name="index-Formulae_002c-environment-for-77"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{equation}
- math formula
- \end{equation}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>equation</code> environment centres your equation on the page and places
-the equation number in the right margin.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** figure ************* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="figure"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#equation">equation</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.7 figure</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-figure-78"></a><a name="index-Inserting-figures-79"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{figure}[placement]
-
- body of the figure
-
- \caption{figure title}
- \end{figure}
-</pre>
- <p><a name="index-_005ccaption-80"></a>Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-usually &ldquo;floated&rdquo; to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
-Figures will not be split between two pages.
-
- <p>The optional argument <code>[placement]</code> determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly
-put a float:
-
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li><code>h</code> (Here) - at the position in the text where the figure
-environment appears.
-<li><code>t</code> (Top) - at the top of a text page.
-<li><code>b</code> (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page.
-<li><code>p</code> (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which is a page
-containing no text, only floats.
- </ol>
-
- <p>The standard report and article classes use the default placement
-<code>tbp</code>.
-
- <p>The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc.
-you wish. The <code>\caption</code> command allows you to title your figure.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** flushleft ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="flushleft"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#flushright">flushright</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#figure">figure</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.8 flushleft</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-flushleft-81"></a><a name="index-Left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-82"></a><a name="index-Ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for-83"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{flushleft}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{flushleft}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>flushleft</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand margin.
-Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a>: The declaration form of the <code>flushleft</code> environment.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- * \raggedright ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005craggedright"></a>Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.8.1 \raggedright</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005craggedright-84"></a><a name="index-Ragged-right-text-85"></a><a name="index-Left_002djustifying-text-86"></a><a name="index-Justification_002c-ragged-right-87"></a>
-This declaration corresponds to the <code>flushleft</code> environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in
-a <code>parbox</code>.
-
- <p>Unlike the <code>flushleft</code> environment, the <code>\raggedright</code> command
-does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
-paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an
-environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** flushright ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="flushright"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#itemize">itemize</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.9 flushright</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-flushright-88"></a><a name="index-Ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for-89"></a><a name="index-Right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-90"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{flushright}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{flushright}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>flushright</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand margin.
-Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a>: The declaration form of the <code>flushright</code> environment.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- * \raggedleft *** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005craggedleft"></a>Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#flushright">flushright</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.9.1 \raggedleft</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005craggedleft-91"></a><a name="index-Ragged-left-text-92"></a><a name="index-Justification_002c-ragged-left-93"></a><a name="index-Right_002djustifying-text-94"></a>
-This declaration corresponds to the <code>flushright</code> environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in
-a <code>parbox</code>.
-
- <p>Unlike the <code>flushright</code> environment, the <code>\raggedleft</code> command
-does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
-paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an
-environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** itemize ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="itemize"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#letter">letter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#flushright">flushright</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.10 itemize</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-itemize-95"></a><a name="index-_005citem-96"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items-97"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{itemize}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{itemize}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>itemize</code> environment produces a &ldquo;bulleted&rdquo; list. Itemizations
-can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
-be nested within other paragraph-making environments.
-
- <p>Each item of an <code>itemized</code> list begins with an <code>\item</code> command.
-There must be at least one <code>\item</code> command within the environment.
-
- <p>The <code>itemize</code> environment uses the <code>itemi</code> through
-<code>itemiv</code> counters (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be
-changed by redefining <code>\theitemi</code> etc.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** letter ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="letter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#list">list</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#itemize">itemize</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.11 letter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-letter-98"></a>
-This environment is used for creating letters. See <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** list *************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="list"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#minipage">minipage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#letter">letter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.12 list</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-list-99"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items_002c-generic-100"></a>
-The <code>list</code> environment is a generic environment which is used for
-defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in
-documents, but often in macros.
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{list}{label}{spacing}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{list}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>{label}</code> argument specifies how items should be labelled.
-This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the
-label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands.
-
- <p>The <code>{spacing}</code> argument contains commands to change the spacing
-parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e.,
-<code>{}</code>. This will select all default spacing which should suffice
-for most cases.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** minipage *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="minipage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#picture">picture</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#list">list</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.13 minipage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-minipage-101"></a><a name="index-Footnotes-in-figures-102"></a><a name="index-Figures_002c-footnotes-in-103"></a><a name="index-Minipage_002c-creating-a-104"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{minipage}[position]{width}
- text
- \end{minipage}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>minipage</code> environment is similar to a <code>\parbox</code> command.
-It takes the same optional <code>position</code> argument and mandatory
-<code>width</code> argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments
-inside a minipage.
-
- <p>Footnotes in a <code>minipage</code> environment are handled in a way that is
-particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
-<code>\footnote</code> or <code>\footnotetext</code> command puts the footnote at
-the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it
-uses the <code>mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the ordinary
-<code>footnote</code> counter See <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>.
-
- <p>NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using footnotes;
-they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** picture ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="picture"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#quotation">quotation</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#minipage">minipage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.14 picture</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-picture-105"></a><a name="index-Creating-pictures-106"></a><a name="index-Pictures_002c-creating-107"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
- .
- .
- picture commands
- .
- .
- \end{picture}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>picture</code> environment allows you to create just about any kind
-of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You
-tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their
-coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and
-a minus sign &mdash; a number like <code>5</code>, <code>2.3</code> or <code>-3.1416</code>. A
-coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the unit length
-<code>\unitlength</code>, so if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1cm</code>,
-then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimetres. You
-can change the value of <code>\unitlength</code> anywhere you want, using the
-<code>\setlength</code> command, but strange things will happen if you try
-changing it inside the picture environment.
-
- <p>A position is a pair of coordinates, such as <code>(2.4,-5)</code>, specifying
-the point with x-coordinate <code>2.4</code> and y-coordinate <code>-5</code>.
-Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin,
-which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that
-when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces;
-the parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
-
- <p>The <code>picture</code> environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
-<code>position</code>. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
-produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
-argument's x- and y-coordinates.
-
- <p>The <code>picture</code> environment also has an optional <code>position</code>
-argument, following the <code>size</code> argument, that can change the
-origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
-contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
-coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
-(thereby determining the origin). For example, if <code>\unitlength</code>
-has been set to <code>1mm</code>, the command
-<pre class="example"> \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
-</pre>
- <p>produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
-millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
-upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first
-draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the origin
-at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by
-shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional argument.
-
- <p>The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the
-picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is;
-LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even
-off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in determining
-how much room to leave for it.
-
- <p>Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the <code>\put</code>
-command. The command
-<pre class="example"> \put (11.3,-.3){...}
-</pre>
- <p>puts the object specified by <code>...</code> in the picture, with its
-reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for
-various objects will be described below.
-
- <p>The <code>\put</code> command creates an <dfn>LR box</dfn>. You can put anything
-in the text argument of the <code>\put</code> command that you'd put into the
-argument of an <code>\mbox</code> and related commands. When you do this, the
-reference point will be the lower left corner of the box.
-
- <p>Picture commands:
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a>: Draw a circle.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>: Draw a dashed box.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>: Draw a frame around an object.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>: Draw a box with a frame around it.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cline">\line</a>: Draw a straight line.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>: Set the line thickness.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>: Draw a box of the specified size.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>: Draw multiple instances of an object.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>: Draw an ellipse.
-<li><a href="#_005cput">\put</a>: Place an object at a specified place.
-<li><a href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>: Make a pile of objects.
-<li><a href="#_005cvector">\vector</a>: Draw a line with an arrow.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \circle ***** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccircle"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.1 \circle</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccircle-108"></a>
-<code>\circle[*]{diameter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\circle</code> command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
-the specified one as possible. If the <code>*</code>-form of the command is
-used, LaTeX draws a solid circle.
-
- <p>Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \dashbox **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cdashbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.2 \dashbox</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cdashbox-109"></a>
-Draws a box with a dashed line.
-
- <p><code>\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\dashbox</code> has an extra argument which specifies the width of
-each dash. A dashed box looks best when the <code>width</code> and
-<code>height</code> are multiples of the <code>dash_length</code>.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \frame ****** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cframe"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.3 \frame</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cframe-110"></a>
-<code>\frame{...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\frame</code> command puts a rectangular frame around the object
-specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left
-corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the
-object.
-
-<!-- ************************** -->
-<!-- *** \framebox (picture) ** -->
-<!-- ************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cline">\line</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.4 \framebox</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cframebox-111"></a>
-<code>\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\framebox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\makebox</code>
-command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that
-it creates.
-
- <p>The <code>framebox</code> command produces a rule of thickness
-<code>\fboxrule</code>, and leaves a space <code>\fboxsep</code> between the rule
-and the contents of the box.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \line ******* -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.5 \line</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cline-112"></a>
-<code>\line(x slope,y slope){length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\line</code> command draws a line of the specified <code>length</code> and
-<code>slope</code>.
-
- <p>Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y
-have integer values from -6 through 6.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \linethickness * -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005clinethickness"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cline">\line</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.6 \linethickness</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005clinethickness-113"></a>
-<code>\linethickness{dimension}</code>
-
- <p>Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture
-environment to be <code>dimension</code>, which must be a positive length. It
-does not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the
-quarter circles drawn by <code>\oval</code> to form the corners of an oval.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- *** \makebox (picture) ** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.7 \makebox</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-114"></a>
-<code>\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\makebox</code> command for the picture environment is similar to
-the normal <code>\makebox</code> command except that you must specify a
-<code>width</code> and <code>height</code> in multiples of <code>\unitlength</code>.
-
- <p>The optional argument, <code>[position]</code>, specifies the quadrant that
-your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>t</code> - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
-<li><code>b</code> - Moves the item to the bottom
-<li><code>l</code> - Moves the item to the left
-<li><code>r</code> - Moves the item to the right
-</ul>
-
- <p>See <a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \multiput *** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmultiput"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.8 \multiput</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmultiput-115"></a>
-<code>\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\multiput</code> command can be used when you are putting the same
-object in a regular pattern across a picture.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \oval ***** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005coval"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cput">\put</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.9 \oval</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005coval-116"></a>
-<code>\oval(width,height)[portion]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\oval</code> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
-optional argument, <code>[portion]</code>, allows you to select part of the
-oval.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>t</code> - Selects the top portion
-<li><code>b</code> - Selects the bottom portion
-<li><code>r</code> - Selects the right portion
-<li><code>l</code> - Selects the left portion
-</ul>
-
- <p>Note that the &ldquo;corners&rdquo; of the oval are made with quarter circles with
-a maximum radius of 20 pt, so large &ldquo;ovals&rdquo; will look more like boxes
-with rounded corners.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \put ******** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cput"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.10 \put</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cput-117"></a>
-<code>\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\put</code> command places the item specified by the mandatory
-argument at the given coordinates.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \shortstack * -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cshortstack"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvector">\vector</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cput">\put</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.11 \shortstack</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cshortstack-118"></a>
-<code>\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\shortstack</code> command produces a stack of objects. The valid
-positions are:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>r</code> - Moves the objects to the right of the stack
-<li><code>l</code> - Moves the objects to the left of the stack
-<li><code>c</code> - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \vector ***** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvector"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.12 \vector</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvector-119"></a>
-<code>\vector(x slope,y slope){length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\vector</code> command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
-length and slope. The <code>x</code> and <code>y</code> values must lie between -4
-and +4, inclusive.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** quotation ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="quotation"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#quote">quote</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#picture">picture</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.15 quotation</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-quotation-120"></a><a name="index-Quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying-121"></a><a name="index-Displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation-122"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{quotation}
- text
- \end{quotation}
-</pre>
- <p>The margins of the <code>quotation</code> environment are indented on the left
-and the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is
-paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new
-paragraph.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** quote ************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="quote"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#quotation">quotation</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.16 quote</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-quote-123"></a><a name="index-Quoted-text_002c-displaying-124"></a><a name="index-Displaying-quoted-text-125"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{quote}
- text
- \end{quote}
-</pre>
- <p>The margins of the <code>quote</code> environment are indented on the left and
-the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line
-between text produces a new paragraph.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** tabbing ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="tabbing"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#table">table</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#quote">quote</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.17 tabbing</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-tabbing-126"></a><a name="index-Tab-stops_002c-using-127"></a><a name="index-Lining-text-up-in-columns-using-tab-stops-128"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{tabbing}
- text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
- second row \&gt; \&gt; more \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{tabbing}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>tabbing</code> environment provides a way to align text in columns.
-It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do
-with an ordinary typewriter.
-
- <p>It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant
-and known in advance.
-
- <p>This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the <code>tabular</code>
-environment.
-
- <p>The following commands can be used inside a <code>tabbing</code> enviroment:
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\=</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003d-129"></a>
-Sets a tab stop at the current position.
-
- <br><dt><code>\&gt;</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003e-130"></a>
-Advances to the next tab stop.
-
- <br><dt><code>\&lt;</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003c-131"></a>
-This command allows you to put something to the left of the
-local margin without changing the margin.
-Can only be used at the start of the line.
-
- <br><dt><code>\+</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_002b-132"></a>
-Moves the left margin of the next and all the
-following commands one tab stop to the right.
-
- <br><dt><code>\-</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028tabbing_0029-133"></a>
-Moves the left margin of the next and all the
-following commands one tab stop to the left.
-
- <br><dt><code>\'</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029-134"></a>
-Moves everything that you have typed so far in the
-current column, i.e. everything from the most recent <code>\&gt;</code>,
-<code>\&lt;</code>, <code>\'</code>, <code>\\</code>, or <code>\kill</code> command, to the right
-of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop.
-
- <br><dt><code>\`</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029-135"></a>
-Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
-stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column
-because there's no tab stop there. The <code>\`</code> command moves all the
-text that follows it, up to the <code>\\</code> or <code>\end{tabbing}</code>
-command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing
-environment. There must be no <code>\&gt;</code> or <code>\'</code> command between
-the <code>\`</code> and the command that ends the line.
-
- <br><dt><code>\kill</code><dd><a name="index-_005ckill-136"></a>
-Sets tab stops without producing
-text. Works just like <code>\\</code> except that it throws away the
-current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any
-<code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> or <code>\-</code> commands in that line remain in
-effect.
-
- <br><dt><code>\pushtabs</code><dd><a name="index-_005cpushtabs-137"></a>
-Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for
-temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a
-<code>tabbing</code> environment.
-
- <br><dt><code>\poptabs</code><dd><a name="index-_005cpoptabs-138"></a>
-Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last <code>\pushtabs</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>\a</code><dd><a name="index-_005ca-139"></a>
-In a <code>tabbing</code> environment, the commands <code>\=</code>, <code>\'</code> and
-<code>\`</code> do not produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands
-<code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> and <code>\a`</code> are used.
-</dl>
-
- <p>This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format:
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{tabbing}
- function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
- \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
- \&gt; if \= n $&gt;$ 1 then \+ \\
- fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
- else \+ \\
- fact := 1; \-\- \\
- end;\\
- \end{tabbing}
-</pre>
- <!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** table ************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="table"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#tabular">tabular</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.18 table</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-table-140"></a><a name="index-Tables_002c-creating-141"></a><a name="index-Creating-tables-142"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{table}[placement]
-
- body of the table
-
- \caption{table title}
- \end{table}
-</pre>
- <p>Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-usually &ldquo;floated&rdquo; to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
-Tables will not be split between two pages.
-
- <p>The optional argument <code>[placement]</code> determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
-a float:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>h</code> : Here - at the position in the text where the table
-environment appears.
-<li><code>t</code> : Top - at the top of a text page.
-<li><code>b</code> : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
-<li><code>p</code> : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page
-containing no text, only floats.
-</ul>
-
- <p>The standard <code>report</code> and <code>article</code> classes use the default
-placement <code>[tbp]</code>.
-
- <p>The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc.,
-you wish. The <code>\caption</code> command allows you to title your table.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** tabular ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="tabular"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#table">table</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.19 tabular</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-tabular-143"></a><a name="index-Lines-in-tables-144"></a><a name="index-Lining-text-up-in-tables-145"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{tabular}
-</pre>
- <p>or
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{tabular*}
-</pre>
- <p>These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
-items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional
-arguments consist of:
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>width</code><dd>Specifies the width of the <code>tabular*</code> environment. There must be
-rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified
-width.
-<br><dt><code>pos</code><dd>Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of
-the environment.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>t</code> - align on top row
-<li><code>b</code> - align on bottom row
-</ul>
-
- <br><dt><code>cols</code><dd>Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the
-following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and
-intercolumn material.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>l</code> - A column of left-aligned items.
-<li><code>r</code> - A column of right-aligned items.
-<li><code>c</code> - A column of centred items.
-<li><code>|</code> - A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
-<li><code>@{text}</code> - This inserts <code>text</code> in every row. An @-expression
-suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any
-desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be
-included in text. An <code>\extracolsep{wd}</code> command in an
-@-expression causes an extra space of width <code>wd</code> to appear to the
-left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
-<code>\extracolsep</code> command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this
-extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An
-<code>\extracolsep</code> command can be used only in an @-expression in the
-<code>cols</code> argument.
-<li><code>p{wd}</code> - Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of
-width <code>wd</code>, as if it were the argument of a <code>\parbox[t]{wd}</code>
-command. However, a <code>\\</code> may not appear in the item, except in the
-following situations:
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li>inside an environment like <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code>, or <code>tabular</code>.
-<li>inside an explicit <code>\parbox</code>.
-<li>in the scope of a <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>, or <code>\raggedleft</code>
-declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an
-environment when used in a <code>p</code>-column element.
- </ol>
-<li><code>*{num}{cols}</code> - Equivalent to <code>num</code> copies of
-<code>cols</code>, where <code>num</code> is any positive integer and <code>cols</code> is
-any list of column-specifiers, which may contain another
-<code>*-expression</code>.
-
- </ul>
-
- </dl>
-
- <p>These commands can be used inside a <code>tabular</code> environment:
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccline">\cline</a>: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>: Make an item spanning several columns.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cvline">\vline</a>: Draw a vertical line.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \cline **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.1 \cline</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccline-146"></a>
-<code>\cline{i-j}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\cline</code> command draws horizontal lines across the columns
-specified, beginning in column <code>i</code> and ending in column <code>j</code>,
-which are identified in the mandatory argument.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \hline **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccline">\cline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.2 \hline</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chline-147"></a>
-The <code>\hline</code> command will draw a horizontal line the width of the
-table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and
-between the rows of the table.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \multicolumn * -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmulticolumn"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvline">\vline</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.3 \multicolumn</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmulticolumn-148"></a>
-<code>\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\multicolumn</code> is used to make an entry that spans several
-columns. The first mandatory argument, <code>cols</code>, specifies the
-number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, <code>pos</code>,
-specifies the formatting of the entry; <code>c</code> for centred, <code>l</code>
-for flushleft, <code>r</code> for flushright. The third mandatory argument,
-<code>text</code>, specifies what text is to make up the entry.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \vline **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvline"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.4 \vline</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvline-149"></a>
-The <code>\vline</code> command will draw a vertical line extending the full
-height and depth of its row. An <code>\hfill</code> command can be used to
-move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an
-@-expression.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** thebibliography **** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="thebibliography"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#theorem">theorem</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#tabular">tabular</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.20 thebibliography</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-thebibliography-150"></a><a name="index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029-151"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
- \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
- .
- .
- .
- \end{thebibliography}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>thebibliography</code> environment produces a bibliography or
-reference list. In the <code>article</code> class, this reference list is
-labelled &ldquo;References&rdquo;; in the <code>report</code> class, it is labelled
-&ldquo;Bibliography&rdquo;.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>widest-label</code>: Text that, when printed, is approximately as wide
-as the widest item label produces by the <code>\bibitem</code> commands.
-</ul>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>: Specify a bibliography item.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>: Refer to a bibliography item.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>: Include an item in the bibliography.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \bibitem **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cbibitem"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.1 \bibitem</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cbibitem-152"></a>
-<code>\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\bibitem</code> command generates an entry labelled by <code>label</code>.
-If the <code>label</code> argument is missing, a number is generated as the
-<code>label</code>, using the <code>enumi</code> counter. The <code>cite_key</code> is
-any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing
-a comma. This command writes an entry on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file
-containing <code>cite_key</code> and the item's <code>label</code>. When this
-<span class="file">.aux</span> file is read by the <code>\begin{document}</code> command, the
-item's <code>label</code> is associated with <code>cite_key</code>, causing the
-reference to <code>cite_key</code> by a <code>\cite</code> command to produce the
-associated <code>label</code>.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \cite ******* -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccite"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.2 \cite</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccite-153"></a>
-<code>\cite[text]{key_list}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>key_list</code> argument is a list of citation keys. This command
-generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the keys
-in <code>key_list</code> by entries on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file read by the
-<code>\begin{document}</code> command.
-
- <p>The optional <code>text</code> argument will appear after the citation,
-i.e. <code>\cite[p. 2]{knuth}</code> might produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \nocite ***** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnocite"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.3 \nocite</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnocite-154"></a>
-<code>\nocite{key_list}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\nocite</code> command produces no text, but writes <code>key_list</code>,
-which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- *** Using BibTeX ***** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Using-BibTeX"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-Using-BibTeX-155"></a><a name="index-BibTeX_002c-using-156"></a><a name="index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029-157"></a><a name="index-_005cbibliographystyle-158"></a><a name="index-_005cbibliography-159"></a>
-If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if
-you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain
-your bibliography, you don't use the <code>thebibliography</code>
-environment. Instead, you include the lines
-
-<pre class="example"> \bibliographystyle{style}
- \bibliography{bibfile}
-</pre>
- <p>where <code>style</code> refers to a file <code>style.bst</code>, which defines how
-your citations will look. The standard styles distributed with BibTeX
-are:
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>alpha</code><dd>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of
-publication.
-<br><dt><code>plain</code><dd>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
-<br><dt><code>unsrt</code><dd>Like <code>plain</code>, but entries are in order of citation.
-<br><dt><code>abbrv</code><dd>Like <code>plain</code>, but more compact labels.
-</dl>
-
- <p>In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the
-demands of various publications.
-
- <p>The argument to <code>\bibliography</code> refers to the file
-<code>bibfile.bib</code>, which should contain your database in BibTeX
-format. Only the entries referred to via <code>\cite</code> and <code>\nocite</code>
-will be listed in the bibliography.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** theorem ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="theorem"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.21 theorem</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-theorem-160"></a><a name="index-Theorems_002c-typesetting-161"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{theorem}
- theorem text
- \end{theorem}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>theorem</code> environment produces &ldquo;Theorem x&rdquo; in boldface followed
-by your theorem text.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** titlepage ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="titlepage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#theorem">theorem</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.22 titlepage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-titlepage-162"></a><a name="index-Making-a-title-page-163"></a><a name="index-Title-pages_002c-creating-164"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{titlepage}
- text
- \end{titlepage}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>titlepage</code> environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with no
-printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be
-numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The
-<code>\today</code> command comes in handy for title pages.
-<a name="index-_005ctoday-165"></a>
-Note that you can use the <code>\maketitle</code> (see <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>) command to
-produce a standard title page.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** verbatim *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="verbatim"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#verse">verse</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.23 verbatim</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-verbatim-166"></a><a name="index-Simulating-typed-text-167"></a><a name="index-Typed-text_002c-simulating-168"></a><a name="index-Programs_002c-typesetting-169"></a><a name="index-Computer-programs_002c-typesetting-170"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{verbatim}
- text
- \end{verbatim}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>verbatim</code> environment is a paragraph-making environment that
-gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a
-typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that
-they would on a typewriter.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cverb">\verb</a>: The macro form of the <code>verbatim</code> environment.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \verb ******* -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cverb"></a>Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.23.1 \verb</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cverb-171"></a><a name="index-Verbatim-text-172"></a>
-
- <p><code>\verb char literal_text char</code>
-
- <p><code>\verb*char literal_text char</code>
-
- <p>Typesets <code>literal_text</code> exactly as typed, including special
-characters and spaces, using a typewriter (<code>\tt</code>) type style.
-There may be no space between <code>\verb</code> or <code>\verb*</code> and
-<code>char</code> (space is shown here only for clarity). The <code>*-form</code>
-differs only in that spaces are printed
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** verse ************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="verse"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.24 verse</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-verse-173"></a><a name="index-Poetry_002c-an-environment-for-174"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{verse}
- text
- \end{verse}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>verse</code> environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
-other uses for it.
-
- <p>The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate the lines
-of each stanza with <code>\\</code>, and use one or more blank lines to
-separate the stanzas.
-
-<!-- ************************************ -->
-<!-- **** LEVEL2 Starts Here again. **** -->
-<!-- ************************************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Footnotes ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Footnotes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Layout">Layout</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Environments">Environments</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.7 Footnotes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Footnotes_002c-creating-175"></a>
-Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be
-produced with one command, the <code>\footnote</code> command. They can also
-be produced with two commands, the <code>\footnotemark</code> and the
-<code>\footnotetext</code> commands. See the specific command for information
-on why you would use one over the other.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a>: Insert a footnote.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>: Insert footnote mark only.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>: Insert footnote text only.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \footnote ******* -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfootnote"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.7.1 \footnote</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfootnote-176"></a>
-<code>\footnote[number]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\footnote</code> command places the numbered footnote <code>text</code> at
-the bottom of the current page. The optional argument, <code>number</code>,
-is used to change the default footnote number. This command can only be
-used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning
-commands like <code>\chapter</code>, in figures, tables or in a <code>tabular</code>
-environment.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \footnotemark *** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfootnotemark"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.7.2 \footnotemark</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfootnotemark-177"></a>
-The <code>\footnotemark</code> command puts the footnote <code>number</code> in the
-text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The text of
-the footnote is supplied by the <code>\footnotetext</code> command.
-
- <p>This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote markers
-referring to the same footnote by using
-
- <p><code>\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]</code>
-
- <p>after the first <code>\footnote</code> command.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \footnotetext *** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfootnotetext"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.7.3 \footnotetext</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfootnotetext-178"></a>
-<code>\footnotetext[number]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\footnotetext</code> command produces the <code>text</code> to be placed
-at the bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after the
-<code>\footnotemark</code> command. The <code>\footnotetext</code> command must
-appear in outer paragraph mode.
-
- <p>The optional argument, <code>number</code>, is used to change the default
-footnote number.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ******* Lengths ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Lengths"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Letters">Letters</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Layout">Layout</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.8 Lengths</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Lengths_002c-defining-and-using-179"></a>
-A <code>length</code> is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a
-length as an argument.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a>: Define a new length.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>: Set the value of a length.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>: Add a quantity to a length.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>: Set a length to the depth of something.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>: Set a length to the height of something.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>: Set a length to the width of something.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>: Lengths that are, like, predefined.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \newlength ****** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewlength"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.1 \newlength</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewlength-180"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-defining-a-new-181"></a>
-<code>\newlength{\gnat}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\newlength</code> command defines the mandatory argument,
-<code>\gnat</code>, as a <code>length</code> command with a value of <code>0in</code>. An
-error occurs if a <code>\gnat</code> command already exists.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \setlength ****** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csetlength"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.2 \setlength</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csetlength-182"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-setting-value-of-183"></a>
-<code>\setlength{\gnat}{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\setlength</code> command is used to set the value of a
-<code>length</code> command. The <code>length</code> argument can be expressed in
-any terms of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (<code>in</code>),
-millimetres (<code>mm</code>), points (<code>pt</code>), etc.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \addtolength **** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddtolength"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.3 \addtolength</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddtolength-184"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-adding-to-185"></a>
-<code>\addtolength{\gnat}{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addtolength</code> command increments a &ldquo;length command&rdquo; by the
-amount specified in the <code>length</code> argument. It can be a negative
-amount.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \settodepth ***** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csettodepth"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.4 \settodepth</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csettodepth-186"></a>
-<code>\settodepth{\gnat}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\settodepth</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command
-equal to the depth of the <code>text</code> argument.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \settoheight ***** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csettoheight"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.5 \settoheight</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csettoheight-187"></a>
-<code>\settoheight{\gnat}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\settoheight</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command
-equal to the height of the <code>text</code> argument.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \settowidth ***** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csettowidth"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.6 \settowidth</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csettowidth-188"></a>
-<code>\settowidth{\gnat}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\settowidth</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command
-equal to the width of the <code>text</code> argument.
-
-<!-- ***************************** -->
-<!-- **** Predefined lengths ***** -->
-<!-- ***************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Predefined-lengths"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.7 Predefined lengths</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Lengths_002c-predefined-189"></a><a name="index-Predefined-lengths-190"></a>
-<code>\width</code>
-<a name="index-_005cwidth-191"></a>
-<code>\height</code>
-<a name="index-_005cheight-192"></a>
-<code>\depth</code>
-<a name="index-_005cdepth-193"></a>
-<code>\totalheight</code>
-<a name="index-_005ctotalheight-194"></a>
-These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
-commands See <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>. They specify the natural width etc. of
-the text in the box. <code>\totalheight</code> equals <code>\height</code> +
-<code>\depth</code>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
-natural size, e.g., say
-
- <p><code>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}</code>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ******* Letters ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Letters"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.9 Letters</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Letters-195"></a><a name="index-Creating-letters-196"></a>
-You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The
-<code>letter</code> document class is designed to make a number of letters at
-once, although you can make just one if you so desire.
-
- <p>Your <span class="file">.tex</span> source file has the same minimum commands as the other
-document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a
-minimum:
-
-<pre class="example"> \documentclass{letter}
- \begin{document}
- ... letters ...
- \end{document}
-</pre>
- <p>Each letter is a <code>letter</code> environment, whose argument is the name
-and address of the recipient. For example, you might have:
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
- \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
- ...
- \end{letter}
-</pre>
- <p>The letter itself begins with the <code>\opening</code> command. The text of
-the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that
-make no sense in a letter, like <code>\chapter</code>, do not work. The letter
-closes with a <code>\closing</code> command.
-
- <p>After the <code>closing</code>, you can have additional material. The
-<code>\cc</code> command produces the usual &ldquo;cc: ...&rdquo;. There's also a similar
-<code>\encl</code> command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands,
-use <code>\\</code> to separate the items.
-
- <p>These commands are used with the <code>letter</code> class:
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddress">\address</a>: Your return address.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>: Cc list.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>: Saying goodbye.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>: List of enclosed material.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>: Your organisation's address.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>: Making address labels.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cname">\name</a>: Your name, for the return address.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>: Saying hello.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>: Adding a postscript.
-<li><a href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>: Your signature.
-<li><a href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>: Allow page breaks.
-<li><a href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>: Disallow page breaks.
-<li><a href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>: Your phone number.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** \address ** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddress"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Letters">Letters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.1 \address</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddress-197"></a>
-<code>\address{Return address}</code>
-
- <p>The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope.
-Separate lines of the address should be separated by <code>\\</code> commands.
-If you do not make an <code>\address</code> declaration, then the letter will
-be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard letterhead.
-(See <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>, for details on your local implementation). If you
-give an <code>\address</code> declaration, then the letter will be formatted
-as a personal letter.
-
-<!-- ************* -->
-<!-- ** \cc ****** -->
-<!-- ************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccc"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddress">\address</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.2 \cc</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccc-198"></a><a name="index-Cc-list-199"></a>
-<code>\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}</code>
-
- <p>Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each name is
-printed on a separate line.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \closing ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cclosing"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.3 \closing</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cclosing-200"></a><a name="index-Letters_002c-ending-201"></a>
-<code>\closing{text}</code>
-
- <p>The letter closes with a <code>\closing</code> command, i.e.,
-<pre class="example"> \closing{Best Regards,}
-</pre>
- <!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \encl ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cencl"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.4 \encl</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cencl-202"></a><a name="index-Enclosed-material-203"></a>
-<code>\encl{CV\\Certificates}</code>
-
- <p>Generate a list of enclosed material.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \location ** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005clocation"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.5 \location</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005clocation-204"></a>
-<code>\location{address}</code>
-
- <p>This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears
-if the <code>firstpage</code> pagestyle is selected.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \makelabels * -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmakelabels"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cname">\name</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.6 \makelabels</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmakelabels-205"></a>
-<code>\makelabels{number}</code>
-
- <p>If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet of
-address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \name ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cname"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.7 \name</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cname-206"></a>
-<code>\name{June Davenport}</code>
-
- <p>Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return
-address.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \opening ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005copening"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cname">\name</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.8 \opening</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005copening-207"></a><a name="index-Letters_002c-starting-208"></a>
-<code>\opening{text}</code>
-
- <p>The letter begins with the <code>\opening</code> command. The mandatory
-argument, <code>text</code>, is whatever text you wish to start your letter,
-i.e.,
-<pre class="example"> \opening{Dear Joe,}
-</pre>
- <!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \ps ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cps"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.9 \ps</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cps-209"></a>
-<code>\ps</code>
-
- <p>Use this command before a postscript.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \signature * -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csignature"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.10 \signature</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csignature-210"></a>
-<code>\signature{Harvey Swick}</code>
-
- <p>Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the
-space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines should
-be separated by <code>\\</code> commands.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \startbreaks ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cstartbreaks"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.11 \startbreaks</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cstartbreaks-211"></a>
-<code>\startbreaks</code>
-
- <p>Used after a <code>\stopbreaks</code> command to allow page breaks again.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \stopbreaks ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cstopbreaks"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.12 \stopbreaks</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cstopbreaks-212"></a>
-<code>\stopbreaks</code>
-
- <p>Inhibit page breaks until a <code>\startbreaks</code> command occurs.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \telephone * -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctelephone"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.13 \telephone</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctelephone-213"></a>
-<code>\telephone{number}</code>
-
- <p>This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
-<code>firstpage</code> pagestyle is selected.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- * Line & Page Breaking ** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Line-_0026-Page-Breaking"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Letters">Letters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.10 Line &amp; Page Breaking</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Page-Breaking-214"></a><a name="index-Line-Breaking-215"></a><a name="index-Page-Formatting-216"></a>
-The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
-translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To
-produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and
-these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do the
-line breaking yourself with the <code>\\</code> command, but LaTeX usually
-does it for you.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005c_005c">\\</a>: Start a new line.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>: Insert explicit hyphenation.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>: Start a new right-hand page.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>: Start a new page.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>: Enlarge the current page a bit.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>: Be fussy about line breaking.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>: Break the line.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>: Break the line prematurely.
-<li><a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>: Start a new page.
-<li><a href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>: Don't break the current line.
-<li><a href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>: Don't make a page break here.
-<li><a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>: Please make a page break here.
-<li><a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>: Be sloppy about line breaking.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ****** \\ ******** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005c_005c"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.1 \\</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005c_005c-217"></a><a name="index-New-line_002c-starting-218"></a>
-<code>\\[*][extra-space]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\\</code> command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an
-optional argument, <code>extra-space</code>, that specifies how much extra
-vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a
-negative amount.
-
- <p>The <code>\\*</code> command is the same as the ordinary <code>\\</code> command
-except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- ** \- (hyphenation) ** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005c_005c">\\</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.2 \-</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029-219"></a><a name="index-Hyphenation_002c-forcing-220"></a>
-The <code>\-</code> command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
-point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find all
-correct hyphenation points. The <code>\-</code> command is used for the
-exceptional cases.
-
- <p>Note that when you insert <code>\-</code> commands in a word, the word will
-only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation
-points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
-
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- * \cleardoublepage * -->
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccleardoublepage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.3 \cleardoublepage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccleardoublepage-221"></a><a name="index-Starting-on-a--right_002dhand-page-222"></a>
-The <code>\cleardoublepage</code> command ends the current page and causes all
-figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
-(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \clearpage **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cclearpage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.4 \clearpage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cclearpage-223"></a><a name="index-Flushing-a-page-224"></a>
-The <code>\clearpage</code> command ends the current page and causes all
-figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \enlargethispage ** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cenlargethispage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.5 \enlargethispage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cenlargethispage-225"></a><a name="index-Enlarge-current-page-226"></a>
-<code>\enlargethispage{size}</code>
-
- <p><code>\enlargethispage*{size}</code>
-
- <p>Enlarge the <code>\textheight</code> for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g. <code>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</code> will allow one
-additional line.
-
- <p>The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as
-much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
-<code>\pagebreak</code>.
-
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfussy"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.6 \fussy</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfussy-227"></a>
-<code>\fussy</code>
-
- <p>This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy about line
-breaking. This can avoids too much space between words, but may produce
-overfull boxes.
-
- <p>This command cancels the effect of a previous <code>\sloppy</code> command. <a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \hyphenation ** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chyphenation"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.7 \hyphenation</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chyphenation-228"></a><a name="index-Hyphenation_002c-defining-229"></a>
-<code>\hyphenation{words}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\hyphenation</code> command declares allowed hyphenation points,
-where <code>words</code> is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which
-each hyphenation point is indicated by a <code>-</code> character.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \linebreak **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005clinebreak"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.8 \linebreak</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005clinebreak-230"></a><a name="index-Line-breaks-231"></a>
-<code>\linebreak[number]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\linebreak</code> command tells LaTeX to break the current line at
-the point of the command. With the optional argument, <code>number</code>,
-you can convert the <code>\linebreak</code> command from a demand to a
-request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
-number, the more insistent the request is.
-
- <p>The <code>\linebreak</code> command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it
-extends to the right margin.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \newline ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.9 \newline</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewline-232"></a><a name="index-New-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029-233"></a>
-The <code>\newline</code> command breaks the line right where it is. It can
-only be used in paragraph mode.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \newpage ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewpage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.10 \newpage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewpage-234"></a><a name="index-New-Page-235"></a>
-The <code>\newpage</code> command ends the current page.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \nolinebreak *** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnolinebreak"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.11 \nolinebreak</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnolinebreak-236"></a>
-<code>\nolinebreak[number]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\nolinebreak</code> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current
-line at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
-<code>number</code>, you can convert the <code>\nolinebreak</code> command from a
-demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
-higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \nopagebreak ** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnopagebreak"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.12 \nopagebreak</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnopagebreak-237"></a>
-<code>\nopagebreak[number]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\nopagebreak</code> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current
-page at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
-<code>number</code>, you can convert the <code>\nopagebreak</code> command from a
-demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
-higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \pagebreak **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpagebreak"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.13 \pagebreak</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpagebreak-238"></a><a name="index-Page-break_002c-forcing-239"></a>
-<code>\pagebreak[number]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\pagebreak</code> command tells LaTeX to break the current page at
-the point of the command. With the optional argument, <code>number</code>,
-you can convert the <code>\pagebreak</code> command from a demand to a
-request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
-number, the more insistent the request is.
-
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csloppy"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.14 \sloppy</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csloppy-240"></a>
-<code>\sloppy</code>
-
- <p>This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This can
-prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space between words.
-
- <p>Lasts until a <code>\fussy</code> command is issued. <a href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- *** Making Paragraphs *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Making-Paragraphs"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.11 Making Paragraphs</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Making-paragraphs-241"></a><a name="index-Paragraphs-242"></a>
-A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines &mdash; lines not
-containing even a <code>%</code>. A blank line should not appear where a new
-paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
-a sectioning command.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cindent">\indent</a>: Indent this paragraph.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>: Do not indent this paragraph.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cpar">\par</a>: Another way of writing a blank line.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \indent ******* -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cindent"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.11.1 \indent</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cindent-243"></a><a name="index-Indent_002c-forcing-244"></a>
-<code>\indent</code>
-
- <p>This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the
-paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it
-would otherwise be suppressed.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \noindent ***** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnoindent"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpar">\par</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cindent">\indent</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.11.2 \noindent</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnoindent-245"></a><a name="index-Indent_002c-suppressing-246"></a>
-<code>\noindent</code>
-
- <p>When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the paragraph
-indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \par ********** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpar"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.11.3 \par</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpar-247"></a><a name="index-Paragraph_002c-starting-a-new-248"></a>
-Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment
-definitions easier to read.
-
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- *** Margin Notes *** -->
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Margin-Notes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.12 Margin Notes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Margin-Notes-249"></a><a name="index-Notes-in-the-margin-250"></a><a name="index-Remarks-in-the-margin-251"></a>
-The command <code>\marginpar[left]{right}</code> creates a note in the margin.
-The first line will be at the same height as the line in the text where
-the <code>\marginpar</code> occurs.
-
- <p>When you only specify the mandatory argument <code>right</code>, the text will
-be placed
-
- <ul>
-<li>in the right margin for one-sided layout
-<li>in the outside margin for two-sided layout
-<li>in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
-</ul>
-
- <p>By issuing the command <code>\reversemarginpar</code>, you can force the marginal
-notes to go into the opposite (inside) margin.
-
- <p>When you specify both arguments, <code>left</code> is used for the left
-margin, and <code>right</code> is used for the right margin.
-
- <p>The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
-hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a <code>\hspace{0pt}</code>
-command.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Math Formulae ****** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Math-Formulae"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Modes">Modes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.13 Math Formulae</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Math-Formulae-252"></a><a name="index-Formulae_002c-maths-253"></a><a name="index-Math-mode_002c-entering-254"></a><a name="index-_005c_0028-255"></a><a name="index-_005c_0029-256"></a><a name="index-_005c_005b-257"></a><a name="index-_005c_005d-258"></a><a name="index-_0024-259"></a>
-There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>math</code><dd>For Formulae that appear right in the text.
-<br><dt><code>displaymath</code><dd>For Formulae that appear on their own line.
-<br><dt><code>equation</code><dd>The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation
-number in the right margin.
-</dl>
-
- <p>The <code>math</code> environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
-but the <code>displaymath</code> and <code>equation</code> environments can be used
-only in paragraph mode. The <code>math</code> and <code>displaymath</code>
-environments are used so often that they have the following short forms:
-
-<pre class="example"> \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
-
- \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
-</pre>
- <p>In fact, the <code>math</code> environment is so common that it has an even
-shorter form:
-
-<pre class="example"> $ ... $ instead of \(...\)
-</pre>
- <p><a name="index-exponent-260"></a>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a>: Also known as exponent or index.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>: Various mathematical squiggles.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a>: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************************** -->
-<!-- * Subscripts & Superscripts * -->
-<!-- ***************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.13.1 Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Superscript-261"></a><a name="index-Subscript-262"></a><a name="index-_005f-263"></a><a name="index-_005e-264"></a>
-To get an expression <i>exp</i> to appear as a subscript, you just type
-<code>_{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. To get <i>exp</i> to appear as a superscript, you type
-<code>^{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of
-that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when
-something has both a subscript and a superscript.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** Math Symbols ** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Math-Symbols"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.13.2 Math Symbols</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Maths-symbols-265"></a><a name="index-Symbols-266"></a><a name="index-Greek-letters-267"></a>
-
-<!-- ************************ -->
-<!-- * Spacing in Math Mode * -->
-<!-- ************************ -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Spacing-in-Math-Mode"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Spacing_002c-within-Math-mode-268"></a><a name="index-Math-mode_002c-spacing-269"></a>
-
- <p>In a <code>math</code> environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts
-in the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the
-way it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing,
-LaTeX provides the following four commands for use in math mode:
-
- <p><a name="index-_005c_003b-270"></a><a name="index-_005cCOLON-271"></a><a name="index-_005c_002c-272"></a><a name="index-_005c_0021-273"></a>
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li><code>\;</code> - a thick space
-<li><code>\:</code> - a medium space
-<li><code>\,</code> - a thin space
-<li><code>\!</code> - a negative thin space
- </ol>
-
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- * Math Miscellany * -->
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Math-Miscellany"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.13.4 Math Miscellany</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Maths-Miscellany-274"></a>
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\cdots</code><dd><a name="index-_005ccdots-275"></a>Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to the centre
-of the line.
-
- <br><dt><code>\ddots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cddots-276"></a>Produces a diagonal ellipsis.
-
- <br><dt><code>\frac{num}{den}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfrac-277"></a>Produces the fraction <code>num</code> divided by <code>den</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>\ldots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cldots-278"></a>Produces an ellipsis. This command works in
-any mode, not just math mode.
-
- <br><dt><code>\overbrace{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005coverbrace-279"></a>Generates a brace over text.
-
- <br><dt><code>\overline{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005coverline-280"></a>Causes the argument text to be overlined.
-
- <br><dt><code>\sqrt[root]{arg}</code><dd><a name="index-_005csqrt-281"></a>Produces the square root of its argument. The
-optional argument, <code>root</code>, determines what root to produce, i.e.,
-the cube root of <code>x+y</code> would be typed as <code>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>\underbrace{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cunderbrace-282"></a>Generates text with a brace underneath.
-
- <br><dt><code>\underline{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cunderline-283"></a>Causes the argument text to be underlined.
-This command can also be used in paragraph and LR modes.
-
- <br><dt><code>\vdots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cvdots-284"></a>Produces a vertical ellipsis.
-
- </dl>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ******* Modes *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Modes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.14 Modes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Modes-285"></a><a name="index-Paragraph-mode-286"></a><a name="index-Math-mode-287"></a><a name="index-Left_002dto_002dright-mode-288"></a><a name="index-LR-mode-289"></a>
-
- <p>When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
-modes:
-
- <ul>
-<li>Paragraph mode
-<li>Math mode
-<li>Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
-</ul>
-
- <p>LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
-different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes.
-Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when
-LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands.
-
- <p>&ldquo;Paragraph mode&rdquo; is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when
-processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into
-lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in &ldquo;math mode&rdquo; when
-it's generating a mathematical formula. In &ldquo;LR mode&rdquo;, as in paragraph
-mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of
-words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX
-keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode.
-Even if you put a hundred words into an <code>\mbox</code>, LaTeX would keep
-typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then
-complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.
-
- <p>LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an <code>\mbox</code>
-command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for
-example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box.
-There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
-making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of
-these commands or environments will be called a <code>parbox</code>. When
-LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in
-&ldquo;inner paragraph mode&rdquo;. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out
-in, is called &ldquo;outer paragraph mode&rdquo;.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ***** Page Styles ******* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Page-Styles"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Modes">Modes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.15 Page Styles</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Styles_002c-page-290"></a><a name="index-Page-styles-291"></a>
-The <code>\documentclass</code> command determines the size and position of
-the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>: Generate a title page.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>: Set the style used for page numbers.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>: Change the headings/footings style.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a>: Change the headings/footings style for this page.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \maketitle **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmaketitle"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.1 \maketitle</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Title-making-292"></a><a name="index-_005cmaketitle-293"></a>
-<code>\maketitle</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\maketitle</code> command generates a title on a separate title page
-- except in the <code>article</code> class, where the title normally goes at
-the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is
-obtained from the following declarations:
-
- <p>See <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, for the commands to give the information.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cauthor">\author</a>: Who wrote this stuff?
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>: The date the document was created.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>: A special form of footnote.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005ctitle">\title</a>: How to set the document title.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- * \author * -->
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cauthor"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.2 \author</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cauthor-294"></a><a name="index-Author_002c-for-titlepage-295"></a>
-<code>\author{names}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\author</code> command declares the author(s), where <code>names</code> is
-a list of authors separated by <code>\and</code> commands. Use <code>\\</code> to
-separate lines within a single author's entry &ndash; for example, to give
-the author's institution or address.
-
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- ** \date ** -->
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cdate"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cauthor">\author</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.3 \date</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cdate-296"></a><a name="index-Date_002c-for-titlepage-297"></a>
-<code>\date{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\date</code> command declares <i>text</i> to be the document's date. With
-no <code>\date</code> command, the current date is used.
-
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- * \thanks * -->
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cthanks"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctitle">\title</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.4 \thanks</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cthanks-298"></a><a name="index-Thanks_002c-for-titlepage-299"></a>
-<code>\thanks{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\thanks</code> command produces a <code>\footnote</code> to the title.
-
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- * \title ** -->
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctitle"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.5 \title</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctitle-300"></a><a name="index-Title_002c-for-titlepage-301"></a>
-<code>\title{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\title</code> command declares <code>text</code> to be the title. Use
-<code>\\</code> to tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \pagenumbering * -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpagenumbering"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.6 \pagenumbering</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpagenumbering-302"></a><a name="index-Page-numbering-303"></a>
-<code>\pagenumbering{num_style}</code>
-
- <p>Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of <code>num_style</code> are:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>arabic</code> - Arabic numerals
-<li><code>roman</code> - Lowercase Roman numerals
-<li><code>Roman</code> - Uppercase Roman numerals
-<li><code>alph</code> - Lowercase letters
-<li><code>Alph</code> - Uppercase letters
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \pagestyle **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpagestyle"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.7 \pagestyle</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpagestyle-304"></a>
-<code>\pagestyle{option}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\pagestyle</code> command changes the style from the current page on
-throughout the remainder of your document.
-
- <p>The valid options are:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>plain</code> - Just a plain page number.
-<li><code>empty</code> - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
-<li><code>headings</code> - Puts running headings on each page. The document
-style specifies what goes in the headings.
-<li><code>myheadings</code> - You specify what is to go in the heading with the
-<code>\markboth</code> or the <code>\markright</code> commands.
-</ul>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a>: Set left and right headings.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a>: Set right heading only.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \markboth ** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmarkboth"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.8 \markboth</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmarkboth-305"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \markboth{left head}{right head}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>\markboth</code> command is used in
-conjunction with the page style <code>myheadings</code> for setting
-both the left and the right heading. You should note that a &ldquo;left-hand
-heading&rdquo; is generated by the last <code>\markboth</code> command before the
-end of the page, while a &ldquo;right-hand heading&rdquo; is generated by the first
-<code>\markboth</code> or <code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is
-one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \markright ** -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmarkright"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.9 \markright</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmarkright-306"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \markright{right head}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>\markright</code> command is used in conjunction with the page style
-<code>myheadings</code> for setting the right heading, leaving the left
-heading unchanged. You should note that a &ldquo;left-hand heading&rdquo; is
-generated by the last <code>\markboth</code> command before the end of the
-page, while a &ldquo;right-hand heading&rdquo; is generated by the first
-<code>\markboth</code> or <code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is
-one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \thispagestyle * -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cthispagestyle"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.10 \thispagestyle</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cthispagestyle-307"></a>
-<code>\thispagestyle{option}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\thispagestyle</code> command works in the same manner as the
-<code>\pagestyle</code> command except that it changes the style for the
-current page only.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ***** Sectioning ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Sectioning"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.16 Sectioning</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Sectioning-308"></a><a name="index-_005cchapter-309"></a><a name="index-_005csubsubsection-310"></a><a name="index-_005csubsection-311"></a><a name="index-_005cparagraph-312"></a><a name="index-_005csubparagraph-313"></a>
-Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>\part</code>
-<li><code>\chapter</code> (report and book class only)
-<li><code>\section</code>
-<li><code>\subsection</code>
-<li><code>\subsubsection</code>
-<li><code>\paragraph</code>
-<li><code>\subparagraph</code>
-</ul>
-
- <p>All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,
-
- <p><code>\chapter[optional]{title}</code>
-
- <p>In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory argument
-of the sectioning command can appear in two other places:
-
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li>The table of contents
-<li>The running head at the top of the page
- </ol>
-
- <p>You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places as
-appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the sectioning
-commands have an <code>optional</code> argument that provides the text for
-these other two purposes.
-
- <p>All sectioning commands have <code>*</code>-forms that print a <i>title</i>,
-but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of
-contents.
-
- <p><a name="index-_005cappendix-314"></a><a name="index-Appendix_002c-creating-315"></a>
-<code>\appendix</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\appendix</code> command changes the way sectional units are
-numbered. The <code>\appendix</code> command generates no text and does not
-affect the numbering of parts.
-The normal use of this command is something like
-
-<pre class="example"> \chapter{The First Chapter}
- ...
- \appendix
- \chapter{The First Appendix}
-</pre>
- <!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Spaces & Boxes ***** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Spaces-_0026-Boxes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.17 Spaces &amp; Boxes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Spaces-316"></a><a name="index-Boxes-317"></a>
-All the predefined length parameters (see <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>) can be
-used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
-
-</li></ul>
-<p>Horizontal space
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a>: Stretchable horizontal dots.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>: Stretchable horizontal space.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>: Stretchable horizontal rule.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>: Fixed horizontal space.
-Vertical space
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>: Stretchable vertical space.
-<li><a href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-Boxes
-<li><a href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>: Framebox.
-<li><a href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>: Framebox, adjustable position.
-<li><a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>: An environment like \sbox.
-<li><a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>: Box, adjustable position.
-<li><a href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>: Box.
-<li><a href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>: Declare a name for saving a box.
-<li><a href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>: Box with text in paragraph mode.
-<li><a href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>: Raise or lower text.
-<li><a href="#_005crule">\rule</a>: Lines and squares.
-<li><a href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
-<li><a href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
-<li><a href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a>: Print saved text.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \dotfill *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cdotfill"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.1 \dotfill</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cdotfill-318"></a>
-The <code>\dotfill</code> command produces a &ldquo;rubber length&rdquo; that produces dots
-instead of just spaces.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \hfill ***** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chfill"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.2 \hfill</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chfill-319"></a>
-The <code>\hfill</code> fill command produces a &ldquo;rubber length&rdquo; which can
-stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \hrulefill ** -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chrulefill"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.3 \hrulefill</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chrulefill-320"></a>
-The <code>\hrulefill</code> fill command produces a &ldquo;rubber length&rdquo; which can
-stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
-rule.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \hspace **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chspace"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.4 \hspace</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chspace-321"></a>
-<code>\hspace[*]{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\hspace</code> command adds horizontal space. The length of the
-space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e.,
-points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space
-with an <code>\hspace</code> command. Adding negative space is like
-backspacing.
-
- <p>LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If you
-don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional <code>*</code>
-argument. Then the space is never removed.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \addvspace ** -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddvspace"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.5 \addvspace</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddvspace-322"></a><a name="index-Vertical-space_002c-inserting-323"></a><a name="index-Space_002c-inserting-vertical-324"></a>
-<code>\addvspace{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addvspace</code> command normally adds a vertical space of height
-length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
-point in the output by a previous <code>\addvspace</code> command, then this
-command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length
-of the total vertical space equal to <code>length</code>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \bigskip *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cbigskip"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.6 \bigskip</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cbigskip-325"></a>
-The <code>\bigskip</code> command is equivalent to
-<code>\vspace{bigskipamount}</code> where <code>bigskipamount</code> is determined
-by the document class.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \medskip *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmedskip"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.7 \medskip</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmedskip-326"></a>
-The <code>\medskip</code> command is equivalent to
-<code>\vspace{medskipamount}</code> where <code>medskipamount</code> is determined
-by the document class.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \smallskip ** -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csmallskip"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.8 \smallskip</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csmallskip-327"></a>
-<code>\smallskip</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\smallskip</code> command is equivalent to
-<code>\vspace{smallskipamount}</code> where <code>smallskipamount</code> is
-determined by the document class.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \vfill ***** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvfill"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.9 \vfill</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvfill-328"></a>
-The <code>\vfill</code> fill command produces a rubber length which can
-stretch or shrink vertically.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \vspace **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvspace"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.10 \vspace</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvspace-329"></a>
-<code>\vspace[*]{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\vspace</code> command adds vertical space. The length of the space
-can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points,
-inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an
-<code>\vspace</code> command.
-
- <p>LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you
-don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional <code>*</code>
-argument. Then the space is never removed.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \fbox ****** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.11 \fbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfbox-330"></a>
-<code>\fbox{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\fbox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\mbox</code>
-command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that
-it creates.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \framebox ** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cframebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.12 \framebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cframebox-331"></a>
-<code>\framebox[width][position]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\framebox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\makebox</code>
-command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that
-it creates.
-
- <p>The framebox command produces a rule of thickness <code>\fboxrule</code>, and
-leaves a space <code>\fboxsep</code> between the rule and the contents of the
-box.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** lrbox **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="lrbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.13 lrbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-lrbox-332"></a>
-<code>\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}</code>
-
- <p>This is the environment form of <code>\sbox</code>.
-
- <p>The text inside the environment is saved in the box <code>cmd</code>, which
-must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** \makebox ** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmakebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.14 \makebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmakebox-333"></a>
-<code>\makebox[width][position]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\makebox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to contain
-the <code>text</code> specified. The width of the box is specified by the
-optional <code>width</code> argument. The position of the text within the box
-is determined by the optional <code>position</code> argument.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>c</code> &mdash; centred (default)
-<li><code>l</code> &mdash; flushleft
-<li><code>r</code> &mdash; flushright
-<li><code>s</code> &mdash; stretch from left to right margin. The text must contain
-stretchable space for this to work.
-</ul>
-
- <p>See <a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \mbox ****** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.15 \mbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmbox-334"></a>
-<code>\mbox{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\mbox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text
-created by its argument.
-
- <p>Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \newsavebox * -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewsavebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.16 \newsavebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewsavebox-335"></a>
-<code>\newsavebox{cmd}</code>
-
- <p>Declares <code>cmd</code>, which must be a command name that is not already
-defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \parbox **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cparbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.17 \parbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cparbox-336"></a>
-<code>\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}</code>
-
- <p>A <code>parbox</code> is a box whose contents are created in <code>paragraph</code>
-mode. The <code>\parbox</code> has two mandatory arguments:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>width</code> - specifies the width of the parbox, and
-<li><code>text</code> - the text that goes inside the parbox.
-</ul>
-
- <p>LaTeX will position a <code>parbox</code> so its centre lines up with the centre of
-the text line. The optional <i>position</i> argument allows you
-to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox (default is top).
-
- <p>If the <i>height</i> argument is not given, the box will have the natural
-height of the text.
-
- <p>The <i>inner-pos</i> argument controls the placement of the text inside the
-box. If it is not specified, <i>position</i> is used.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>t</code> &mdash; text is placed at the top of the box.
-<li><code>c</code> &mdash; text is centred in the box.
-<li><code>b</code> &mdash; text is placed at the bottom of the box.
-<li><code>s</code> &mdash; stretch vertically. The text must contain
-vertically stretchable space for this to work.
-</ul>
-
- <p>A <code>\parbox</code> command is used for a parbox containing a small piece
-of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use
-any of the paragraph-making environments inside a <code>\parbox</code>
-argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a
-paragraph-making environment, you should use a <code>minipage</code>
-environment See <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \raisebox ** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005craisebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005crule">\rule</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.18 \raisebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005craisebox-337"></a>
-<code>\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\raisebox</code> command is used to raise or lower text. The first
-mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or
-lowered if it is a negative amount). The text itself is processed in
-<code>LR mode</code>.
-
- <p>Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different
-size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would
-normally think it has. The <code>\raisebox</code> command lets you tell
-LaTeX how tall it is.
-
- <p>The first optional argument, <code>extend-above</code>, makes LaTeX think
-that the text extends above the line by the amount specified. The
-second optional argument, <code>extend-below</code>, makes LaTeX think that
-the text extends below the line by the amount specified.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \rule ****** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005crule"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.19 \rule</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005crule-338"></a>
-<code>\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\rule</code> command is used to produce horizontal lines. The
-arguments are defined as follows:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>raise-height</code> - specifies how high to raise the rule (optional)
-<li><code>width</code> - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
-<li><code>thickness</code> - specifies the thickness of the rule (mandatory)
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \savebox *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csavebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005crule">\rule</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.20 \savebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csavebox-339"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}
-</pre>
- <p>This command typeset <code>text</code> in a box just as for <code>\makebox</code>.
-However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin
-<code>cmd</code>, which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \sbox ****** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.21 \sbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csbox-340"></a>
-<code>\sbox{text}</code>
-
- <p>This commands typeset <code>text</code> in a box just as for <code>\mbox</code>.
-However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin
-<code>cmd</code>, which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \usebox **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cusebox"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.22 \usebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cusebox-341"></a>
-<code>\usebox{cmd}</code>
-
- <p>Prints the box most recently saved in bin <code>cmd</code> by a
-<code>\savebox</code> command.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ** Special Characters *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Special-Characters"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.18 Special Characters</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Special-Characters-342"></a><a name="index-Characters_002c-special-343"></a><a name="index-Reserved-Characters-344"></a><a name="index-Characters_002c-reserved-345"></a>
-The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called
-&ldquo;special printing characters&rdquo;, or simply &ldquo;special characters&rdquo;.
-
-<pre class="example"> # $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ { }
-</pre>
- <p>Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you are
-doing something special. If you simply want the character to be printed
-just as any other letter, include a <code>\</code> in front of the character.
-For example, <code>\$</code> will produce <code>$</code> in your output.
-
- <p>One exception to this rule is the <code>\</code> itself because <code>\\</code> has
-its own special meaning. A <code>\</code> is produced by typing
-<code>$\backslash$</code> in your file.
-
- <p>Also, <code>\~</code> means `place a tilde accent over the following letter',
-so you will probably want to use <code>\verb</code> instead.
-
- <p><a name="index-_005cbackslash-346"></a><a name="index-_005csymbol-347"></a><a name="index-Accessing-any-character-of-a-font-348"></a>
-In addition, you can access any character of a font once you know its
-number by using the <code>\symbol</code> command. For example, the character
-used for displaying spaces in the <code>\verb*</code> command has the code
-decimal 32, so it can be typed as <code>\symbol{32}</code>.
-
- <p>You can also specify octal numbers with <code>'</code> or hexadecimal numbers
-with <code>"</code>, so the previous example could also be written as
-<code>\symbol{'40}</code> or <code>\symbol{"20}</code>.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ** Splitting the Input ** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Splitting-the-Input"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.19 Splitting the Input</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Splitting-the-input-file-349"></a><a name="index-Input-file_002c-splitting-350"></a>
-
- <p>A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole
-input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into
-several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use,
-there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type
-when you run LaTeX.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cinclude">\include</a>: Conditionally include a file.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>: Determine which files are included.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cinput">\input</a>: Unconditionally include a file.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \include *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cinclude"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.19.1 \include</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cinclude-351"></a>
-<code>\include{file}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\include</code> command is used in conjunction with the
-<code>\includeonly</code> command for selective inclusion of files. The
-<code>file</code> argument is the first name of a file, denoting
-<span class="file">file.tex</span>. If <code>file</code> is one the file names in the file list
-of the <code>\includeonly</code> command or if there is no <code>\includeonly</code>
-command, the <code>\include</code> command is equivalent to
-
-<pre class="example"> \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
-</pre>
- <p>except that if the file <span class="file">file.tex</span> does not exist, then a warning
-message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the
-file list, the <code>\include</code> command is equivalent to <code>\clearpage</code>.
-
- <p>The <code>\include</code> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
-read by another <code>\include</code> command.
-
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- ** \includeonly *** -->
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cincludeonly"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cinput">\input</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cinclude">\include</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.19.2 \includeonly</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cincludeonly-352"></a>
-<code>\includeonly{</code><i>file_list</i><code>}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\includeonly</code> command controls which files will be read in by
-an <code>\include</code> command. <i>file_list</i> should be a comma-separated
-list of filenames. Each filename must match exactly a filename specified
-in a <code>\include</code> command. This command can only appear in the
-preamble.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \input ***** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cinput"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.19.3 \input</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cinput-353"></a>
-<code>\input{file}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\input</code> command causes the indicated <code>file</code> to be read and
-processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current
-file at that point. The file name may be a complete file name with
-extension or just a first name, in which case the file <span class="file">file.tex</span>
-is used.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- *** Starting & Ending *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Starting-_0026-Ending"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.20 Starting &amp; Ending</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Starting-_0026-Ending-354"></a><a name="index-Ending-_0026-Starting-355"></a>
-Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum:
-
-<pre class="example"> \documentclass{class}
- \begin{document}
- ... your text goes here ...
- \end{document}
-</pre>
- <p>where the <code>class</code> selected is one of the valid classes for LaTeX.
-See <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>, (and see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>), for details of the
-various document classes available locally.
-
- <p>You may include other LaTeX commands between the <code>\documentclass</code>
-and the <code>\begin{document}</code> commands (i.e., in the `preamble').
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- *** Table of Contents *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Table-of-Contents"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.21 Table of Contents</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Table-of-Contents_002c-creating-356"></a>
-
- <p>A table of contents is produced with the
-<code>\tableofcontents</code>
-<a name="index-_005ctableofcontents-357"></a>command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents
-to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces a heading, but it does
-not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the
-table of contents, include a <code>\newpage</code> command after the
-<code>\tableofcontents</code> command.
-
- <p>There are similar commands
-<code>\listoffigures</code>
-<a name="index-_005clistoffigures-358"></a>and
-<code>\listoftables</code>
-<a name="index-_005clistoftables-359"></a> for producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively.
-Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents.
-
- <p>NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you cannot have
-the
-<code>\nofiles</code>
-<a name="index-_005cnofiles-360"></a>command in your document.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a>: Add an entry to table of contents etc.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a>: Add text directly to table of contents file etc.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- * \addcontentsline * -->
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddcontentsline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.21.1 \addcontentsline</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddcontentsline-361"></a>
-<code>\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command adds an entry to the specified list
-or table where:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>file</code> is the extension of the file on which information is to be
-written: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of figures),
-or <code>lot</code> (list of tables).
-<li><code>sec_unit</code> controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one
-of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument:
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li><code>toc</code> &mdash; the name of the sectional unit, such as part or subsection.
-<li><code>lof</code> &mdash; figure
-<li><code>lot</code> &mdash; table
- </ol>
-<li><code>entry</code> is the text of the entry.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \addtocontents * -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddtocontents"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.21.2 \addtocontents</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddtocontents-362"></a>
-<code>\addtocontents{file}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command adds text (or formatting commands) directly
-to the file that generates the table of contents or list of figures or
-tables.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>file</code> is the extension of the file on which information is to be
-written: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of figures),
-or <code>lot</code> (list of tables).
-<li><code>text</code> is the information to be written.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- * Terminal Input/Output * -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Terminal-Input_002fOutput"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.22 Terminal Input/Output</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Input_002fOutput-363"></a><a name="index-Terminal-Input_002fOutput-364"></a>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a>: Read text from the terminal.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a>: Write text to the terminal.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \typein **** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctypein"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.22.1 \typein</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctypein-365"></a>
-<code>\typein[cmd]{msg}</code>
-
- <p>Prints <code>msg</code> on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for
-you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the <code>cmd</code>
-argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been
-included in the input file in place of the <code>\typein</code> command. If
-the <code>cmd</code> argument is present, it must be a command name. This
-command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \typeout *** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctypeout"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.22.2 \typeout</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctypeout-366"></a>
-<code>\typeout{msg}</code>
-
- <p>Prints <code>msg</code> on the terminal and in the <code>log</code> file. Commands
-in <code>msg</code> that are defined with <code>\newcommand</code> or
-<code>\renewcommand</code> are replaced by their definitions before being
-printed.
-
- <p>LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as
-a single space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to
-<code>msg</code>. A <code>\space</code> command in <code>msg</code> causes a single space
-to be printed. A <code>^^J</code> in <code>msg</code> prints a newline.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ***** Typefaces ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Typefaces"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.23 Typefaces</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Typefaces-367"></a><a name="index-Fonts-368"></a>
-The <code>typeface</code> is specified by giving the &ldquo;size&rdquo; and &ldquo;style&rdquo;. A
-typeface is also called a &ldquo;font&rdquo;.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Styles">Styles</a>: Select roman, italics etc.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>: Select point size.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a>: Commands for wizards.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** Styles **** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Styles"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.23.1 \Styles</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Font-Styles-369"></a><a name="index-Typeface-Styles-370"></a><a name="index-Styles-of-text-371"></a>
-
- <p>The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
-
- <p>These commands are used like <code>\textit{italics text}</code>. The
-corresponding command in parenthesis is the &ldquo;declaration form&rdquo;, which
-takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
-next type style command or the end of the current group.
-
- <p>The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
-<code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> to get sans serif boldface.
-
- <p>You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; e.g.
-<code>\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</code>.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\textrm (\rmfamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextrm-372"></a><a name="index-_005crmfamily-373"></a>Roman.
-<br><dt><code>\textit (\itshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextit-374"></a><a name="index-_005citshape-375"></a><br><dt><code>\emph</code><dd><a name="index-_005cemph-376"></a>Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm).
-<br><dt><code>\textmd (\mdseries)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextmd-377"></a><a name="index-_005cmdseries-378"></a>Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface.
-<br><dt><code>\textbf (\bfseries)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextbf-379"></a><a name="index-_005cbfseries-380"></a>Boldface.
-<br><dt><code>\textup (\upshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextup-381"></a><a name="index-_005cupshape-382"></a>Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
-<br><dt><code>\textsl (\slshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsl-383"></a><a name="index-_005cslshape-384"></a>Slanted.
-<br><dt><code>\textsf (\sffamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsf-385"></a><a name="index-_005csffamily-386"></a>Sans serif.
-<br><dt><code>\textsc (\scshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsc-387"></a><a name="index-_005cscshape-388"></a>Small caps.
-<br><dt><code>\texttt (\ttfamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctexttt-389"></a><a name="index-_005cttfamily-390"></a>Typewriter.
-<br><dt><code>\textnormal (\normalfont)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextnormal-391"></a><a name="index-_005cnormalfont-392"></a>Main document font.
-<br><dt><code>\mathrm</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathrm-393"></a>Roman, for use in math mode.
-<br><dt><code>\mathbf</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathbf-394"></a>Boldface, for use in math mode.
-<br><dt><code>\mathsf</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathsf-395"></a>Sans serif, for use in math mode.
-<br><dt><code>\mathtt</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathtt-396"></a>Typewriter, for use in math mode.
-<br><dt><code>\mathit</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathit-397"></a>Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names with several letters.
-<br><dt><code>\mathnormal</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathnormal-398"></a>For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
-<br><dt><code>\mathcal</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathcal-399"></a>`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
-</dl>
-
- <p>In addition, the command
-<code>\mathversion{bold}</code>
-<a name="index-_005cmathversion-400"></a>can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in
-formulas. <code>\mathversion{normal}</code> restores the default.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** Sizes ***** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Sizes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Styles">Styles</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.23.2 Sizes</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Font-Sizes-401"></a><a name="index-Typeface-Sizes-402"></a><a name="index-Sizes-of-text-403"></a>
-
- <p>The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX.
-
- <p>The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of the
-declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of
-the current group.
-
- <p>You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
-<code>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\tiny</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctiny-404"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\scriptsize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cscriptsize-405"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\footnotesize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfootnotesize-406"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\small</code><dd><a name="index-_005csmall-407"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\normalsize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cnormalsize-408"></a>(default)
-
- <br><dt><code>\large</code><dd><a name="index-_005clarge-409"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\Large</code><dd><a name="index-_005cLarge-410"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\LARGE</code><dd><a name="index-_005cLARGE-411"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\huge</code><dd><a name="index-_005chuge-412"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\Huge</code><dd><a name="index-_005cHuge-413"></a></dl>
-
-<!-- ******************************** -->
-<!-- ** Low-level font commands ***** -->
-<!-- ******************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Low_002dlevel-font-commands"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.23.3 Low-level font commands</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-414"></a><a name="index-Font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel-415"></a>
-These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
-packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
-ones. For full details, you should consult Chapter 7 of <cite>The LaTeX
-Companion</cite>.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\fontencoding{enc}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontencoding-416"></a>Select font encoding. Valid encodings include <code>OT1</code> and <code>T1</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>\fontfamily{family}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontfamily-417"></a>Select font family. Valid families include:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>cmr</code> for Computer Modern Roman
-<li><code>cmss</code> for Computer Modern Sans Serif
-<li><code>cmtt</code> for Computer Modern Typewriter
-</ul>
-
- <p>and numerous others.
-
- <br><dt><code>\fontseries{series}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontseries-418"></a>Select font series. Valid series include:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>m</code> Medium (normal)
-<li><code>b</code> Bold
-<li><code>c</code> Condensed
-<li><code>bc</code> Bold condensed
-<li><code>bx</code> Bold extended
-</ul>
-
- <p>and various other combinations.
-
- <br><dt><code>\fontshape{shape}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontshape-419"></a>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>n</code> Upright (normal)
-<li><code>it</code> Italic
-<li><code>sl</code> Slanted (oblique)
-<li><code>sc</code> Small caps
-<li><code>ui</code> Upright italics
-<li><code>ol</code> Outline
-</ul>
-
- <p>The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
-
- <br><dt><code>\fontsize{size}{skip}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontsize-420"></a>Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to; the
-second is the <code>\baselineskip</code> to use. The unit of both parameters
-defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that the baselineskip should be 1.2
-times the font size.
-
- <br><dt><code>\selectfont</code><dd><a name="index-_005cselectfont-421"></a>The changes made by calling the four font commands described above do
-not come into effect until <code>\selectfont</code> is called.
-
- <br><dt><code>\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cusefont-422"></a>Equivalent to calling <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>,
-<code>\fontseries</code> and <code>\fontshape</code> with the given parameters, followed by <code>\selectfont</code>.
-</dl>
-
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- ************* PARAMETERS *************** -->
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Parameters"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Commands">Commands</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="chapter">3 Parameters</h2>
-
-<p>The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX
-uses <span class="file">.tex</span> as a default file extension. If you omit the input file
-entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command
-options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g.
-
- <p><code>latex ``\scrollmode\input foo.tex''</code>
-
- <p>will process <span class="file">foo.tex</span> without pausing after every error.
-
- <p>Output files are always created in the current directory. When you fail
-to specify an input file name, TeX bases the output names on the file
-specification associated with the logical name TEX_OUTPUT, typically
-<code>texput.log</code>.
-
-<!-- *************************** -->
-<!-- ******* INDICES ******** -->
-<!-- *************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Concept-Index"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="unnumbered">Concept Index</h2>
-
-<ul class="index-cp" compact>
-<li><a href="#index-Accessing-any-character-of-a-font-348">Accessing any character of a font</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Aligning-Equations-73">Aligning Equations</a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Appendix_002c-creating-315">Appendix, creating</a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Arrays_002c-math-60">Arrays, math</a>: <a href="#array">array</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-article-class-41">article class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Author_002c-for-titlepage-295">Author, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cauthor">\author</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029-157">Bibliography, creating (automatically)</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029-151">Bibliography, creating (manually)</a>: <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-BibTeX_002c-using-156">BibTeX, using</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-book-class-43">book class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Boxes-317">Boxes</a>: <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Cc-list-199">Cc list</a>: <a href="#_005ccc">\cc</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Centering-text-65">Centering text</a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Centering-text_002c-environment-for-63">Centering text, environment for</a>: <a href="#center">center</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Characters_002c-reserved-345">Characters, reserved</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Characters_002c-special-343">Characters, special</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Classes-of-document-40">Classes of document</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Commands_002c-defining-new-ones-28">Commands, defining new ones</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Computer-programs_002c-typesetting-170">Computer programs, typesetting</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-a-list-of-3">Counters, a list of</a>: <a href="#Counters">Counters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-creating-11">Counters, creating</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-getting-the-value-of-20">Counters, getting the value of</a>: <a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-setting-17">Counters, setting</a>: <a href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Creating-letters-196">Creating letters</a>: <a href="#Letters">Letters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Creating-pictures-106">Creating pictures</a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Creating-tables-142">Creating tables</a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-21">Cross referencing</a>: <a href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-using-page-number-24">Cross referencing using page number</a>: <a href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-using-section-number-26">Cross referencing using section number</a>: <a href="#_005cref">\ref</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Date_002c-for-titlepage-297">Date, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cdate">\date</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Defining-a-new-command-29">Defining a new command</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-environments-32">Defining new environments</a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-fonts-38">Defining new fonts</a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-theorems-35">Defining new theorems</a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Displaying-quoted-text-125">Displaying quoted text</a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation-122">Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Document-Classes-39">Document Classes</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Enclosed-material-203">Enclosed material</a>: <a href="#_005cencl">\encl</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ending-_0026-Starting-355">Ending &amp; Starting</a>: <a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Enlarge-current-page-226">Enlarge current page</a>: <a href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Environments-57">Environments</a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Environments_002c-defining-31">Environments, defining</a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Equations_002c-aligning-72">Equations, aligning</a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Equations_002c-environment-for-76">Equations, environment for</a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-exponent-260">exponent</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Figures_002c-footnotes-in-103">Figures, footnotes in</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Flushing-a-page-224">Flushing a page</a>: <a href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel-415">Font commands, low-level</a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Font-Sizes-401">Font Sizes</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Font-Styles-369">Font Styles</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Fonts-368">Fonts</a>: <a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Fonts_002c-new-commands-for-37">Fonts, new commands for</a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Footnotes-in-figures-102">Footnotes in figures</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Footnotes_002c-creating-175">Footnotes, creating</a>: <a href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Formatting-Text-66">Formatting Text</a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Formulae_002c-environment-for-77">Formulae, environment for</a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Formulae_002c-maths-253">Formulae, maths</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Global-options-49">Global options</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Greek-letters-267">Greek letters</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Hyphenation_002c-defining-229">Hyphenation, defining</a>: <a href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Hyphenation_002c-forcing-220">Hyphenation, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Indent_002c-forcing-244">Indent, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005cindent">\indent</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Indent_002c-suppressing-246">Indent, suppressing</a>: <a href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Input-file_002c-splitting-350">Input file, splitting</a>: <a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Input_002fOutput-363">Input/Output</a>: <a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Inserting-figures-79">Inserting figures</a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Justification_002c-ragged-left-93">Justification, ragged left</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Justification_002c-ragged-right-87">Justification, ragged right</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Labelled-lists_002c-creating-68">Labelled lists, creating</a>: <a href="#description">description</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-LaTeX-overview-2">LaTeX overview</a>: <a href="#Overview">Overview</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Layout-commands-51">Layout commands</a>: <a href="#Layout">Layout</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Left_002djustifying-text-86">Left-justifying text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-82">Left-justifying text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Left_002dto_002dright-mode-288">Left-to-right mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-adding-to-185">Lengths, adding to</a>: <a href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-defining-a-new-181">Lengths, defining a new</a>: <a href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-defining-and-using-179">Lengths, defining and using</a>: <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-predefined-189">Lengths, predefined</a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-setting-value-of-183">Lengths, setting value of</a>: <a href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-letter-class-44">letter class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Letters-195">Letters</a>: <a href="#Letters">Letters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Letters_002c-ending-201">Letters, ending</a>: <a href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Letters_002c-starting-208">Letters, starting</a>: <a href="#_005copening">\opening</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Line-Breaking-215">Line Breaking</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Line-breaks-231">Line breaks</a>: <a href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lines-in-tables-144">Lines in tables</a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lining-text-up-in-columns-using-tab-stops-128">Lining text up in columns using tab stops</a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lining-text-up-in-tables-145">Lining text up in tables</a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items-97">Lists of items</a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items_002c-generic-100">Lists of items, generic</a>: <a href="#list">list</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items_002c-numbered-70">Lists of items, numbered</a>: <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Loading-additional-packages-48">Loading additional packages</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-414">Low-level font commands</a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-LR-mode-289">LR mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Making-a-title-page-163">Making a title page</a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Making-paragraphs-241">Making paragraphs</a>: <a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Margin-Notes-249">Margin Notes</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Math-Formulae-252">Math Formulae</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Math-mode-287">Math mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Math-mode_002c-entering-254">Math mode, entering</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Math-mode_002c-spacing-269">Math mode, spacing</a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Maths-Miscellany-274">Maths Miscellany</a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Maths-symbols-265">Maths symbols</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Minipage_002c-creating-a-104">Minipage, creating a</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Modes-285">Modes</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Multicolumn-text-56">Multicolumn text</a>: <a href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-New-line_002c-starting-218">New line, starting</a>: <a href="#_005c_005c">\\</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-New-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029-233">New line, starting (paragraph mode)</a>: <a href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-New-Page-235">New Page</a>: <a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Notes-in-the-margin-250">Notes in the margin</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Options_002c-global-50">Options, global</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Overview-of-LaTeX-1">Overview of LaTeX</a>: <a href="#Overview">Overview</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Packages_002c-loading-47">Packages, loading</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-break_002c-forcing-239">Page break, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-Breaking-214">Page Breaking</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-Formatting-216">Page Formatting</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-numbering-303">Page numbering</a>: <a href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-styles-291">Page styles</a>: <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Paragraph-mode-286">Paragraph mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Paragraph_002c-starting-a-new-248">Paragraph, starting a new</a>: <a href="#_005cpar">\par</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Paragraphs-242">Paragraphs</a>: <a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Pictures_002c-creating-107">Pictures, creating</a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Poetry_002c-an-environment-for-174">Poetry, an environment for</a>: <a href="#verse">verse</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Predefined-lengths-190">Predefined lengths</a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Programs_002c-typesetting-169">Programs, typesetting</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying-121">Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Quoted-text_002c-displaying-124">Quoted text, displaying</a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ragged-left-text-92">Ragged left text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for-89">Ragged left text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ragged-right-text-85">Ragged right text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for-83">Ragged right text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Remarks-in-the-margin-251">Remarks in the margin</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-report-class-42">report class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Reserved-Characters-344">Reserved Characters</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Right_002djustifying-text-94">Right-justifying text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-90">Right-justifying text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Sectioning-308">Sectioning</a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Simulating-typed-text-167">Simulating typed text</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Sizes-of-text-403">Sizes of text</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Space_002c-inserting-vertical-324">Space, inserting vertical</a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Spaces-316">Spaces</a>: <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Spacing_002c-within-Math-mode-268">Spacing, within Math mode</a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Special-Characters-342">Special Characters</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Splitting-the-input-file-349">Splitting the input file</a>: <a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Starting-_0026-Ending-354">Starting &amp; Ending</a>: <a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Starting-on-a--right_002dhand-page-222">Starting on a right-hand page</a>: <a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Styles-of-text-371">Styles of text</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Styles_002c-page-290">Styles, page</a>: <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Subscript-262">Subscript</a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Superscript-261">Superscript</a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Symbols-266">Symbols</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Tab-stops_002c-using-127">Tab stops, using</a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Table-of-Contents_002c-creating-356">Table of Contents, creating</a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Tables_002c-creating-141">Tables, creating</a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Terminal-Input_002fOutput-364">Terminal Input/Output</a>: <a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Thanks_002c-for-titlepage-299">Thanks, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Theorems_002c-defining-34">Theorems, defining</a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Theorems_002c-typesetting-161">Theorems, typesetting</a>: <a href="#theorem">theorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Title-making-292">Title making</a>: <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Title-pages_002c-creating-164">Title pages, creating</a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Title_002c-for-titlepage-301">Title, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005ctitle">\title</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Typed-text_002c-simulating-168">Typed text, simulating</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Typeface-Sizes-402">Typeface Sizes</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Typeface-Styles-370">Typeface Styles</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Typefaces-367">Typefaces</a>: <a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Using-BibTeX-155">Using BibTeX</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Variables_002c-a-list-of-4">Variables, a list of</a>: <a href="#Counters">Counters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Verbatim-text-172">Verbatim text</a>: <a href="#_005cverb">\verb</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Vertical-space_002c-inserting-323">Vertical space, inserting</a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li>
-</ul><!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Command-Index"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="unnumbered">Command Index</h2>
-
-
-
-<ul class="index-fn" compact>
-<li><a href="#index-_0024-259"><code>$</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0021-273"><code>\!</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029-134"><code>\' (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0028-255"><code>\(</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0029-256"><code>\)</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_002b-132"><code>\+</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_002c-272"><code>\,</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029-219"><code>\- (hyphenation)</code></a>: <a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028tabbing_0029-133"><code>\- (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_003b-270"><code>\;</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_003c-131"><code>\&lt;</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_003d-129"><code>\=</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_003e-130"><code>\&gt;</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_005b-257"><code>\[</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_005c-217"><code>\\</code></a>: <a href="#_005c_005c">\\</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_005d-258"><code>\]</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029-135"><code>\` (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ca-139"><code>\a</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddcontentsline-361"><code>\addcontentsline</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddress-197"><code>\address</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddress">\address</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddtocontents-362"><code>\addtocontents</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddtocounter-5"><code>\addtocounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddtolength-184"><code>\addtolength</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddvspace-322"><code>\addvspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cAlph-7"><code>\Alph</code></a>: <a href="#_005calph">\alph</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005calph-6"><code>\alph</code></a>: <a href="#_005calph">\alph</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cappendix-314"><code>\appendix</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005carabic-8"><code>\arabic</code></a>: <a href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cauthor-294"><code>\author</code></a>: <a href="#_005cauthor">\author</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbackslash-346"><code>\backslash</code></a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbegin-58"><code>\begin</code></a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbfseries-380"><code>\bfseries</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbibitem-152"><code>\bibitem</code></a>: <a href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbibliography-159"><code>\bibliography</code></a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbibliographystyle-158"><code>\bibliographystyle</code></a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbigskip-325"><code>\bigskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccaption-80"><code>\caption</code></a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccc-198"><code>\cc</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccc">\cc</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccdots-275"><code>\cdots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccentering-64"><code>\centering</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cchapter-309"><code>\chapter</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccircle-108"><code>\circle</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccite-153"><code>\cite</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccite">\cite</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccleardoublepage-221"><code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cclearpage-223"><code>\clearpage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccline-146"><code>\cline</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccline">\cline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cclosing-200"><code>\closing</code></a>: <a href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cCOLON-271"><code>\COLON</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdashbox-109"><code>\dashbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdate-296"><code>\date</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdate">\date</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cddots-276"><code>\ddots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdepth-193"><code>\depth</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdocumentclass-45"><code>\documentclass</code></a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdotfill-318"><code>\dotfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cemph-376"><code>\emph</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cencl-202"><code>\encl</code></a>: <a href="#_005cencl">\encl</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cend-59"><code>\end</code></a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cenlargethispage-225"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfbox-330"><code>\fbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cflushbottom-52"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>: <a href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol-9"><code>\fnsymbol</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontencoding-416"><code>\fontencoding</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontfamily-417"><code>\fontfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontseries-418"><code>\fontseries</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontshape-419"><code>\fontshape</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontsize-420"><code>\fontsize</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnote-176"><code>\footnote</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotemark-177"><code>\footnotemark</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotesize-406"><code>\footnotesize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotetext-178"><code>\footnotetext</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfrac-277"><code>\frac</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cframe-110"><code>\frame</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframe">\frame</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cframebox-331"><code>\framebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cframebox-111"><code>\framebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfussy-227"><code>\fussy</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cheight-192"><code>\height</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chfill-319"><code>\hfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chline-147"><code>\hline</code></a>: <a href="#_005chline">\hline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chrulefill-320"><code>\hrulefill</code></a>: <a href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chspace-321"><code>\hspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cHuge-413"><code>\Huge</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chuge-412"><code>\huge</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chyphenation-228"><code>\hyphenation</code></a>: <a href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cinclude-351"><code>\include</code></a>: <a href="#_005cinclude">\include</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cincludeonly-352"><code>\includeonly</code></a>: <a href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cindent-243"><code>\indent</code></a>: <a href="#_005cindent">\indent</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cinput-353"><code>\input</code></a>: <a href="#_005cinput">\input</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005citem-96"><code>\item</code></a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005citshape-375"><code>\itshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ckill-136"><code>\kill</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clabel-22"><code>\label</code></a>: <a href="#_005clabel">\label</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cLARGE-411"><code>\LARGE</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cLarge-410"><code>\Large</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clarge-409"><code>\large</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cldots-278"><code>\ldots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clefteqn-74"><code>\lefteqn</code></a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cline-112"><code>\line</code></a>: <a href="#_005cline">\line</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clinebreak-230"><code>\linebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clinethickness-113"><code>\linethickness</code></a>: <a href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clistoffigures-358"><code>\listoffigures</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clistoftables-359"><code>\listoftables</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clocation-204"><code>\location</code></a>: <a href="#_005clocation">\location</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-333"><code>\makebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-114"><code>\makebox (picture)</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmakelabels-205"><code>\makelabels</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmaketitle-293"><code>\maketitle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmarkboth-305"><code>\markboth</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmarkright-306"><code>\markright</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathbf-394"><code>\mathbf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathcal-399"><code>\mathcal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathit-397"><code>\mathit</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathnormal-398"><code>\mathnormal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathrm-393"><code>\mathrm</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathsf-395"><code>\mathsf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathtt-396"><code>\mathtt</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathversion-400"><code>\mathversion</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmbox-334"><code>\mbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmdseries-378"><code>\mdseries</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmedskip-326"><code>\medskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmulticolumn-148"><code>\multicolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmultiput-115"><code>\multiput</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cname-206"><code>\name</code></a>: <a href="#_005cname">\name</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewcommand-27"><code>\newcommand</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewcounter-10"><code>\newcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewenvironment-30"><code>\newenvironment</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewfont-36"><code>\newfont</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewlength-180"><code>\newlength</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewline-232"><code>\newline</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewpage-234"><code>\newpage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewsavebox-335"><code>\newsavebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewtheorem-33"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnocite-154"><code>\nocite</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnofiles-360"><code>\nofiles</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnoindent-245"><code>\noindent</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnolinebreak-236"><code>\nolinebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnopagebreak-237"><code>\nopagebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnormalfont-392"><code>\normalfont</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnormalsize-408"><code>\normalsize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005conecolumn-53"><code>\onecolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005copening-207"><code>\opening</code></a>: <a href="#_005copening">\opening</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005coval-116"><code>\oval</code></a>: <a href="#_005coval">\oval</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005coverbrace-279"><code>\overbrace</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005coverline-280"><code>\overline</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpagebreak-238"><code>\pagebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpagenumbering-302"><code>\pagenumbering</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpageref-23"><code>\pageref</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpagestyle-304"><code>\pagestyle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpar-247"><code>\par</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpar">\par</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cparagraph-312"><code>\paragraph</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cparbox-336"><code>\parbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpoptabs-138"><code>\poptabs</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cps-209"><code>\ps</code></a>: <a href="#_005cps">\ps</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpushtabs-137"><code>\pushtabs</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cput-117"><code>\put</code></a>: <a href="#_005cput">\put</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005craggedbottom-54"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005craggedleft-91"><code>\raggedleft</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005craggedright-84"><code>\raggedright</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005craisebox-337"><code>\raisebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cref-25"><code>\ref</code></a>: <a href="#_005cref">\ref</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005crefstepcounter-12"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005crmfamily-373"><code>\rmfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cRoman-14"><code>\Roman</code></a>: <a href="#_005croman">\roman</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005croman-13"><code>\roman</code></a>: <a href="#_005croman">\roman</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005crule-338"><code>\rule</code></a>: <a href="#_005crule">\rule</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csavebox-339"><code>\savebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csbox-340"><code>\sbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cscriptsize-405"><code>\scriptsize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cscshape-388"><code>\scshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cselectfont-421"><code>\selectfont</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csetcounter-16"><code>\setcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csetlength-182"><code>\setlength</code></a>: <a href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csettodepth-186"><code>\settodepth</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csettoheight-187"><code>\settoheight</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csettowidth-188"><code>\settowidth</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csffamily-386"><code>\sffamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cshortstack-118"><code>\shortstack</code></a>: <a href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csignature-210"><code>\signature</code></a>: <a href="#_005csignature">\signature</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csloppy-240"><code>\sloppy</code></a>: <a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cslshape-384"><code>\slshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csmall-407"><code>\small</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csmallskip-327"><code>\smallskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csqrt-281"><code>\sqrt</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cstartbreaks-211"><code>\startbreaks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cstepcounter-15"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cstopbreaks-212"><code>\stopbreaks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csubparagraph-313"><code>\subparagraph</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csubsection-311"><code>\subsection</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csubsubsection-310"><code>\subsubsection</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csymbol-347"><code>\symbol</code></a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctableofcontents-357"><code>\tableofcontents</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctelephone-213"><code>\telephone</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextbf-379"><code>\textbf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextit-374"><code>\textit</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextmd-377"><code>\textmd</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextnormal-391"><code>\textnormal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextrm-372"><code>\textrm</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsc-387"><code>\textsc</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsf-385"><code>\textsf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsl-383"><code>\textsl</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctexttt-389"><code>\texttt</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextup-381"><code>\textup</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cthanks-298"><code>\thanks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cthispagestyle-307"><code>\thispagestyle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctiny-404"><code>\tiny</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctitle-300"><code>\title</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctitle">\title</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctoday-165"><code>\today</code></a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctotalheight-194"><code>\totalheight</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cttfamily-390"><code>\ttfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctwocolumn-55"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctypein-365"><code>\typein</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctypeout-366"><code>\typeout</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cunderbrace-282"><code>\underbrace</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cunderline-283"><code>\underline</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cupshape-382"><code>\upshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cusebox-341"><code>\usebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cusecounter-18"><code>\usecounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cusefont-422"><code>\usefont</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cusepackage-46"><code>\usepackage</code></a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvalue-19"><code>\value</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvdots-284"><code>\vdots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvector-119"><code>\vector</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvector">\vector</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cverb-171"><code>\verb</code></a>: <a href="#_005cverb">\verb</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvfill-328"><code>\vfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvline-149"><code>\vline</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvline">\vline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvspace-329"><code>\vspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cwidth-191"><code>\width</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005e-264"><code>^</code></a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005f-263"><code>_</code></a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-array-61"><code>array</code></a>: <a href="#array">array</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-center-62"><code>center</code></a>: <a href="#center">center</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-description-67"><code>description</code></a>: <a href="#description">description</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-enumerate-69"><code>enumerate</code></a>: <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-eqnarray-71"><code>eqnarray</code></a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-equation-75"><code>equation</code></a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-figure-78"><code>figure</code></a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-flushleft-81"><code>flushleft</code></a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-flushright-88"><code>flushright</code></a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-itemize-95"><code>itemize</code></a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-letter-98"><code>letter</code></a>: <a href="#letter">letter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-list-99"><code>list</code></a>: <a href="#list">list</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-lrbox-332"><code>lrbox</code></a>: <a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-minipage-101"><code>minipage</code></a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-picture-105"><code>picture</code></a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-quotation-120"><code>quotation</code></a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-quote-123"><code>quote</code></a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-tabbing-126"><code>tabbing</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-table-140"><code>table</code></a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-tabular-143"><code>tabular</code></a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-thebibliography-150"><code>thebibliography</code></a>: <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-theorem-160"><code>theorem</code></a>: <a href="#theorem">theorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-titlepage-162"><code>titlepage</code></a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-verbatim-166"><code>verbatim</code></a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-verse-173"><code>verse</code></a>: <a href="#verse">verse</a></li>
- </ul>
-<div class="contents">
-<h2>Table of Contents</h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="toc_Overview" href="#Overview">1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</a>
-<li><a name="toc_Commands" href="#Commands">2 Commands</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#Counters">2.1 Counters</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005caddtocounter">2.1.1 \addtocounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005calph">2.1.2 \alph</a>
-<li><a href="#_005carabic">2.1.3 \arabic</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfnsymbol">2.1.4 \fnsymbol</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewcounter">2.1.5 \newcounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005crefstepcounter">2.1.6 \refstepcounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005croman">2.1.7 \roman</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cstepcounter">2.1.8 \stepcounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csetcounter">2.1.9 \setcounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cusecounter">2.1.10 \usecounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvalue">2.1.11 \value</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Cross-References">2.2 Cross References</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005clabel">2.2.1 \label</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpageref">2.2.2 \pageref</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cref">2.2.3 \ref</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Definitions">2.3 Definitions</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewcommand">2.3.1 \newcommand</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewenvironment">2.3.2 \newenvironment</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewtheorem">2.3.3 \newtheorem</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewfont">2.3.4 \newfont</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Document-Classes">2.4 Document Classes</a>
-<li><a href="#Layout">2.5 Layout</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cflushbottom">2.5.1 \flushbottom</a>
-<li><a href="#_005conecolumn">2.5.2 \onecolumn</a>
-<li><a href="#_005craggedbottom">2.5.3 \raggedbottom</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ctwocolumn">2.5.4 \twocolumn</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Environments">2.6 Environments</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#array">2.6.1 array</a>
-<li><a href="#center">2.6.2 center</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005ccentering">2.6.2.1 \centering</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#description">2.6.3 description</a>
-<li><a href="#enumerate">2.6.4 enumerate</a>
-<li><a href="#eqnarray">2.6.5 eqnarray</a>
-<li><a href="#equation">2.6.6 equation</a>
-<li><a href="#figure">2.6.7 figure</a>
-<li><a href="#flushleft">2.6.8 flushleft</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005craggedright">2.6.8.1 \raggedright</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#flushright">2.6.9 flushright</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005craggedleft">2.6.9.1 \raggedleft</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#itemize">2.6.10 itemize</a>
-<li><a href="#letter">2.6.11 letter</a>
-<li><a href="#list">2.6.12 list</a>
-<li><a href="#minipage">2.6.13 minipage</a>
-<li><a href="#picture">2.6.14 picture</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005ccircle">2.6.14.1 \circle</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cdashbox">2.6.14.2 \dashbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cframe">2.6.14.3 \frame</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">2.6.14.4 \framebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cline">2.6.14.5 \line</a>
-<li><a href="#_005clinethickness">2.6.14.6 \linethickness</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">2.6.14.7 \makebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmultiput">2.6.14.8 \multiput</a>
-<li><a href="#_005coval">2.6.14.9 \oval</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cput">2.6.14.10 \put</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cshortstack">2.6.14.11 \shortstack</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvector">2.6.14.12 \vector</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#quotation">2.6.15 quotation</a>
-<li><a href="#quote">2.6.16 quote</a>
-<li><a href="#tabbing">2.6.17 tabbing</a>
-<li><a href="#table">2.6.18 table</a>
-<li><a href="#tabular">2.6.19 tabular</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005ccline">2.6.19.1 \cline</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chline">2.6.19.2 \hline</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmulticolumn">2.6.19.3 \multicolumn</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvline">2.6.19.4 \vline</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#thebibliography">2.6.20 thebibliography</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cbibitem">2.6.20.1 \bibitem</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ccite">2.6.20.2 \cite</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnocite">2.6.20.3 \nocite</a>
-<li><a href="#Using-BibTeX">2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#theorem">2.6.21 theorem</a>
-<li><a href="#titlepage">2.6.22 titlepage</a>
-<li><a href="#verbatim">2.6.23 verbatim</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cverb">2.6.23.1 \verb</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#verse">2.6.24 verse</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Footnotes">2.7 Footnotes</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cfootnote">2.7.1 \footnote</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfootnotemark">2.7.2 \footnotemark</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfootnotetext">2.7.3 \footnotetext</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Lengths">2.8 Lengths</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewlength">2.8.1 \newlength</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csetlength">2.8.2 \setlength</a>
-<li><a href="#_005caddtolength">2.8.3 \addtolength</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csettodepth">2.8.4 \settodepth</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csettoheight">2.8.5 \settoheight</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csettowidth">2.8.6 \settowidth</a>
-<li><a href="#Predefined-lengths">2.8.7 Predefined lengths</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Letters">2.9 Letters</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005caddress">2.9.1 \address</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ccc">2.9.2 \cc</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cclosing">2.9.3 \closing</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cencl">2.9.4 \encl</a>
-<li><a href="#_005clocation">2.9.5 \location</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmakelabels">2.9.6 \makelabels</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cname">2.9.7 \name</a>
-<li><a href="#_005copening">2.9.8 \opening</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cps">2.9.9 \ps</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csignature">2.9.10 \signature</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cstartbreaks">2.9.11 \startbreaks</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cstopbreaks">2.9.12 \stopbreaks</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ctelephone">2.9.13 \telephone</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">2.10 Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005c_005c">2.10.1 \\</a>
-<li><a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">2.10.2 \-</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">2.10.3 \cleardoublepage</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cclearpage">2.10.4 \clearpage</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cenlargethispage">2.10.5 \enlargethispage</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfussy">2.10.6 \fussy</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chyphenation">2.10.7 \hyphenation</a>
-<li><a href="#_005clinebreak">2.10.8 \linebreak</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewline">2.10.9 \newline</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewpage">2.10.10 \newpage</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnolinebreak">2.10.11 \nolinebreak</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnopagebreak">2.10.12 \nopagebreak</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpagebreak">2.10.13 \pagebreak</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csloppy">2.10.14 \sloppy</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Making-Paragraphs">2.11 Making Paragraphs</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cindent">2.11.1 \indent</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnoindent">2.11.2 \noindent</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpar">2.11.3 \par</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Margin-Notes">2.12 Margin Notes</a>
-<li><a href="#Math-Formulae">2.13 Math Formulae</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">2.13.1 Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a>
-<li><a href="#Math-Symbols">2.13.2 Math Symbols</a>
-<li><a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode</a>
-<li><a href="#Math-Miscellany">2.13.4 Math Miscellany</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Modes">2.14 Modes</a>
-<li><a href="#Page-Styles">2.15 Page Styles</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cmaketitle">2.15.1 \maketitle</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cauthor">2.15.2 \author</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cdate">2.15.3 \date</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cthanks">2.15.4 \thanks</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ctitle">2.15.5 \title</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpagenumbering">2.15.6 \pagenumbering</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpagestyle">2.15.7 \pagestyle</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmarkboth">2.15.8 \markboth</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmarkright">2.15.9 \markright</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cthispagestyle">2.15.10 \thispagestyle</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Sectioning">2.16 Sectioning</a>
-<li><a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">2.17 Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cdotfill">2.17.1 \dotfill</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chfill">2.17.2 \hfill</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chrulefill">2.17.3 \hrulefill</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chspace">2.17.4 \hspace</a>
-<li><a href="#_005caddvspace">2.17.5 \addvspace</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cbigskip">2.17.6 \bigskip</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmedskip">2.17.7 \medskip</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csmallskip">2.17.8 \smallskip</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvfill">2.17.9 \vfill</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvspace">2.17.10 \vspace</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfbox">2.17.11 \fbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cframebox">2.17.12 \framebox</a>
-<li><a href="#lrbox">2.17.13 lrbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmakebox">2.17.14 \makebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmbox">2.17.15 \mbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewsavebox">2.17.16 \newsavebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cparbox">2.17.17 \parbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005craisebox">2.17.18 \raisebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005crule">2.17.19 \rule</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csavebox">2.17.20 \savebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csbox">2.17.21 \sbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cusebox">2.17.22 \usebox</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Special-Characters">2.18 Special Characters</a>
-<li><a href="#Splitting-the-Input">2.19 Splitting the Input</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cinclude">2.19.1 \include</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cincludeonly">2.19.2 \includeonly</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cinput">2.19.3 \input</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">2.20 Starting &amp; Ending</a>
-<li><a href="#Table-of-Contents">2.21 Table of Contents</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005caddcontentsline">2.21.1 \addcontentsline</a>
-<li><a href="#_005caddtocontents">2.21.2 \addtocontents</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">2.22 Terminal Input/Output</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005ctypein">2.22.1 \typein</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ctypeout">2.22.2 \typeout</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Typefaces">2.23 Typefaces</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#Styles">2.23.1 \Styles</a>
-<li><a href="#Sizes">2.23.2 Sizes</a>
-<li><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">2.23.3 Low-level font commands</a>
-</li></ul>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a name="toc_Parameters" href="#Parameters">3 Parameters</a>
-<li><a name="toc_Concept-Index" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>
-<li><a name="toc_Command-Index" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>
-</li></ul>
-</div>
-
-</body></html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index e0ccd6d4546..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.html b/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.html
deleted file mode 100644
index db830bbde27..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6090 +0,0 @@
-<html lang="en">
-<head>
-<title>Untitled</title>
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html">
-<meta name="description" content="Untitled">
-<meta name="generator" content="makeinfo 4.7">
-<link title="Top" rel="top" href="#Top">
-<link href="http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/" rel="generator-home" title="Texinfo Homepage">
-<!--
-This file documents LaTeX2e, a document preparation system. LaTeX2e is a
-macro package for TeX.
-
-This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation, and is for the Texinfo
-that is distributed as part of Version 19 of GNU Emacs. It uses version
-2.134 or later of the texinfo.tex input file.
-
-This is translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The
-pre-translation version was written by George D. Greenwade of Sam
-Houston State University.
-
-The LaTeX 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore <stg@dcs.ed.ac.uk>.
-
-The LaTeX2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen
-<bullestock@dk-online.dk>.
-
-Copyright 1988,1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-Copyright 1994-1996 Torsten Martinsen.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
-resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
-notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
-into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
-except that the sections entitled ``Distribution'' and ``General Public
-License'' may be included in a translation approved by the author instead
-of in the original English.-->
-<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css">
-<style type="text/css"><!--
- pre.display { font-family:inherit }
- pre.format { font-family:inherit }
- pre.smalldisplay { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller }
- pre.smallformat { font-family:inherit; font-size:smaller }
- pre.smallexample { font-size:smaller }
- pre.smalllisp { font-size:smaller }
- span.sc { font-variant:small-caps }
- span.roman { font-family: serif; font-weight: normal; }
---></style>
-</head>
-<body>
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Top"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Overview">Overview</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#dir">(dir)</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#dir">(dir)</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
- <p>LaTeX2e is a document preparation system implemented as a macro package
-for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program.
-
- <p>LaTeX was originally conceived by Leslie Lamport.
-
- <p>This is edition 1.6 of the LaTeX2e documentation.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Overview">Overview</a>: What is LaTeX?
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Commands">Commands</a>: Commands within a LaTeX document.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>: The command line.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>: An alphabetical list of LaTeX commands.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>: An alphabetical list of concepts.
-
- </ul>
-
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- ************** OVERVIEW **************** -->
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Overview"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Commands">Commands</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Top">Top</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="chapter">1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</h2>
-
-<p><a name="index-Overview-of-LaTeX-1"></a><a name="index-LaTeX-overview-2"></a>
-The LaTeX command typesets a file of text using the TeX program and the
-LaTeX Macro package for TeX. To be more specific, it processes an input
-file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that
-describe how the text should be formatted. It produces at least three
-files as output:
-
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li>A &ldquo;Device Independent&rdquo;, or <span class="file">.dvi</span> file. This contains commands that
-can be translated into commands for a variety of output devices. You
-can view the output of LaTeX by using a program such as <code>xdvi</code>,
-which actually uses the <span class="file">.dvi</span> file.
-<li>A &ldquo;transcript&rdquo; or <span class="file">.log</span> file that contains summary information and
-diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input file.
-<li>An &ldquo;auxiliary&rdquo; or <span class="file">.aux</span> file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for
-things such as sectioning.
- </ol>
-
- <p>For a description of what goes on inside TeX, you should consult
-<cite>The TeXbook</cite> by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published
-jointly by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley
-Publishing Company.
-
- <p>For a description of LaTeX, you should consult:
-
- <p><cite>LaTeX: A Document Preparation System</cite>, by Leslie Lamport,
-Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 2nd edition, 1994.
-
- <p><cite>The LaTeX Companion</cite>, by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and
-Alexander Samarin, Addison-Wesley, 1994.
-
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- ************** COMMANDS **************** -->
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Commands"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Overview">Overview</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="chapter">2 Commands</h2>
-
-<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a
-<code>\</code> followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single
-non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, <code>[]</code>, are
-optional while arguments contained in braces, <code>{}</code>, are required.
-
- <p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case
-unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Counters">Counters</a>: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>: Automatic referencing.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>: Define your own commands etc.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>: Some of the various classes available.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#Environments">Environments</a>: Such as enumerate &amp; itemize.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>: How to produce footnotes.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#Layout">Layout</a>: Controlling the page layout.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>: The length commands.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#Letters">Letters</a>: The letter class.
-<li><a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>: How to insert pagebreaks etc.
-<li><a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>: Paragraph commands.
-<li><a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>: Putting remarks in the margin.
-<li><a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>: How to create mathematical formulae.
-<li><a href="#Modes">Modes</a>: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
-<li><a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>: Various styles of page layout.
-<li><a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>: How to section properly.
-<li><a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>: All the associated commands.
-<li><a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>: Special reserved characters.
-<li><a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>: Dealing with big files by splitting.
-<li><a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a>: The formal start &amp; end layouts.
-<li><a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>: How to create a table of contents.
-<li><a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>: User interaction.
-<li><a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>: Such as bold, italics etc.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************************************** -->
-<!-- **** Command's LEVEL2 Starts Here. **** -->
-<!-- *************************************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ******* Counters ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Counters"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Commands">Commands</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.1 Counters</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Counters_002c-a-list-of-3"></a><a name="index-Variables_002c-a-list-of-4"></a>
-Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
-name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or
-command that produces the number, except with no <code>\</code>. (enumi -
-enumiv are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list
-of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control
-numbering.
-
-<pre class="example"> part paragraph figure enumi
- chapter subparagraph table enumii
- section page footnote enumiii
- subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
- subsubsection
-</pre>
- <ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a>: Add a quantity to a counter.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>: Print value of a counter using letters.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>: Print value of a counter using numerals.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>: Print value of a counter using symbols.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>: Define a new counter.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>: Print value of a counter using roman numerals.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>: Set the value of a counter.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>: Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
-<li><a href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>: Use a specified counter in a list environment.
-<li><a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a>: Use the value of a counter in an expression.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- ** \addtocounter ** -->
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddtocounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Counters">Counters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.1 \addtocounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddtocounter-5"></a>
-<code>\addtocounter{counter}{value}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addtocounter</code> command increments the <code>counter</code> by the
-amount specified by the <code>value</code> argument. The <code>value</code>
-argument can be negative.
-
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- ** \alph *** -->
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005calph"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.2 \alph</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005calph-6"></a><a name="index-_005cAlph-7"></a>
-<code>\alph{counter}</code>
-
- <p>This command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be printed in
-alphabetic characters. The <code>\alph</code> command uses lower case
-alphabetic alphabetic characters, i.e., <code>a, b, c...</code> while the
-<code>\Alph</code> command uses upper case alphabetic characters, i.e.,
-<code>A, B, C...</code>.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** \arabic *** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005carabic"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005calph">\alph</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.3 \arabic</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005carabic-8"></a>
-<code>\arabic{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\arabic</code> command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be
-printed in Arabic numbers, i.e., <code>3</code>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \fnsymbol ** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfnsymbol"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.4 \fnsymbol</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfnsymbol-9"></a>
-<code>\fnsymbol{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\fnsymbol</code> command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to
-be printed in a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for
-numbering footnotes.
-
- <p>NB. <code>counter</code> must have a value between 1 and 9 inclusive.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \newcounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewcounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.5 \newcounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewcounter-10"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-creating-11"></a>
-<code>\newcounter{foo}[counter]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\newcounter</code> command defines a new counter named <code>foo</code>.
-The counter is initialized to zero.
-
- <p>The optional argument <code>[counter]</code> causes the counter <code>foo</code> to
-be reset whenever the counter named in the optional argument is
-incremented.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \refstepcounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005crefstepcounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.6 \refstepcounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005crefstepcounter-12"></a>
-<code>\refstepcounter{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\refstepcounter</code> command works like <code>\stepcounter</code>
-See <a href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>, except it also defines the current <code>\ref</code>
-value to be the result of <code>\thecounter</code>.
-
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- ** \roman ** -->
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005croman"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.7 \roman</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005croman-13"></a><a name="index-_005cRoman-14"></a>
-<code>\roman{counter}</code>
-
- <p>This command causes the value of the <code>counter</code> to be printed in
-Roman numerals. The <code>\roman</code> command uses lower case Roman
-numerals, i.e., <code>i, ii, iii...</code>, while the <code>\Roman</code> command
-uses upper case Roman numerals, i.e., <code>I, II, III...</code>.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \stepcounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cstepcounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005croman">\roman</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.8 \stepcounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cstepcounter-15"></a>
-<code>\stepcounter{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\stepcounter</code> command adds one to the <code>counter</code> and
-resets all subsidiary counters.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \setcounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csetcounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.9 \setcounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csetcounter-16"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-setting-17"></a>
-<code>\setcounter{counter}{value}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\setcounter</code> command sets the value of the <code>counter</code> to
-that specified by the <code>value</code> argument.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \usecounter ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cusecounter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvalue">\value</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.10 \usecounter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cusecounter-18"></a>
-<code>\usecounter{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\usecounter</code> command is used in the second argument of the
-<code>list</code> environment to allow the counter specified to be used to
-number the list items.
-
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- ** \value ** -->
-<!-- ************ -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvalue"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Counters">Counters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.1.11 \value</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvalue-19"></a><a name="index-Counters_002c-getting-the-value-of-20"></a>
-<code>\value{counter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\value</code> command produces the value of the <code>counter</code> named
-in the mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an
-integer or number, such as the second argument of a <code>\setcounter</code>
-or <code>\addtocounter</code> command, or in:
-
-<pre class="example"> \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}
-</pre>
- <p>It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Cross References *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Cross-References"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Counters">Counters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.2 Cross References</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Cross-referencing-21"></a>
-One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
-the reader to them, as in &ldquo;See Figure 3 for more details.&rdquo;
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005clabel">\label</a>: Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>: Refer to a page number.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cref">\ref</a>: Refer to a section, figure or similar.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \label ************* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005clabel"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.2.1 \label</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005clabel-22"></a>
-<code>\label{key}</code>
-
- <p>A <code>\label</code> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the
-<code>key</code> the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
-inside a numbered environment assigns that number to the <code>key</code>.
-
- <p>A <code>key</code> can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
-punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are different.
-
- <p>To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is
-common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
-colon. The prefixes conventionally used are
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>cha</code>
-for chapters
-<li><code>sec</code>
-for lower-level sectioning commands
-<li><code>fig</code>
-for figures
-<li><code>tab</code>
-for tables
-<li><code>eq</code>
-for equations
-</ul>
-
- <p>Thus, a label for a figure would look like <code>fig:bandersnatch</code>.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \pageref *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpageref"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cref">\ref</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clabel">\label</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.2.2 \pageref</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpageref-23"></a><a name="index-Cross-referencing-using-page-number-24"></a>
-<code>\pageref{key}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\pageref</code> command produces the page number of the place in the
-text where the corresponding <code>\label</code> command appears. ie. where
-<code>\label{key}</code> appears.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \ref *************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cref"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.2.3 \ref</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cref-25"></a><a name="index-Cross-referencing-using-section-number-26"></a>
-<code>\ref{key}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\ref</code> command produces the number of the sectional unit,
-equation number, ... of the corresponding <code>\label</code> command.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Definitions ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Definitions"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.3 Definitions</h3>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a>: Define a new command.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>: Define a new environment.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>: Define a new theorem-like environment.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a>: Define a new font name.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \newcommand ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewcommand"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.3.1 \newcommand</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewcommand-27"></a><a name="index-Commands_002c-defining-new-ones-28"></a><a name="index-Defining-a-new-command-29"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \newcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
- \newcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
- \renewcommand{cmd}[args]{definition}
- \renewcommand{cmd}[args][default]{definition}
-</pre>
- <p>These commands define (or redefine) a command.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>cmd</code><dd>A command name beginning with a <code>\</code>. For <code>\newcommand</code> it
-must not be already defined and must not begin with <code>\end</code>; for
-<code>\renewcommand</code> it must already be defined.
-
- <br><dt><code>args</code><dd>An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the command
-being defined. The default is for the command to have no arguments.
-
- <br><dt><code>def</code><dd>If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's first
-argument is optional. The default value of the optional argument is
-<code>def</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>definition</code><dd>The text to be substituted for every occurrence of <code>cmd</code>; a
-parameter of the form <code>#n</code> in <code>cmd</code> is replaced by the text of
-the nth argument when this substitution takes place.
-
- </dl>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \newenvironment **** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewenvironment"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.3.2 \newenvironment</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewenvironment-30"></a><a name="index-Environments_002c-defining-31"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-environments-32"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
- \newenvironment{nam}[args][default]{begdef}{enddef}
- \renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}
-</pre>
- <p>These commands define or redefine an environment.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>nam</code><dd>The name of the environment. For <code>\newenvironment</code> there must be
-no currently defined environment by that name, and the command
-<code>\nam</code> must be undefined. For <code>\renewenvironment</code> the
-environment must already be defined.
-
- <br><dt><code>args</code><dd>An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
-the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
-
- <br><dt><code>default</code><dd>If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and <code>default</code>
-gives the default value for that argument.
-
- <br><dt><code>begdef</code><dd>The text substituted for every occurrence of <code>\begin{nam}</code>; a
-parameter of the form <code>#n</code> in <code>cmd</code> is replaced by the text of
-the nth argument when this substitution takes place.
-
- <br><dt><code>enddef</code><dd>The text substituted for every occurrence of <code>\end{nam}</code>. It may
-not contain any argument parameters.
-
- </dl>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \newtheorem ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewtheorem"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.3.3 \newtheorem</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewtheorem-33"></a><a name="index-Theorems_002c-defining-34"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-theorems-35"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]
- \newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}
-</pre>
- <p>This command defines a theorem-like environment.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>env_name</code><dd>The name of the environment to be defined. A string of letters. It must
-not be the name of an existing environment or counter.
-
- <br><dt><code>caption</code><dd>The text printed at the beginning of the environment, right before the
-number. This may simply say &ldquo;Theorem&rdquo;, for example.
-
- <br><dt><code>within</code><dd>The name of an already defined counter, usually of a sectional unit.
-Provides a means of resetting the new theorem counter <strong>within</strong>
-the sectional unit.
-
- <br><dt><code>numbered_like</code><dd>The name of an already defined theorem-like environment.
-
- </dl>
-
- <p>The <code>\newtheorem</code> command may have at most one optional argument.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \newfont *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewfont"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.3.4 \newfont</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewfont-36"></a><a name="index-Fonts_002c-new-commands-for-37"></a><a name="index-Defining-new-fonts-38"></a>
-<code>\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</code>
-
- <p>Defines the command name <code>cmd</code>, which must not be currently
-defined, to be a declaration that selects the font named
-<code>font_name</code> to be the current font.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Document Classes **** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Document-Classes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Environments">Environments</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Definitions">Definitions</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.4 Document Classes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Document-Classes-39"></a><a name="index-Classes-of-document-40"></a><a name="index-article-class-41"></a><a name="index-report-class-42"></a><a name="index-book-class-43"></a><a name="index-letter-class-44"></a><a name="index-_005cdocumentclass-45"></a>
-Valid LaTeX document classes include:
-
- <ul>
-<li>article
-<li>report
-<li>letter
-<li>book
-<li>slides
-</ul>
-
- <p>Other document classes are often available. See <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>, for details.
-They are selected with the following command:
-
- <p><code>\documentclass [options] {class}</code>
-
- <p>All the standard classes (except slides) accept the following options
-for selecting the typeface size (10 pt is default):
-
- <p>10pt, 11pt, 12pt
-
- <p>All classes accept these options for selecting the paper size (default
-is letter):
-
- <p>a4paper, a5paper, b5paper, letterpaper, legalpaper, executivepaper
-
- <p>Miscellaneous options:
-
- <ul>
-<li>landscape &mdash; selects landscape format. Default is portrait.
-<li>titlepage, notitlepage &mdash; selects if there should be a separate title
-page.
-<li>leqno &mdash; equation number on left side of equations. Default is right side.
-<li>fleqn &mdash; displayed formulas flush left. Default is centred.
-<li>openbib &mdash; use &ldquo;open&rdquo; bibliography format.
-<li>draft, final &mdash; mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a rule.
-Default is final.
-</ul>
-
- <p>These options are not available with the slides class:
-
- <ul>
-<li>oneside, twoside &mdash; selects one- or twosided layout. Default is
-oneside, except for the book class.
-<li>openright, openany &mdash; determines if a chapter should start on a
-right-hand page. Default is openright for book.
-<li>onecolumn, twocolumn &mdash; one or two columns. Defaults to one column.
-</ul>
-
- <p>The slides class offers the option <code>clock</code> for printing the time at
-the bottom of each note.
-
- <p>If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a comma.
-
- <p>Additional packages are loaded by a
-
- <p><code>\usepackage[options]{pkg}</code>
-<a name="index-_005cusepackage-46"></a>
-command. If you specify more than one package, they must be separated by
-a comma.
-<a name="index-Packages_002c-loading-47"></a><a name="index-Loading-additional-packages-48"></a>
-Any options given in the <code>\documentclass</code> command that are unknown
-by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
-<code>\usepackage</code>.
-<a name="index-Global-options-49"></a><a name="index-Options_002c-global-50"></a>
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Layout"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<p><a name="index-Layout-commands-51"></a>
-
-<h3 class="section">2.5 Layout</h3>
-
-<p>Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>: Make all text pages the same height.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>: Use one-column layout.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>: Allow text pages of differing height.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>: Use two-column layout.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \flushbottom ******* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cflushbottom"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.5.1 \flushbottom</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cflushbottom-52"></a>
-The <code>\flushbottom</code> declaration makes all text pages the same
-height, adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page.
-
- <p>This is the standard if twocolumn mode is selected.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \onecolumn ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005conecolumn"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.5.2 \onecolumn</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005conecolumn-53"></a>
-The <code>\onecolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces
-single-column output.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \raggedbottom ****** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005craggedbottom"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.5.3 \raggedbottom</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005craggedbottom-54"></a>
-The <code>\raggedbottom</code> declaration makes all pages the height of the
-text on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** \twocolumn ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctwocolumn"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Layout">Layout</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.5.4 \twocolumn</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctwocolumn-55"></a><a name="index-Multicolumn-text-56"></a>
-<code>\twocolumn[text]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\twocolumn</code> declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the optional <code>text</code> argument is present, it
-is typeset in one-column mode.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Environments ******* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Environments"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.6 Environments</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Environments-57"></a><a name="index-_005cbegin-58"></a><a name="index-_005cend-59"></a>
-LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments.
-Each environment begins and ends in the same manner.
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{environment-name}
- .
- .
- .
- \end{environment-name}
-</pre>
- <ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#array">array</a>: Math arrays.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#center">center</a>: Centred lines.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#description">description</a>: Labelled lists.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>: Numbered lists.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>: Sequences of aligned equations.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#equation">equation</a>: Displayed equation.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#figure">figure</a>: Floating figures.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>: Flushed left lines.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#flushright">flushright</a>: Flushed right lines.
-<li><a href="#itemize">itemize</a>: Bulleted lists.
-<li><a href="#letter">letter</a>: Letters.
-<li><a href="#list">list</a>: Generic list environment.
-<li><a href="#minipage">minipage</a>: Miniature page.
-<li><a href="#picture">picture</a>: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
-<li><a href="#quotation">quotation</a>: Indented environment with paragraph indentation.
-<li><a href="#quote">quote</a>: Indented environment with no paragraph indentation.
-<li><a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>: Align text arbitrarily.
-<li><a href="#table">table</a>: Floating tables.
-<li><a href="#tabular">tabular</a>: Align text in columns.
-<li><a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>: Bibliography or reference list.
-<li><a href="#theorem">theorem</a>: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
-<li><a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>: For hand crafted title pages.
-<li><a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>: Simulating typed input.
-<li><a href="#verse">verse</a>: For poetry and other things.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** array ************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="array"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#center">center</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Environments">Environments</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.1 array</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Arrays_002c-math-60"></a><a name="index-array-61"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{array}{col1col2...coln}
- column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{array}
-</pre>
- <p>Math arrays are produced with the array environment. It has a single
-mandatory argument describing the number of columns and the alignment
-within them. Each column, <code>coln</code>, is specified by a single letter
-that tells how items in that row should be formatted.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>c</code> &mdash; for centred
-<li><code>l</code> &mdash; for flush left
-<li><code>r</code> &mdash; for flush right
-</ul>
-
- <p>Column entries must be separated by an <code>&amp;</code>. Column entries may
-include other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array must be terminated
-with the string <code>\\</code>.
-
- <p>Note that the <code>array</code> environment can only be used in math mode, so
-normally it is used inside an <code>equation</code> environment.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** center ************* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="center"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#description">description</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#array">array</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.2 center</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-center-62"></a><a name="index-Centering-text_002c-environment-for-63"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{center}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{center}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>center</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of
-lines that are centred within the left and right margins on the current
-page. Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a>: The declaration form of the <code>center</code> environment.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \centering *** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccentering"></a>Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#center">center</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.2.1 \centering</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccentering-64"></a><a name="index-Centering-text-65"></a><a name="index-Formatting-Text-66"></a>
-This declaration corresponds to the <code>center</code> environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in
-a <code>parbox</code>. The text of a figure or table can be centred on the
-page by putting a <code>\centering</code> command at the beginning of the
-figure or table environment.
-
- <p>Unlike the <code>center</code> environment, the <code>\centering</code> command does
-not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
-units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an
-environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** description ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="description"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#center">center</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.3 description</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-description-67"></a><a name="index-Labelled-lists_002c-creating-68"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{description}
- \item [label] First item
- \item [label] Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{description}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>description</code> environment is used to make labelled lists. The
-<code>label</code> is bold face and flushed right.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** enumerate ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="enumerate"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#description">description</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.4 enumerate</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-enumerate-69"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items_002c-numbered-70"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{enumerate}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{enumerate}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>enumerate</code> environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations
-can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
-be nested within other paragraph-making environments.
-
- <p>Each item of an enumerated list begins with an <code>\item</code> command.
-There must be at least one <code>\item</code> command within the environment.
-
- <p>The <code>enumerate</code> environment uses the <code>enumi</code> through
-<code>enumiv</code> counters (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be
-changed by redefining <code>\theenumi</code> etc.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** eqnarray *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="eqnarray"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#equation">equation</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#enumerate">enumerate</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.5 eqnarray</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-eqnarray-71"></a><a name="index-Equations_002c-aligning-72"></a><a name="index-Aligning-Equations-73"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{eqnarray}
- math formula 1 \\
- math formula 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{eqnarray}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>eqnarray</code> environment is used to display a sequence of
-equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column
-<code>array</code> environment, with consecutive rows separated by <code>\\</code>
-and consecutive items within a row separated by an <code>&amp;</code>.
-
- <p>An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
-<code>\nonumber</code> command.
-
- <p><a name="index-_005clefteqn-74"></a>
-The command <code>\lefteqn</code> is used for splitting long formulas across
-lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
-zero width.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** equation *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="equation"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#figure">figure</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.6 equation</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-equation-75"></a><a name="index-Equations_002c-environment-for-76"></a><a name="index-Formulae_002c-environment-for-77"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{equation}
- math formula
- \end{equation}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>equation</code> environment centres your equation on the page and places
-the equation number in the right margin.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** figure ************* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="figure"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#equation">equation</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.7 figure</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-figure-78"></a><a name="index-Inserting-figures-79"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{figure}[placement]
-
- body of the figure
-
- \caption{figure title}
- \end{figure}
-</pre>
- <p><a name="index-_005ccaption-80"></a>Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-usually &ldquo;floated&rdquo; to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
-Figures will not be split between two pages.
-
- <p>The optional argument <code>[placement]</code> determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly
-put a float:
-
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li><code>h</code> (Here) - at the position in the text where the figure
-environment appears.
-<li><code>t</code> (Top) - at the top of a text page.
-<li><code>b</code> (Bottom) - at the bottom of a text page.
-<li><code>p</code> (Page of floats) - on a separate float page, which is a page
-containing no text, only floats.
- </ol>
-
- <p>The standard report and article classes use the default placement
-<code>tbp</code>.
-
- <p>The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc.
-you wish. The <code>\caption</code> command allows you to title your figure.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** flushleft ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="flushleft"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#flushright">flushright</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#figure">figure</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.8 flushleft</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-flushleft-81"></a><a name="index-Left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-82"></a><a name="index-Ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for-83"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{flushleft}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{flushleft}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>flushleft</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flushed left, to the left-hand margin.
-Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a>: The declaration form of the <code>flushleft</code> environment.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- * \raggedright ** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005craggedright"></a>Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.8.1 \raggedright</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005craggedright-84"></a><a name="index-Ragged-right-text-85"></a><a name="index-Left_002djustifying-text-86"></a><a name="index-Justification_002c-ragged-right-87"></a>
-This declaration corresponds to the <code>flushleft</code> environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in
-a <code>parbox</code>.
-
- <p>Unlike the <code>flushleft</code> environment, the <code>\raggedright</code> command
-does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
-paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an
-environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** flushright ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="flushright"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#itemize">itemize</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#flushleft">flushleft</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.9 flushright</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-flushright-88"></a><a name="index-Ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for-89"></a><a name="index-Right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-90"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{flushright}
- Text on line 1 \\
- Text on line 2 \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{flushright}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>flushright</code> environment allows you to create a paragraph
-consisting of lines that are flushed right, to the right-hand margin.
-Each line must be terminated with the string <code>\\</code>.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a>: The declaration form of the <code>flushright</code> environment.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- * \raggedleft *** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005craggedleft"></a>Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#flushright">flushright</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.9.1 \raggedleft</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005craggedleft-91"></a><a name="index-Ragged-left-text-92"></a><a name="index-Justification_002c-ragged-left-93"></a><a name="index-Right_002djustifying-text-94"></a>
-This declaration corresponds to the <code>flushright</code> environment. This
-declaration can be used inside an environment such as <code>quote</code> or in
-a <code>parbox</code>.
-
- <p>Unlike the <code>flushright</code> environment, the <code>\raggedleft</code> command
-does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats
-paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or <code>\end</code> command (of an
-environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** itemize ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="itemize"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#letter">letter</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#flushright">flushright</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.10 itemize</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-itemize-95"></a><a name="index-_005citem-96"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items-97"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{itemize}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{itemize}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>itemize</code> environment produces a &ldquo;bulleted&rdquo; list. Itemizations
-can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
-be nested within other paragraph-making environments.
-
- <p>Each item of an <code>itemized</code> list begins with an <code>\item</code> command.
-There must be at least one <code>\item</code> command within the environment.
-
- <p>The <code>itemize</code> environment uses the <code>itemi</code> through
-<code>itemiv</code> counters (see <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>). The type of numbering can be
-changed by redefining <code>\theitemi</code> etc.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** letter ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="letter"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#list">list</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#itemize">itemize</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.11 letter</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-letter-98"></a>
-This environment is used for creating letters. See <a href="#Letters">Letters</a>.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** list *************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="list"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#minipage">minipage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#letter">letter</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.12 list</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-list-99"></a><a name="index-Lists-of-items_002c-generic-100"></a>
-The <code>list</code> environment is a generic environment which is used for
-defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in
-documents, but often in macros.
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{list}{label}{spacing}
- \item First item
- \item Second item
- .
- .
- .
- \end{list}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>{label}</code> argument specifies how items should be labelled.
-This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the
-label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands.
-
- <p>The <code>{spacing}</code> argument contains commands to change the spacing
-parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e.,
-<code>{}</code>. This will select all default spacing which should suffice
-for most cases.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** minipage *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="minipage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#picture">picture</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#list">list</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.13 minipage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-minipage-101"></a><a name="index-Footnotes-in-figures-102"></a><a name="index-Figures_002c-footnotes-in-103"></a><a name="index-Minipage_002c-creating-a-104"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{minipage}[position]{width}
- text
- \end{minipage}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>minipage</code> environment is similar to a <code>\parbox</code> command.
-It takes the same optional <code>position</code> argument and mandatory
-<code>width</code> argument. You may use other paragraph-making environments
-inside a minipage.
-
- <p>Footnotes in a <code>minipage</code> environment are handled in a way that is
-particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
-<code>\footnote</code> or <code>\footnotetext</code> command puts the footnote at
-the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it
-uses the <code>mpfootnote</code> counter instead of the ordinary
-<code>footnote</code> counter See <a href="#Counters">Counters</a>.
-
- <p>NOTE: Don't put one minipage inside another if you are using footnotes;
-they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** picture ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="picture"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#quotation">quotation</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#minipage">minipage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.14 picture</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-picture-105"></a><a name="index-Creating-pictures-106"></a><a name="index-Pictures_002c-creating-107"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
- .
- .
- picture commands
- .
- .
- \end{picture}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>picture</code> environment allows you to create just about any kind
-of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You
-tell LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their
-coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and
-a minus sign &mdash; a number like <code>5</code>, <code>2.3</code> or <code>-3.1416</code>. A
-coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the unit length
-<code>\unitlength</code>, so if <code>\unitlength</code> has been set to <code>1cm</code>,
-then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimetres. You
-can change the value of <code>\unitlength</code> anywhere you want, using the
-<code>\setlength</code> command, but strange things will happen if you try
-changing it inside the picture environment.
-
- <p>A position is a pair of coordinates, such as <code>(2.4,-5)</code>, specifying
-the point with x-coordinate <code>2.4</code> and y-coordinate <code>-5</code>.
-Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin,
-which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that
-when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces;
-the parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
-
- <p>The <code>picture</code> environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
-<code>position</code>. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
-produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
-argument's x- and y-coordinates.
-
- <p>The <code>picture</code> environment also has an optional <code>position</code>
-argument, following the <code>size</code> argument, that can change the
-origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
-contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
-coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
-(thereby determining the origin). For example, if <code>\unitlength</code>
-has been set to <code>1mm</code>, the command
-<pre class="example"> \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
-</pre>
- <p>produces a picture of width 100 millimetres and height 200
-millimetres, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
-upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first
-draw a picture, you will omit the optional argument, leaving the origin
-at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by
-shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional argument.
-
- <p>The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the
-picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is;
-LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even
-off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in determining
-how much room to leave for it.
-
- <p>Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the <code>\put</code>
-command. The command
-<pre class="example"> \put (11.3,-.3){...}
-</pre>
- <p>puts the object specified by <code>...</code> in the picture, with its
-reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for
-various objects will be described below.
-
- <p>The <code>\put</code> command creates an <dfn>LR box</dfn>. You can put anything
-in the text argument of the <code>\put</code> command that you'd put into the
-argument of an <code>\mbox</code> and related commands. When you do this, the
-reference point will be the lower left corner of the box.
-
- <p>Picture commands:
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a>: Draw a circle.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>: Draw a dashed box.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>: Draw a frame around an object.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>: Draw a box with a frame around it.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cline">\line</a>: Draw a straight line.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>: Set the line thickness.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>: Draw a box of the specified size.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>: Draw multiple instances of an object.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>: Draw an ellipse.
-<li><a href="#_005cput">\put</a>: Place an object at a specified place.
-<li><a href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>: Make a pile of objects.
-<li><a href="#_005cvector">\vector</a>: Draw a line with an arrow.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \circle ***** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccircle"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.1 \circle</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccircle-108"></a>
-<code>\circle[*]{diameter}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\circle</code> command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
-the specified one as possible. If the <code>*</code>-form of the command is
-used, LaTeX draws a solid circle.
-
- <p>Note that only circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \dashbox **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cdashbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.2 \dashbox</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cdashbox-109"></a>
-Draws a box with a dashed line.
-
- <p><code>\dashbox{dash_length}(width,height){...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\dashbox</code> has an extra argument which specifies the width of
-each dash. A dashed box looks best when the <code>width</code> and
-<code>height</code> are multiples of the <code>dash_length</code>.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \frame ****** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cframe"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.3 \frame</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cframe-110"></a>
-<code>\frame{...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\frame</code> command puts a rectangular frame around the object
-specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left
-corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the
-object.
-
-<!-- ************************** -->
-<!-- *** \framebox (picture) ** -->
-<!-- ************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cline">\line</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframe">\frame</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.4 \framebox</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cframebox-111"></a>
-<code>\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\framebox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\makebox</code>
-command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that
-it creates.
-
- <p>The <code>framebox</code> command produces a rule of thickness
-<code>\fboxrule</code>, and leaves a space <code>\fboxsep</code> between the rule
-and the contents of the box.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \line ******* -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.5 \line</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cline-112"></a>
-<code>\line(x slope,y slope){length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\line</code> command draws a line of the specified <code>length</code> and
-<code>slope</code>.
-
- <p>Note that LaTeX can only draw lines with slope = x/y, where x and y
-have integer values from -6 through 6.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \linethickness * -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005clinethickness"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cline">\line</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.6 \linethickness</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005clinethickness-113"></a>
-<code>\linethickness{dimension}</code>
-
- <p>Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture
-environment to be <code>dimension</code>, which must be a positive length. It
-does not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the
-quarter circles drawn by <code>\oval</code> to form the corners of an oval.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- *** \makebox (picture) ** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.7 \makebox</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-114"></a>
-<code>\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\makebox</code> command for the picture environment is similar to
-the normal <code>\makebox</code> command except that you must specify a
-<code>width</code> and <code>height</code> in multiples of <code>\unitlength</code>.
-
- <p>The optional argument, <code>[position]</code>, specifies the quadrant that
-your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>t</code> - Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
-<li><code>b</code> - Moves the item to the bottom
-<li><code>l</code> - Moves the item to the left
-<li><code>r</code> - Moves the item to the right
-</ul>
-
- <p>See <a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \multiput *** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmultiput"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.8 \multiput</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmultiput-115"></a>
-<code>\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\multiput</code> command can be used when you are putting the same
-object in a regular pattern across a picture.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \oval ***** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005coval"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cput">\put</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.9 \oval</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005coval-116"></a>
-<code>\oval(width,height)[portion]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\oval</code> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
-optional argument, <code>[portion]</code>, allows you to select part of the
-oval.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>t</code> - Selects the top portion
-<li><code>b</code> - Selects the bottom portion
-<li><code>r</code> - Selects the right portion
-<li><code>l</code> - Selects the left portion
-</ul>
-
- <p>Note that the &ldquo;corners&rdquo; of the oval are made with quarter circles with
-a maximum radius of 20 pt, so large &ldquo;ovals&rdquo; will look more like boxes
-with rounded corners.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \put ******** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cput"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005coval">\oval</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.10 \put</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cput-117"></a>
-<code>\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\put</code> command places the item specified by the mandatory
-argument at the given coordinates.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \shortstack * -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cshortstack"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvector">\vector</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cput">\put</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.11 \shortstack</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cshortstack-118"></a>
-<code>\shortstack[position]{... \\ ... \\ ...}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\shortstack</code> command produces a stack of objects. The valid
-positions are:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>r</code> - Moves the objects to the right of the stack
-<li><code>l</code> - Moves the objects to the left of the stack
-<li><code>c</code> - Moves the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \vector ***** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvector"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#picture">picture</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.14.12 \vector</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvector-119"></a>
-<code>\vector(x slope,y slope){length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\vector</code> command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
-length and slope. The <code>x</code> and <code>y</code> values must lie between -4
-and +4, inclusive.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** quotation ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="quotation"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#quote">quote</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#picture">picture</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.15 quotation</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-quotation-120"></a><a name="index-Quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying-121"></a><a name="index-Displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation-122"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{quotation}
- text
- \end{quotation}
-</pre>
- <p>The margins of the <code>quotation</code> environment are indented on the left
-and the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is
-paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a new
-paragraph.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** quote ************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="quote"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#quotation">quotation</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.16 quote</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-quote-123"></a><a name="index-Quoted-text_002c-displaying-124"></a><a name="index-Displaying-quoted-text-125"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{quote}
- text
- \end{quote}
-</pre>
- <p>The margins of the <code>quote</code> environment are indented on the left and
-the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank line
-between text produces a new paragraph.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** tabbing ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="tabbing"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#table">table</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#quote">quote</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.17 tabbing</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-tabbing-126"></a><a name="index-Tab-stops_002c-using-127"></a><a name="index-Lining-text-up-in-columns-using-tab-stops-128"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{tabbing}
- text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
- second row \&gt; \&gt; more \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{tabbing}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>tabbing</code> environment provides a way to align text in columns.
-It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do
-with an ordinary typewriter.
-
- <p>It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant
-and known in advance.
-
- <p>This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the <code>tabular</code>
-environment.
-
- <p>The following commands can be used inside a <code>tabbing</code> enviroment:
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\=</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003d-129"></a>
-Sets a tab stop at the current position.
-
- <br><dt><code>\&gt;</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003e-130"></a>
-Advances to the next tab stop.
-
- <br><dt><code>\&lt;</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_003c-131"></a>
-This command allows you to put something to the left of the
-local margin without changing the margin.
-Can only be used at the start of the line.
-
- <br><dt><code>\+</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_002b-132"></a>
-Moves the left margin of the next and all the
-following commands one tab stop to the right.
-
- <br><dt><code>\-</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028tabbing_0029-133"></a>
-Moves the left margin of the next and all the
-following commands one tab stop to the left.
-
- <br><dt><code>\'</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029-134"></a>
-Moves everything that you have typed so far in the
-current column, i.e. everything from the most recent <code>\&gt;</code>,
-<code>\&lt;</code>, <code>\'</code>, <code>\\</code>, or <code>\kill</code> command, to the right
-of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop.
-
- <br><dt><code>\`</code><dd><a name="index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029-135"></a>
-Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
-stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column
-because there's no tab stop there. The <code>\`</code> command moves all the
-text that follows it, up to the <code>\\</code> or <code>\end{tabbing}</code>
-command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing
-environment. There must be no <code>\&gt;</code> or <code>\'</code> command between
-the <code>\`</code> and the command that ends the line.
-
- <br><dt><code>\kill</code><dd><a name="index-_005ckill-136"></a>
-Sets tab stops without producing
-text. Works just like <code>\\</code> except that it throws away the
-current line instead of producing output for it. The effect of any
-<code>\=</code>, <code>\+</code> or <code>\-</code> commands in that line remain in
-effect.
-
- <br><dt><code>\pushtabs</code><dd><a name="index-_005cpushtabs-137"></a>
-Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for
-temporarily changing tab stop positions in the middle of a
-<code>tabbing</code> environment.
-
- <br><dt><code>\poptabs</code><dd><a name="index-_005cpoptabs-138"></a>
-Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last <code>\pushtabs</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>\a</code><dd><a name="index-_005ca-139"></a>
-In a <code>tabbing</code> environment, the commands <code>\=</code>, <code>\'</code> and
-<code>\`</code> do not produce accents as normal. Instead, the commands
-<code>\a=</code>, <code>\a'</code> and <code>\a`</code> are used.
-</dl>
-
- <p>This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format:
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{tabbing}
- function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
- \&gt; begin \= \+ \\
- \&gt; if \= n $&gt;$ 1 then \+ \\
- fact := n * fact(n-1) \- \\
- else \+ \\
- fact := 1; \-\- \\
- end;\\
- \end{tabbing}
-</pre>
- <!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** table ************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="table"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#tabular">tabular</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#tabbing">tabbing</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.18 table</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-table-140"></a><a name="index-Tables_002c-creating-141"></a><a name="index-Creating-tables-142"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{table}[placement]
-
- body of the table
-
- \caption{table title}
- \end{table}
-</pre>
- <p>Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-usually &ldquo;floated&rdquo; to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
-Tables will not be split between two pages.
-
- <p>The optional argument <code>[placement]</code> determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
-a float:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>h</code> : Here - at the position in the text where the table
-environment appears.
-<li><code>t</code> : Top - at the top of a text page.
-<li><code>b</code> : Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
-<li><code>p</code> : Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page
-containing no text, only floats.
-</ul>
-
- <p>The standard <code>report</code> and <code>article</code> classes use the default
-placement <code>[tbp]</code>.
-
- <p>The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc.,
-you wish. The <code>\caption</code> command allows you to title your table.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** tabular ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="tabular"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#table">table</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.19 tabular</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-tabular-143"></a><a name="index-Lines-in-tables-144"></a><a name="index-Lining-text-up-in-tables-145"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{tabular}
-</pre>
- <p>or
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry &amp; column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
- .
- .
- .
- \end{tabular*}
-</pre>
- <p>These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
-items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional
-arguments consist of:
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>width</code><dd>Specifies the width of the <code>tabular*</code> environment. There must be
-rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified
-width.
-<br><dt><code>pos</code><dd>Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of
-the environment.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>t</code> - align on top row
-<li><code>b</code> - align on bottom row
-</ul>
-
- <br><dt><code>cols</code><dd>Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the
-following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and
-intercolumn material.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>l</code> - A column of left-aligned items.
-<li><code>r</code> - A column of right-aligned items.
-<li><code>c</code> - A column of centred items.
-<li><code>|</code> - A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
-<li><code>@{text}</code> - This inserts <code>text</code> in every row. An @-expression
-suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any
-desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be
-included in text. An <code>\extracolsep{wd}</code> command in an
-@-expression causes an extra space of width <code>wd</code> to appear to the
-left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
-<code>\extracolsep</code> command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this
-extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An
-<code>\extracolsep</code> command can be used only in an @-expression in the
-<code>cols</code> argument.
-<li><code>p{wd}</code> - Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of
-width <code>wd</code>, as if it were the argument of a <code>\parbox[t]{wd}</code>
-command. However, a <code>\\</code> may not appear in the item, except in the
-following situations:
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li>inside an environment like <code>minipage</code>, <code>array</code>, or <code>tabular</code>.
-<li>inside an explicit <code>\parbox</code>.
-<li>in the scope of a <code>\centering</code>, <code>\raggedright</code>, or <code>\raggedleft</code>
-declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an
-environment when used in a <code>p</code>-column element.
- </ol>
-<li><code>*{num}{cols}</code> - Equivalent to <code>num</code> copies of
-<code>cols</code>, where <code>num</code> is any positive integer and <code>cols</code> is
-any list of column-specifiers, which may contain another
-<code>*-expression</code>.
-
- </ul>
-
- </dl>
-
- <p>These commands can be used inside a <code>tabular</code> environment:
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ccline">\cline</a>: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>: Make an item spanning several columns.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cvline">\vline</a>: Draw a vertical line.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \cline **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.1 \cline</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccline-146"></a>
-<code>\cline{i-j}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\cline</code> command draws horizontal lines across the columns
-specified, beginning in column <code>i</code> and ending in column <code>j</code>,
-which are identified in the mandatory argument.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \hline **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccline">\cline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.2 \hline</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chline-147"></a>
-The <code>\hline</code> command will draw a horizontal line the width of the
-table. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and
-between the rows of the table.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- ** \multicolumn * -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmulticolumn"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvline">\vline</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chline">\hline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.3 \multicolumn</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmulticolumn-148"></a>
-<code>\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\multicolumn</code> is used to make an entry that spans several
-columns. The first mandatory argument, <code>cols</code>, specifies the
-number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, <code>pos</code>,
-specifies the formatting of the entry; <code>c</code> for centred, <code>l</code>
-for flushleft, <code>r</code> for flushright. The third mandatory argument,
-<code>text</code>, specifies what text is to make up the entry.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \vline **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvline"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#tabular">tabular</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.19.4 \vline</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvline-149"></a>
-The <code>\vline</code> command will draw a vertical line extending the full
-height and depth of its row. An <code>\hfill</code> command can be used to
-move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an
-@-expression.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** thebibliography **** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="thebibliography"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#theorem">theorem</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#tabular">tabular</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.20 thebibliography</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-thebibliography-150"></a><a name="index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029-151"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
- \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
- .
- .
- .
- \end{thebibliography}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>thebibliography</code> environment produces a bibliography or
-reference list. In the <code>article</code> class, this reference list is
-labelled &ldquo;References&rdquo;; in the <code>report</code> class, it is labelled
-&ldquo;Bibliography&rdquo;.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>widest-label</code>: Text that, when printed, is approximately as wide
-as the widest item label produces by the <code>\bibitem</code> commands.
-</ul>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>: Specify a bibliography item.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>: Refer to a bibliography item.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>: Include an item in the bibliography.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>: Automatic generation of bibliographies.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \bibitem **** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cbibitem"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.1 \bibitem</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cbibitem-152"></a>
-<code>\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\bibitem</code> command generates an entry labelled by <code>label</code>.
-If the <code>label</code> argument is missing, a number is generated as the
-<code>label</code>, using the <code>enumi</code> counter. The <code>cite_key</code> is
-any sequence of letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing
-a comma. This command writes an entry on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file
-containing <code>cite_key</code> and the item's <code>label</code>. When this
-<span class="file">.aux</span> file is read by the <code>\begin{document}</code> command, the
-item's <code>label</code> is associated with <code>cite_key</code>, causing the
-reference to <code>cite_key</code> by a <code>\cite</code> command to produce the
-associated <code>label</code>.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \cite ******* -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccite"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.2 \cite</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccite-153"></a>
-<code>\cite[text]{key_list}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>key_list</code> argument is a list of citation keys. This command
-generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the keys
-in <code>key_list</code> by entries on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file read by the
-<code>\begin{document}</code> command.
-
- <p>The optional <code>text</code> argument will appear after the citation,
-i.e. <code>\cite[p. 2]{knuth}</code> might produce `[Knuth, p. 2]'.
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \nocite ***** -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnocite"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccite">\cite</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.3 \nocite</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnocite-154"></a>
-<code>\nocite{key_list}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\nocite</code> command produces no text, but writes <code>key_list</code>,
-which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the <span class="file">.aux</span> file.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- *** Using BibTeX ***** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Using-BibTeX"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-Using-BibTeX-155"></a><a name="index-BibTeX_002c-using-156"></a><a name="index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029-157"></a><a name="index-_005cbibliographystyle-158"></a><a name="index-_005cbibliography-159"></a>
-If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if
-you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain
-your bibliography, you don't use the <code>thebibliography</code>
-environment. Instead, you include the lines
-
-<pre class="example"> \bibliographystyle{style}
- \bibliography{bibfile}
-</pre>
- <p>where <code>style</code> refers to a file <code>style.bst</code>, which defines how
-your citations will look. The standard styles distributed with BibTeX
-are:
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>alpha</code><dd>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of
-publication.
-<br><dt><code>plain</code><dd>Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
-<br><dt><code>unsrt</code><dd>Like <code>plain</code>, but entries are in order of citation.
-<br><dt><code>abbrv</code><dd>Like <code>plain</code>, but more compact labels.
-</dl>
-
- <p>In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the
-demands of various publications.
-
- <p>The argument to <code>\bibliography</code> refers to the file
-<code>bibfile.bib</code>, which should contain your database in BibTeX
-format. Only the entries referred to via <code>\cite</code> and <code>\nocite</code>
-will be listed in the bibliography.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** theorem ************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="theorem"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.21 theorem</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-theorem-160"></a><a name="index-Theorems_002c-typesetting-161"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{theorem}
- theorem text
- \end{theorem}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>theorem</code> environment produces &ldquo;Theorem x&rdquo; in boldface followed
-by your theorem text.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** titlepage ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="titlepage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#theorem">theorem</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.22 titlepage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-titlepage-162"></a><a name="index-Making-a-title-page-163"></a><a name="index-Title-pages_002c-creating-164"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{titlepage}
- text
- \end{titlepage}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>titlepage</code> environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with no
-printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to be
-numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The
-<code>\today</code> command comes in handy for title pages.
-<a name="index-_005ctoday-165"></a>
-Note that you can use the <code>\maketitle</code> (see <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>) command to
-produce a standard title page.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** verbatim *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="verbatim"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#verse">verse</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#titlepage">titlepage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.23 verbatim</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-verbatim-166"></a><a name="index-Simulating-typed-text-167"></a><a name="index-Typed-text_002c-simulating-168"></a><a name="index-Programs_002c-typesetting-169"></a><a name="index-Computer-programs_002c-typesetting-170"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{verbatim}
- text
- \end{verbatim}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>verbatim</code> environment is a paragraph-making environment that
-gets LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a
-typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect that
-they would on a typewriter.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cverb">\verb</a>: The macro form of the <code>verbatim</code> environment.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- *** \verb ******* -->
-<!-- ***************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cverb"></a>Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h5 class="subsubsection">2.6.23.1 \verb</h5>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cverb-171"></a><a name="index-Verbatim-text-172"></a>
-
- <p><code>\verb char literal_text char</code>
-
- <p><code>\verb*char literal_text char</code>
-
- <p>Typesets <code>literal_text</code> exactly as typed, including special
-characters and spaces, using a typewriter (<code>\tt</code>) type style.
-There may be no space between <code>\verb</code> or <code>\verb*</code> and
-<code>char</code> (space is shown here only for clarity). The <code>*-form</code>
-differs only in that spaces are printed
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** verse ************** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="verse"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#verbatim">verbatim</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Environments">Environments</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.6.24 verse</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-verse-173"></a><a name="index-Poetry_002c-an-environment-for-174"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \begin{verse}
- text
- \end{verse}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>verse</code> environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
-other uses for it.
-
- <p>The margins are indented on the left and the right. Separate the lines
-of each stanza with <code>\\</code>, and use one or more blank lines to
-separate the stanzas.
-
-<!-- ************************************ -->
-<!-- **** LEVEL2 Starts Here again. **** -->
-<!-- ************************************ -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Footnotes ********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Footnotes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Layout">Layout</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Environments">Environments</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.7 Footnotes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Footnotes_002c-creating-175"></a>
-Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be
-produced with one command, the <code>\footnote</code> command. They can also
-be produced with two commands, the <code>\footnotemark</code> and the
-<code>\footnotetext</code> commands. See the specific command for information
-on why you would use one over the other.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a>: Insert a footnote.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>: Insert footnote mark only.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>: Insert footnote text only.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \footnote ******* -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfootnote"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.7.1 \footnote</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfootnote-176"></a>
-<code>\footnote[number]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\footnote</code> command places the numbered footnote <code>text</code> at
-the bottom of the current page. The optional argument, <code>number</code>,
-is used to change the default footnote number. This command can only be
-used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you cannot use it in sectioning
-commands like <code>\chapter</code>, in figures, tables or in a <code>tabular</code>
-environment.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \footnotemark *** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfootnotemark"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.7.2 \footnotemark</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfootnotemark-177"></a>
-The <code>\footnotemark</code> command puts the footnote <code>number</code> in the
-text. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode. The text of
-the footnote is supplied by the <code>\footnotetext</code> command.
-
- <p>This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote markers
-referring to the same footnote by using
-
- <p><code>\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]</code>
-
- <p>after the first <code>\footnote</code> command.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \footnotetext *** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfootnotetext"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.7.3 \footnotetext</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfootnotetext-178"></a>
-<code>\footnotetext[number]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\footnotetext</code> command produces the <code>text</code> to be placed
-at the bottom of the page. This command can come anywhere after the
-<code>\footnotemark</code> command. The <code>\footnotetext</code> command must
-appear in outer paragraph mode.
-
- <p>The optional argument, <code>number</code>, is used to change the default
-footnote number.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ******* Lengths ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Lengths"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Letters">Letters</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Layout">Layout</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.8 Lengths</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Lengths_002c-defining-and-using-179"></a>
-A <code>length</code> is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a
-length as an argument.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a>: Define a new length.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>: Set the value of a length.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>: Add a quantity to a length.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>: Set a length to the depth of something.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>: Set a length to the height of something.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>: Set a length to the width of something.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>: Lengths that are, like, predefined.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \newlength ****** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewlength"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.1 \newlength</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewlength-180"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-defining-a-new-181"></a>
-<code>\newlength{\gnat}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\newlength</code> command defines the mandatory argument,
-<code>\gnat</code>, as a <code>length</code> command with a value of <code>0in</code>. An
-error occurs if a <code>\gnat</code> command already exists.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \setlength ****** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csetlength"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.2 \setlength</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csetlength-182"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-setting-value-of-183"></a>
-<code>\setlength{\gnat}{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\setlength</code> command is used to set the value of a
-<code>length</code> command. The <code>length</code> argument can be expressed in
-any terms of length LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (<code>in</code>),
-millimetres (<code>mm</code>), points (<code>pt</code>), etc.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \addtolength **** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddtolength"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.3 \addtolength</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddtolength-184"></a><a name="index-Lengths_002c-adding-to-185"></a>
-<code>\addtolength{\gnat}{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addtolength</code> command increments a &ldquo;length command&rdquo; by the
-amount specified in the <code>length</code> argument. It can be a negative
-amount.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \settodepth ***** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csettodepth"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.4 \settodepth</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csettodepth-186"></a>
-<code>\settodepth{\gnat}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\settodepth</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command
-equal to the depth of the <code>text</code> argument.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \settoheight ***** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csettoheight"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.5 \settoheight</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csettoheight-187"></a>
-<code>\settoheight{\gnat}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\settoheight</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command
-equal to the height of the <code>text</code> argument.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- **** \settowidth ***** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csettowidth"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.6 \settowidth</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csettowidth-188"></a>
-<code>\settowidth{\gnat}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\settowidth</code> command sets the value of a <code>length</code> command
-equal to the width of the <code>text</code> argument.
-
-<!-- ***************************** -->
-<!-- **** Predefined lengths ***** -->
-<!-- ***************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Predefined-lengths"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.8.7 Predefined lengths</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Lengths_002c-predefined-189"></a><a name="index-Predefined-lengths-190"></a>
-<code>\width</code>
-<a name="index-_005cwidth-191"></a>
-<code>\height</code>
-<a name="index-_005cheight-192"></a>
-<code>\depth</code>
-<a name="index-_005cdepth-193"></a>
-<code>\totalheight</code>
-<a name="index-_005ctotalheight-194"></a>
-These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
-commands See <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>. They specify the natural width etc. of
-the text in the box. <code>\totalheight</code> equals <code>\height</code> +
-<code>\depth</code>. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
-natural size, e.g., say
-
- <p><code>\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}</code>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ******* Letters ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Letters"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Lengths">Lengths</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.9 Letters</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Letters-195"></a><a name="index-Creating-letters-196"></a>
-You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The
-<code>letter</code> document class is designed to make a number of letters at
-once, although you can make just one if you so desire.
-
- <p>Your <span class="file">.tex</span> source file has the same minimum commands as the other
-document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a
-minimum:
-
-<pre class="example"> \documentclass{letter}
- \begin{document}
- ... letters ...
- \end{document}
-</pre>
- <p>Each letter is a <code>letter</code> environment, whose argument is the name
-and address of the recipient. For example, you might have:
-
-<pre class="example"> \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
- \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
- ...
- \end{letter}
-</pre>
- <p>The letter itself begins with the <code>\opening</code> command. The text of
-the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that
-make no sense in a letter, like <code>\chapter</code>, do not work. The letter
-closes with a <code>\closing</code> command.
-
- <p>After the <code>closing</code>, you can have additional material. The
-<code>\cc</code> command produces the usual &ldquo;cc: ...&rdquo;. There's also a similar
-<code>\encl</code> command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands,
-use <code>\\</code> to separate the items.
-
- <p>These commands are used with the <code>letter</code> class:
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddress">\address</a>: Your return address.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>: Cc list.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>: Saying goodbye.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>: List of enclosed material.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>: Your organisation's address.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>: Making address labels.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cname">\name</a>: Your name, for the return address.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>: Saying hello.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>: Adding a postscript.
-<li><a href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>: Your signature.
-<li><a href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>: Allow page breaks.
-<li><a href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>: Disallow page breaks.
-<li><a href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>: Your phone number.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** \address ** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddress"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Letters">Letters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.1 \address</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddress-197"></a>
-<code>\address{Return address}</code>
-
- <p>The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the envelope.
-Separate lines of the address should be separated by <code>\\</code> commands.
-If you do not make an <code>\address</code> declaration, then the letter will
-be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard letterhead.
-(See <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>, for details on your local implementation). If you
-give an <code>\address</code> declaration, then the letter will be formatted
-as a personal letter.
-
-<!-- ************* -->
-<!-- ** \cc ****** -->
-<!-- ************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccc"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddress">\address</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.2 \cc</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccc-198"></a><a name="index-Cc-list-199"></a>
-<code>\cc{Kate Schechter\\Rob McKenna}</code>
-
- <p>Generate a list of other persons the letter was sent to. Each name is
-printed on a separate line.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \closing ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cclosing"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccc">\cc</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.3 \closing</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cclosing-200"></a><a name="index-Letters_002c-ending-201"></a>
-<code>\closing{text}</code>
-
- <p>The letter closes with a <code>\closing</code> command, i.e.,
-<pre class="example"> \closing{Best Regards,}
-</pre>
- <!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \encl ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cencl"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.4 \encl</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cencl-202"></a><a name="index-Enclosed-material-203"></a>
-<code>\encl{CV\\Certificates}</code>
-
- <p>Generate a list of enclosed material.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \location ** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005clocation"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cencl">\encl</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.5 \location</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005clocation-204"></a>
-<code>\location{address}</code>
-
- <p>This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears
-if the <code>firstpage</code> pagestyle is selected.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \makelabels * -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmakelabels"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cname">\name</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clocation">\location</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.6 \makelabels</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmakelabels-205"></a>
-<code>\makelabels{number}</code>
-
- <p>If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet of
-address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \name ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cname"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.7 \name</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cname-206"></a>
-<code>\name{June Davenport}</code>
-
- <p>Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return
-address.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \opening ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005copening"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cname">\name</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.8 \opening</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005copening-207"></a><a name="index-Letters_002c-starting-208"></a>
-<code>\opening{text}</code>
-
- <p>The letter begins with the <code>\opening</code> command. The mandatory
-argument, <code>text</code>, is whatever text you wish to start your letter,
-i.e.,
-<pre class="example"> \opening{Dear Joe,}
-</pre>
- <!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \ps ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cps"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005copening">\opening</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.9 \ps</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cps-209"></a>
-<code>\ps</code>
-
- <p>Use this command before a postscript.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \signature * -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csignature"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cps">\ps</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.10 \signature</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csignature-210"></a>
-<code>\signature{Harvey Swick}</code>
-
- <p>Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the
-space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines should
-be separated by <code>\\</code> commands.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \startbreaks ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cstartbreaks"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csignature">\signature</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.11 \startbreaks</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cstartbreaks-211"></a>
-<code>\startbreaks</code>
-
- <p>Used after a <code>\stopbreaks</code> command to allow page breaks again.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \stopbreaks ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cstopbreaks"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.12 \stopbreaks</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cstopbreaks-212"></a>
-<code>\stopbreaks</code>
-
- <p>Inhibit page breaks until a <code>\startbreaks</code> command occurs.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \telephone * -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctelephone"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Letters">Letters</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.9.13 \telephone</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctelephone-213"></a>
-<code>\telephone{number}</code>
-
- <p>This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
-<code>firstpage</code> pagestyle is selected.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- * Line & Page Breaking ** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Line-_0026-Page-Breaking"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Letters">Letters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.10 Line &amp; Page Breaking</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Page-Breaking-214"></a><a name="index-Line-Breaking-215"></a><a name="index-Page-Formatting-216"></a>
-The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
-translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To
-produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and
-these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do the
-line breaking yourself with the <code>\\</code> command, but LaTeX usually
-does it for you.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005c_005c">\\</a>: Start a new line.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>: Insert explicit hyphenation.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>: Start a new right-hand page.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>: Start a new page.
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>: Enlarge the current page a bit.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>: Be fussy about line breaking.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>: Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>: Break the line.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>: Break the line prematurely.
-<li><a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>: Start a new page.
-<li><a href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>: Don't break the current line.
-<li><a href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>: Don't make a page break here.
-<li><a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>: Please make a page break here.
-<li><a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>: Be sloppy about line breaking.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ****** \\ ******** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005c_005c"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.1 \\</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005c_005c-217"></a><a name="index-New-line_002c-starting-218"></a>
-<code>\\[*][extra-space]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\\</code> command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an
-optional argument, <code>extra-space</code>, that specifies how much extra
-vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a
-negative amount.
-
- <p>The <code>\\*</code> command is the same as the ordinary <code>\\</code> command
-except that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
-
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- ** \- (hyphenation) ** -->
-<!-- ********************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005c_005c">\\</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.2 \-</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029-219"></a><a name="index-Hyphenation_002c-forcing-220"></a>
-The <code>\-</code> command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
-point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find all
-correct hyphenation points. The <code>\-</code> command is used for the
-exceptional cases.
-
- <p>Note that when you insert <code>\-</code> commands in a word, the word will
-only be hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation
-points that LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
-
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- * \cleardoublepage * -->
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ccleardoublepage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.3 \cleardoublepage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ccleardoublepage-221"></a><a name="index-Starting-on-a--right_002dhand-page-222"></a>
-The <code>\cleardoublepage</code> command ends the current page and causes all
-figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
-(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \clearpage **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cclearpage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.4 \clearpage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cclearpage-223"></a><a name="index-Flushing-a-page-224"></a>
-The <code>\clearpage</code> command ends the current page and causes all
-figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \enlargethispage ** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cenlargethispage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.5 \enlargethispage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cenlargethispage-225"></a><a name="index-Enlarge-current-page-226"></a>
-<code>\enlargethispage{size}</code>
-
- <p><code>\enlargethispage*{size}</code>
-
- <p>Enlarge the <code>\textheight</code> for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g. <code>\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}</code> will allow one
-additional line.
-
- <p>The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as
-much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
-<code>\pagebreak</code>.
-
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfussy"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.6 \fussy</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfussy-227"></a>
-<code>\fussy</code>
-
- <p>This declaration (which is the default) makes TeX more fussy about line
-breaking. This can avoids too much space between words, but may produce
-overfull boxes.
-
- <p>This command cancels the effect of a previous <code>\sloppy</code> command. <a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \hyphenation ** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chyphenation"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.7 \hyphenation</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chyphenation-228"></a><a name="index-Hyphenation_002c-defining-229"></a>
-<code>\hyphenation{words}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\hyphenation</code> command declares allowed hyphenation points,
-where <code>words</code> is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which
-each hyphenation point is indicated by a <code>-</code> character.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \linebreak **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005clinebreak"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.8 \linebreak</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005clinebreak-230"></a><a name="index-Line-breaks-231"></a>
-<code>\linebreak[number]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\linebreak</code> command tells LaTeX to break the current line at
-the point of the command. With the optional argument, <code>number</code>,
-you can convert the <code>\linebreak</code> command from a demand to a
-request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
-number, the more insistent the request is.
-
- <p>The <code>\linebreak</code> command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it
-extends to the right margin.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \newline ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.9 \newline</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewline-232"></a><a name="index-New-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029-233"></a>
-The <code>\newline</code> command breaks the line right where it is. It can
-only be used in paragraph mode.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \newpage ****** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewpage"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.10 \newpage</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewpage-234"></a><a name="index-New-Page-235"></a>
-The <code>\newpage</code> command ends the current page.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \nolinebreak *** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnolinebreak"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.11 \nolinebreak</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnolinebreak-236"></a>
-<code>\nolinebreak[number]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\nolinebreak</code> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current
-line at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
-<code>number</code>, you can convert the <code>\nolinebreak</code> command from a
-demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
-higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \nopagebreak ** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnopagebreak"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.12 \nopagebreak</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnopagebreak-237"></a>
-<code>\nopagebreak[number]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\nopagebreak</code> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current
-page at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
-<code>number</code>, you can convert the <code>\nopagebreak</code> command from a
-demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The
-higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \pagebreak **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpagebreak"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.13 \pagebreak</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpagebreak-238"></a><a name="index-Page-break_002c-forcing-239"></a>
-<code>\pagebreak[number]</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\pagebreak</code> command tells LaTeX to break the current page at
-the point of the command. With the optional argument, <code>number</code>,
-you can convert the <code>\pagebreak</code> command from a demand to a
-request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
-number, the more insistent the request is.
-
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csloppy"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.10.14 \sloppy</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csloppy-240"></a>
-<code>\sloppy</code>
-
- <p>This declaration makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This can
-prevent overfull boxes, but may leave too much space between words.
-
- <p>Lasts until a <code>\fussy</code> command is issued. <a href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a>.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- *** Making Paragraphs *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Making-Paragraphs"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.11 Making Paragraphs</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Making-paragraphs-241"></a><a name="index-Paragraphs-242"></a>
-A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines &mdash; lines not
-containing even a <code>%</code>. A blank line should not appear where a new
-paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
-a sectioning command.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cindent">\indent</a>: Indent this paragraph.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>: Do not indent this paragraph.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cpar">\par</a>: Another way of writing a blank line.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \indent ******* -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cindent"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.11.1 \indent</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cindent-243"></a><a name="index-Indent_002c-forcing-244"></a>
-<code>\indent</code>
-
- <p>This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the
-paragraph indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it
-would otherwise be suppressed.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \noindent ***** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnoindent"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpar">\par</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cindent">\indent</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.11.2 \noindent</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnoindent-245"></a><a name="index-Indent_002c-suppressing-246"></a>
-<code>\noindent</code>
-
- <p>When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the paragraph
-indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \par ********** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpar"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.11.3 \par</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpar-247"></a><a name="index-Paragraph_002c-starting-a-new-248"></a>
-Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment
-definitions easier to read.
-
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- *** Margin Notes *** -->
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Margin-Notes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.12 Margin Notes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Margin-Notes-249"></a><a name="index-Notes-in-the-margin-250"></a><a name="index-Remarks-in-the-margin-251"></a>
-The command <code>\marginpar[left]{right}</code> creates a note in the margin.
-The first line will be at the same height as the line in the text where
-the <code>\marginpar</code> occurs.
-
- <p>When you only specify the mandatory argument <code>right</code>, the text will
-be placed
-
- <ul>
-<li>in the right margin for one-sided layout
-<li>in the outside margin for two-sided layout
-<li>in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
-</ul>
-
- <p>By issuing the command <code>\reversemarginpar</code>, you can force the marginal
-notes to go into the opposite (inside) margin.
-
- <p>When you specify both arguments, <code>left</code> is used for the left
-margin, and <code>right</code> is used for the right margin.
-
- <p>The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
-hyphenation by prefixing the first word with a <code>\hspace{0pt}</code>
-command.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Math Formulae ****** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Math-Formulae"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Modes">Modes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.13 Math Formulae</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Math-Formulae-252"></a><a name="index-Formulae_002c-maths-253"></a><a name="index-Math-mode_002c-entering-254"></a><a name="index-_005c_0028-255"></a><a name="index-_005c_0029-256"></a><a name="index-_005c_005b-257"></a><a name="index-_005c_005d-258"></a><a name="index-_0024-259"></a>
-There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>math</code><dd>For Formulae that appear right in the text.
-<br><dt><code>displaymath</code><dd>For Formulae that appear on their own line.
-<br><dt><code>equation</code><dd>The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation
-number in the right margin.
-</dl>
-
- <p>The <code>math</code> environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
-but the <code>displaymath</code> and <code>equation</code> environments can be used
-only in paragraph mode. The <code>math</code> and <code>displaymath</code>
-environments are used so often that they have the following short forms:
-
-<pre class="example"> \(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
-
- \[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
-</pre>
- <p>In fact, the <code>math</code> environment is so common that it has an even
-shorter form:
-
-<pre class="example"> $ ... $ instead of \(...\)
-</pre>
- <p><a name="index-exponent-260"></a>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a>: Also known as exponent or index.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>: Various mathematical squiggles.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a>: Stuff that doesn't fit anywhere else.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ***************************** -->
-<!-- * Subscripts & Superscripts * -->
-<!-- ***************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.13.1 Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Superscript-261"></a><a name="index-Subscript-262"></a><a name="index-_005f-263"></a><a name="index-_005e-264"></a>
-To get an expression <i>exp</i> to appear as a subscript, you just type
-<code>_{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. To get <i>exp</i> to appear as a superscript, you type
-<code>^{</code><i>exp</i><code>}</code>. LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of
-that stuff in the natural way. It even does the right thing when
-something has both a subscript and a superscript.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** Math Symbols ** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Math-Symbols"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.13.2 Math Symbols</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Maths-symbols-265"></a><a name="index-Symbols-266"></a><a name="index-Greek-letters-267"></a>
-
-<!-- ************************ -->
-<!-- * Spacing in Math Mode * -->
-<!-- ************************ -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Spacing-in-Math-Mode"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Spacing_002c-within-Math-mode-268"></a><a name="index-Math-mode_002c-spacing-269"></a>
-
- <p>In a <code>math</code> environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts
-in the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the
-way it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing,
-LaTeX provides the following four commands for use in math mode:
-
- <p><a name="index-_005c_003b-270"></a><a name="index-_005cCOLON-271"></a><a name="index-_005c_002c-272"></a><a name="index-_005c_0021-273"></a>
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li><code>\;</code> - a thick space
-<li><code>\:</code> - a medium space
-<li><code>\,</code> - a thin space
-<li><code>\!</code> - a negative thin space
- </ol>
-
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- * Math Miscellany * -->
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Math-Miscellany"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.13.4 Math Miscellany</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Maths-Miscellany-274"></a>
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\cdots</code><dd><a name="index-_005ccdots-275"></a>Produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are raised to the centre
-of the line.
-
- <br><dt><code>\ddots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cddots-276"></a>Produces a diagonal ellipsis.
-
- <br><dt><code>\frac{num}{den}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfrac-277"></a>Produces the fraction <code>num</code> divided by <code>den</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>\ldots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cldots-278"></a>Produces an ellipsis. This command works in
-any mode, not just math mode.
-
- <br><dt><code>\overbrace{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005coverbrace-279"></a>Generates a brace over text.
-
- <br><dt><code>\overline{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005coverline-280"></a>Causes the argument text to be overlined.
-
- <br><dt><code>\sqrt[root]{arg}</code><dd><a name="index-_005csqrt-281"></a>Produces the square root of its argument. The
-optional argument, <code>root</code>, determines what root to produce, i.e.,
-the cube root of <code>x+y</code> would be typed as <code>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>\underbrace{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cunderbrace-282"></a>Generates text with a brace underneath.
-
- <br><dt><code>\underline{text}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cunderline-283"></a>Causes the argument text to be underlined.
-This command can also be used in paragraph and LR modes.
-
- <br><dt><code>\vdots</code><dd><a name="index-_005cvdots-284"></a>Produces a vertical ellipsis.
-
- </dl>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ******* Modes *********** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Modes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.14 Modes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Modes-285"></a><a name="index-Paragraph-mode-286"></a><a name="index-Math-mode-287"></a><a name="index-Left_002dto_002dright-mode-288"></a><a name="index-LR-mode-289"></a>
-
- <p>When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
-modes:
-
- <ul>
-<li>Paragraph mode
-<li>Math mode
-<li>Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
-</ul>
-
- <p>LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
-different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes.
-Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when
-LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands.
-
- <p>&ldquo;Paragraph mode&rdquo; is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when
-processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into
-lines and breaks the lines into pages. LaTeX is in &ldquo;math mode&rdquo; when
-it's generating a mathematical formula. In &ldquo;LR mode&rdquo;, as in paragraph
-mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of
-words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX
-keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode.
-Even if you put a hundred words into an <code>\mbox</code>, LaTeX would keep
-typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then
-complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.
-
- <p>LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an <code>\mbox</code>
-command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for
-example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box.
-There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
-making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of
-these commands or environments will be called a <code>parbox</code>. When
-LaTeX is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in
-&ldquo;inner paragraph mode&rdquo;. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out
-in, is called &ldquo;outer paragraph mode&rdquo;.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ***** Page Styles ******* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Page-Styles"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Modes">Modes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.15 Page Styles</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Styles_002c-page-290"></a><a name="index-Page-styles-291"></a>
-The <code>\documentclass</code> command determines the size and position of
-the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>: Generate a title page.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>: Set the style used for page numbers.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>: Change the headings/footings style.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a>: Change the headings/footings style for this page.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \maketitle **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmaketitle"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.1 \maketitle</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Title-making-292"></a><a name="index-_005cmaketitle-293"></a>
-<code>\maketitle</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\maketitle</code> command generates a title on a separate title page
-- except in the <code>article</code> class, where the title normally goes at
-the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is
-obtained from the following declarations:
-
- <p>See <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>, for the commands to give the information.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cauthor">\author</a>: Who wrote this stuff?
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>: The date the document was created.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>: A special form of footnote.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005ctitle">\title</a>: How to set the document title.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- * \author * -->
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cauthor"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.2 \author</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cauthor-294"></a><a name="index-Author_002c-for-titlepage-295"></a>
-<code>\author{names}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\author</code> command declares the author(s), where <code>names</code> is
-a list of authors separated by <code>\and</code> commands. Use <code>\\</code> to
-separate lines within a single author's entry &ndash; for example, to give
-the author's institution or address.
-
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- ** \date ** -->
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cdate"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cauthor">\author</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.3 \date</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cdate-296"></a><a name="index-Date_002c-for-titlepage-297"></a>
-<code>\date{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\date</code> command declares <i>text</i> to be the document's date. With
-no <code>\date</code> command, the current date is used.
-
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- * \thanks * -->
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cthanks"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctitle">\title</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdate">\date</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.4 \thanks</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cthanks-298"></a><a name="index-Thanks_002c-for-titlepage-299"></a>
-<code>\thanks{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\thanks</code> command produces a <code>\footnote</code> to the title.
-
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- * \title ** -->
-<!-- *********** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctitle"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.5 \title</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctitle-300"></a><a name="index-Title_002c-for-titlepage-301"></a>
-<code>\title{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\title</code> command declares <code>text</code> to be the title. Use
-<code>\\</code> to tell LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \pagenumbering * -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpagenumbering"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.6 \pagenumbering</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpagenumbering-302"></a><a name="index-Page-numbering-303"></a>
-<code>\pagenumbering{num_style}</code>
-
- <p>Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of <code>num_style</code> are:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>arabic</code> - Arabic numerals
-<li><code>roman</code> - Lowercase Roman numerals
-<li><code>Roman</code> - Uppercase Roman numerals
-<li><code>alph</code> - Lowercase letters
-<li><code>Alph</code> - Uppercase letters
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- ** \pagestyle **** -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cpagestyle"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.7 \pagestyle</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cpagestyle-304"></a>
-<code>\pagestyle{option}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\pagestyle</code> command changes the style from the current page on
-throughout the remainder of your document.
-
- <p>The valid options are:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>plain</code> - Just a plain page number.
-<li><code>empty</code> - Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
-<li><code>headings</code> - Puts running headings on each page. The document
-style specifies what goes in the headings.
-<li><code>myheadings</code> - You specify what is to go in the heading with the
-<code>\markboth</code> or the <code>\markright</code> commands.
-</ul>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a>: Set left and right headings.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a>: Set right heading only.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \markboth ** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmarkboth"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.8 \markboth</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmarkboth-305"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \markboth{left head}{right head}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>\markboth</code> command is used in
-conjunction with the page style <code>myheadings</code> for setting
-both the left and the right heading. You should note that a &ldquo;left-hand
-heading&rdquo; is generated by the last <code>\markboth</code> command before the
-end of the page, while a &ldquo;right-hand heading&rdquo; is generated by the first
-<code>\markboth</code> or <code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is
-one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \markright ** -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL4 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmarkright"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.9 \markright</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmarkright-306"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \markright{right head}
-</pre>
- <p>The <code>\markright</code> command is used in conjunction with the page style
-<code>myheadings</code> for setting the right heading, leaving the left
-heading unchanged. You should note that a &ldquo;left-hand heading&rdquo; is
-generated by the last <code>\markboth</code> command before the end of the
-page, while a &ldquo;right-hand heading&rdquo; is generated by the first
-<code>\markboth</code> or <code>\markright</code> that comes on the page if there is
-one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \thispagestyle * -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cthispagestyle"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.15.10 \thispagestyle</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cthispagestyle-307"></a>
-<code>\thispagestyle{option}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\thispagestyle</code> command works in the same manner as the
-<code>\pagestyle</code> command except that it changes the style for the
-current page only.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ***** Sectioning ******** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Sectioning"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.16 Sectioning</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Sectioning-308"></a><a name="index-_005cchapter-309"></a><a name="index-_005csubsubsection-310"></a><a name="index-_005csubsection-311"></a><a name="index-_005cparagraph-312"></a><a name="index-_005csubparagraph-313"></a>
-Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>\part</code>
-<li><code>\chapter</code> (report and book class only)
-<li><code>\section</code>
-<li><code>\subsection</code>
-<li><code>\subsubsection</code>
-<li><code>\paragraph</code>
-<li><code>\subparagraph</code>
-</ul>
-
- <p>All sectioning commands take the same general form, i.e.,
-
- <p><code>\chapter[optional]{title}</code>
-
- <p>In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory argument
-of the sectioning command can appear in two other places:
-
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li>The table of contents
-<li>The running head at the top of the page
- </ol>
-
- <p>You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places as
-appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the sectioning
-commands have an <code>optional</code> argument that provides the text for
-these other two purposes.
-
- <p>All sectioning commands have <code>*</code>-forms that print a <i>title</i>,
-but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table of
-contents.
-
- <p><a name="index-_005cappendix-314"></a><a name="index-Appendix_002c-creating-315"></a>
-<code>\appendix</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\appendix</code> command changes the way sectional units are
-numbered. The <code>\appendix</code> command generates no text and does not
-affect the numbering of parts.
-The normal use of this command is something like
-
-<pre class="example"> \chapter{The First Chapter}
- ...
- \appendix
- \chapter{The First Appendix}
-</pre>
- <!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- **** Spaces & Boxes ***** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Spaces-_0026-Boxes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.17 Spaces &amp; Boxes</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Spaces-316"></a><a name="index-Boxes-317"></a>
-All the predefined length parameters (see <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a>) can be
-used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
-
-</li></ul>
-<p>Horizontal space
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a>: Stretchable horizontal dots.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>: Stretchable horizontal space.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>: Stretchable horizontal rule.
-<li><a accesskey="4" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>: Fixed horizontal space.
-Vertical space
-<li><a accesskey="5" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-<li><a accesskey="6" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-<li><a accesskey="7" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-<li><a accesskey="8" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-<li><a accesskey="9" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>: Stretchable vertical space.
-<li><a href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>: Fixed vertical space.
-Boxes
-<li><a href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>: Framebox.
-<li><a href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>: Framebox, adjustable position.
-<li><a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>: An environment like \sbox.
-<li><a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>: Box, adjustable position.
-<li><a href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>: Box.
-<li><a href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>: Declare a name for saving a box.
-<li><a href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>: Box with text in paragraph mode.
-<li><a href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>: Raise or lower text.
-<li><a href="#_005crule">\rule</a>: Lines and squares.
-<li><a href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
-<li><a href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
-<li><a href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a>: Print saved text.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \dotfill *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cdotfill"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.1 \dotfill</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cdotfill-318"></a>
-The <code>\dotfill</code> command produces a &ldquo;rubber length&rdquo; that produces dots
-instead of just spaces.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \hfill ***** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chfill"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.2 \hfill</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chfill-319"></a>
-The <code>\hfill</code> fill command produces a &ldquo;rubber length&rdquo; which can
-stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \hrulefill ** -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chrulefill"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.3 \hrulefill</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chrulefill-320"></a>
-The <code>\hrulefill</code> fill command produces a &ldquo;rubber length&rdquo; which can
-stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
-rule.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \hspace **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005chspace"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.4 \hspace</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005chspace-321"></a>
-<code>\hspace[*]{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\hspace</code> command adds horizontal space. The length of the
-space can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e.,
-points, inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space
-with an <code>\hspace</code> command. Adding negative space is like
-backspacing.
-
- <p>LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If you
-don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional <code>*</code>
-argument. Then the space is never removed.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \addvspace ** -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddvspace"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.5 \addvspace</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddvspace-322"></a><a name="index-Vertical-space_002c-inserting-323"></a><a name="index-Space_002c-inserting-vertical-324"></a>
-<code>\addvspace{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addvspace</code> command normally adds a vertical space of height
-length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
-point in the output by a previous <code>\addvspace</code> command, then this
-command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length
-of the total vertical space equal to <code>length</code>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \bigskip *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cbigskip"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.6 \bigskip</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cbigskip-325"></a>
-The <code>\bigskip</code> command is equivalent to
-<code>\vspace{bigskipamount}</code> where <code>bigskipamount</code> is determined
-by the document class.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \medskip *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmedskip"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.7 \medskip</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmedskip-326"></a>
-The <code>\medskip</code> command is equivalent to
-<code>\vspace{medskipamount}</code> where <code>medskipamount</code> is determined
-by the document class.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \smallskip ** -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csmallskip"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.8 \smallskip</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csmallskip-327"></a>
-<code>\smallskip</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\smallskip</code> command is equivalent to
-<code>\vspace{smallskipamount}</code> where <code>smallskipamount</code> is
-determined by the document class.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \vfill ***** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvfill"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.9 \vfill</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvfill-328"></a>
-The <code>\vfill</code> fill command produces a rubber length which can
-stretch or shrink vertically.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \vspace **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cvspace"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.10 \vspace</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cvspace-329"></a>
-<code>\vspace[*]{length}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\vspace</code> command adds vertical space. The length of the space
-can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points,
-inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an
-<code>\vspace</code> command.
-
- <p>LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you
-don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional <code>*</code>
-argument. Then the space is never removed.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \fbox ****** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cfbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.11 \fbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cfbox-330"></a>
-<code>\fbox{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\fbox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\mbox</code>
-command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that
-it creates.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \framebox ** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cframebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.12 \framebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cframebox-331"></a>
-<code>\framebox[width][position]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\framebox</code> command is exactly the same as the <code>\makebox</code>
-command, except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that
-it creates.
-
- <p>The framebox command produces a rule of thickness <code>\fboxrule</code>, and
-leaves a space <code>\fboxsep</code> between the rule and the contents of the
-box.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** lrbox **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="lrbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.13 lrbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-lrbox-332"></a>
-<code>\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}</code>
-
- <p>This is the environment form of <code>\sbox</code>.
-
- <p>The text inside the environment is saved in the box <code>cmd</code>, which
-must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** \makebox ** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmakebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#lrbox">lrbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.14 \makebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmakebox-333"></a>
-<code>\makebox[width][position]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\makebox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to contain
-the <code>text</code> specified. The width of the box is specified by the
-optional <code>width</code> argument. The position of the text within the box
-is determined by the optional <code>position</code> argument.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>c</code> &mdash; centred (default)
-<li><code>l</code> &mdash; flushleft
-<li><code>r</code> &mdash; flushright
-<li><code>s</code> &mdash; stretch from left to right margin. The text must contain
-stretchable space for this to work.
-</ul>
-
- <p>See <a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \mbox ****** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cmbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.15 \mbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cmbox-334"></a>
-<code>\mbox{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\mbox</code> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text
-created by its argument.
-
- <p>Use this command to prevent text from being split across lines.
-
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- ** \newsavebox * -->
-<!-- **************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cnewsavebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.16 \newsavebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cnewsavebox-335"></a>
-<code>\newsavebox{cmd}</code>
-
- <p>Declares <code>cmd</code>, which must be a command name that is not already
-defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \parbox **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cparbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.17 \parbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cparbox-336"></a>
-<code>\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}</code>
-
- <p>A <code>parbox</code> is a box whose contents are created in <code>paragraph</code>
-mode. The <code>\parbox</code> has two mandatory arguments:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>width</code> - specifies the width of the parbox, and
-<li><code>text</code> - the text that goes inside the parbox.
-</ul>
-
- <p>LaTeX will position a <code>parbox</code> so its centre lines up with the centre of
-the text line. The optional <i>position</i> argument allows you
-to line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox (default is top).
-
- <p>If the <i>height</i> argument is not given, the box will have the natural
-height of the text.
-
- <p>The <i>inner-pos</i> argument controls the placement of the text inside the
-box. If it is not specified, <i>position</i> is used.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>t</code> &mdash; text is placed at the top of the box.
-<li><code>c</code> &mdash; text is centred in the box.
-<li><code>b</code> &mdash; text is placed at the bottom of the box.
-<li><code>s</code> &mdash; stretch vertically. The text must contain
-vertically stretchable space for this to work.
-</ul>
-
- <p>A <code>\parbox</code> command is used for a parbox containing a small piece
-of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use
-any of the paragraph-making environments inside a <code>\parbox</code>
-argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones containing a
-paragraph-making environment, you should use a <code>minipage</code>
-environment See <a href="#minipage">minipage</a>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \raisebox ** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005craisebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005crule">\rule</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.18 \raisebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005craisebox-337"></a>
-<code>\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\raisebox</code> command is used to raise or lower text. The first
-mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or
-lowered if it is a negative amount). The text itself is processed in
-<code>LR mode</code>.
-
- <p>Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different
-size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would
-normally think it has. The <code>\raisebox</code> command lets you tell
-LaTeX how tall it is.
-
- <p>The first optional argument, <code>extend-above</code>, makes LaTeX think
-that the text extends above the line by the amount specified. The
-second optional argument, <code>extend-below</code>, makes LaTeX think that
-the text extends below the line by the amount specified.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \rule ****** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005crule"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.19 \rule</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005crule-338"></a>
-<code>\rule[raise-height]{width}{thickness}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\rule</code> command is used to produce horizontal lines. The
-arguments are defined as follows:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>raise-height</code> - specifies how high to raise the rule (optional)
-<li><code>width</code> - specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
-<li><code>thickness</code> - specifies the thickness of the rule (mandatory)
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \savebox *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csavebox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005crule">\rule</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.20 \savebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csavebox-339"></a>
-<pre class="example"> \savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}
-</pre>
- <p>This command typeset <code>text</code> in a box just as for <code>\makebox</code>.
-However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin
-<code>cmd</code>, which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \sbox ****** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005csbox"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.21 \sbox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005csbox-340"></a>
-<code>\sbox{text}</code>
-
- <p>This commands typeset <code>text</code> in a box just as for <code>\mbox</code>.
-However, instead of printing the resulting box, it saves it in bin
-<code>cmd</code>, which must have been declared with <code>\newsavebox</code>.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \usebox **** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cusebox"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.17.22 \usebox</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cusebox-341"></a>
-<code>\usebox{cmd}</code>
-
- <p>Prints the box most recently saved in bin <code>cmd</code> by a
-<code>\savebox</code> command.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ** Special Characters *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Special-Characters"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.18 Special Characters</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Special-Characters-342"></a><a name="index-Characters_002c-special-343"></a><a name="index-Reserved-Characters-344"></a><a name="index-Characters_002c-reserved-345"></a>
-The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called
-&ldquo;special printing characters&rdquo;, or simply &ldquo;special characters&rdquo;.
-
-<pre class="example"> # $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ { }
-</pre>
- <p>Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you are
-doing something special. If you simply want the character to be printed
-just as any other letter, include a <code>\</code> in front of the character.
-For example, <code>\$</code> will produce <code>$</code> in your output.
-
- <p>One exception to this rule is the <code>\</code> itself because <code>\\</code> has
-its own special meaning. A <code>\</code> is produced by typing
-<code>$\backslash$</code> in your file.
-
- <p>Also, <code>\~</code> means `place a tilde accent over the following letter',
-so you will probably want to use <code>\verb</code> instead.
-
- <p><a name="index-_005cbackslash-346"></a><a name="index-_005csymbol-347"></a><a name="index-Accessing-any-character-of-a-font-348"></a>
-In addition, you can access any character of a font once you know its
-number by using the <code>\symbol</code> command. For example, the character
-used for displaying spaces in the <code>\verb*</code> command has the code
-decimal 32, so it can be typed as <code>\symbol{32}</code>.
-
- <p>You can also specify octal numbers with <code>'</code> or hexadecimal numbers
-with <code>"</code>, so the previous example could also be written as
-<code>\symbol{'40}</code> or <code>\symbol{"20}</code>.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ** Splitting the Input ** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Splitting-the-Input"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.19 Splitting the Input</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Splitting-the-input-file-349"></a><a name="index-Input-file_002c-splitting-350"></a>
-
- <p>A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole
-input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into
-several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use,
-there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type
-when you run LaTeX.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005cinclude">\include</a>: Conditionally include a file.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>: Determine which files are included.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#_005cinput">\input</a>: Unconditionally include a file.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \include *** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cinclude"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.19.1 \include</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cinclude-351"></a>
-<code>\include{file}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\include</code> command is used in conjunction with the
-<code>\includeonly</code> command for selective inclusion of files. The
-<code>file</code> argument is the first name of a file, denoting
-<span class="file">file.tex</span>. If <code>file</code> is one the file names in the file list
-of the <code>\includeonly</code> command or if there is no <code>\includeonly</code>
-command, the <code>\include</code> command is equivalent to
-
-<pre class="example"> \clearpage \input{file} \clearpage
-</pre>
- <p>except that if the file <span class="file">file.tex</span> does not exist, then a warning
-message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the
-file list, the <code>\include</code> command is equivalent to <code>\clearpage</code>.
-
- <p>The <code>\include</code> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
-read by another <code>\include</code> command.
-
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- ** \includeonly *** -->
-<!-- ******************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cincludeonly"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005cinput">\input</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cinclude">\include</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.19.2 \includeonly</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cincludeonly-352"></a>
-<code>\includeonly{</code><i>file_list</i><code>}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\includeonly</code> command controls which files will be read in by
-an <code>\include</code> command. <i>file_list</i> should be a comma-separated
-list of filenames. Each filename must match exactly a filename specified
-in a <code>\include</code> command. This command can only appear in the
-preamble.
-
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- ** \input ***** -->
-<!-- *************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005cinput"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.19.3 \input</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005cinput-353"></a>
-<code>\input{file}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\input</code> command causes the indicated <code>file</code> to be read and
-processed, exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current
-file at that point. The file name may be a complete file name with
-extension or just a first name, in which case the file <span class="file">file.tex</span>
-is used.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- *** Starting & Ending *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Starting-_0026-Ending"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.20 Starting &amp; Ending</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Starting-_0026-Ending-354"></a><a name="index-Ending-_0026-Starting-355"></a>
-Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum:
-
-<pre class="example"> \documentclass{class}
- \begin{document}
- ... your text goes here ...
- \end{document}
-</pre>
- <p>where the <code>class</code> selected is one of the valid classes for LaTeX.
-See <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a>, (and see <a href="#Overview">Overview</a>), for details of the
-various document classes available locally.
-
- <p>You may include other LaTeX commands between the <code>\documentclass</code>
-and the <code>\begin{document}</code> commands (i.e., in the `preamble').
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- *** Table of Contents *** -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Table-of-Contents"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.21 Table of Contents</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Table-of-Contents_002c-creating-356"></a>
-
- <p>A table of contents is produced with the
-<code>\tableofcontents</code>
-<a name="index-_005ctableofcontents-357"></a>command. You put the command right where you want the table of contents
-to go; LaTeX does the rest for you. It produces a heading, but it does
-not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the
-table of contents, include a <code>\newpage</code> command after the
-<code>\tableofcontents</code> command.
-
- <p>There are similar commands
-<code>\listoffigures</code>
-<a name="index-_005clistoffigures-358"></a>and
-<code>\listoftables</code>
-<a name="index-_005clistoftables-359"></a> for producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively.
-Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents.
-
- <p>NOTE: If you want any of these items to be generated, you cannot have
-the
-<code>\nofiles</code>
-<a name="index-_005cnofiles-360"></a>command in your document.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a>: Add an entry to table of contents etc.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a>: Add text directly to table of contents file etc.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- * \addcontentsline * -->
-<!-- ******************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddcontentsline"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.21.1 \addcontentsline</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddcontentsline-361"></a>
-<code>\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addcontentsline</code> command adds an entry to the specified list
-or table where:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>file</code> is the extension of the file on which information is to be
-written: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of figures),
-or <code>lot</code> (list of tables).
-<li><code>sec_unit</code> controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one
-of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument:
- <ol type=1 start=1>
-<li><code>toc</code> &mdash; the name of the sectional unit, such as part or subsection.
-<li><code>lof</code> &mdash; figure
-<li><code>lot</code> &mdash; table
- </ol>
-<li><code>entry</code> is the text of the entry.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- * \addtocontents * -->
-<!-- ****************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005caddtocontents"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.21.2 \addtocontents</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005caddtocontents-362"></a>
-<code>\addtocontents{file}{text}</code>
-
- <p>The <code>\addtocontents</code> command adds text (or formatting commands) directly
-to the file that generates the table of contents or list of figures or
-tables.
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>file</code> is the extension of the file on which information is to be
-written: <code>toc</code> (table of contents), <code>lof</code> (list of figures),
-or <code>lot</code> (list of tables).
-<li><code>text</code> is the information to be written.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- * Terminal Input/Output * -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Terminal-Input_002fOutput"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.22 Terminal Input/Output</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Input_002fOutput-363"></a><a name="index-Terminal-Input_002fOutput-364"></a>
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a>: Read text from the terminal.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a>: Write text to the terminal.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \typein **** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctypein"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.22.1 \typein</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctypein-365"></a>
-<code>\typein[cmd]{msg}</code>
-
- <p>Prints <code>msg</code> on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for
-you to type a line of input, ending with return. If the <code>cmd</code>
-argument is missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been
-included in the input file in place of the <code>\typein</code> command. If
-the <code>cmd</code> argument is present, it must be a command name. This
-command name is then defined or redefined to be the typed input.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- * \typeout *** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="_005ctypeout"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.22.2 \typeout</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-_005ctypeout-366"></a>
-<code>\typeout{msg}</code>
-
- <p>Prints <code>msg</code> on the terminal and in the <code>log</code> file. Commands
-in <code>msg</code> that are defined with <code>\newcommand</code> or
-<code>\renewcommand</code> are replaced by their definitions before being
-printed.
-
- <p>LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as
-a single space and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to
-<code>msg</code>. A <code>\space</code> command in <code>msg</code> causes a single space
-to be printed. A <code>^^J</code> in <code>msg</code> prints a newline.
-
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- ***** Typefaces ********* -->
-<!-- ************************* -->
-<!-- LEVEL2 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Typefaces"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Commands">Commands</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h3 class="section">2.23 Typefaces</h3>
-
-<p><a name="index-Typefaces-367"></a><a name="index-Fonts-368"></a>
-The <code>typeface</code> is specified by giving the &ldquo;size&rdquo; and &ldquo;style&rdquo;. A
-typeface is also called a &ldquo;font&rdquo;.
-
-<ul class="menu">
-<li><a accesskey="1" href="#Styles">Styles</a>: Select roman, italics etc.
-<li><a accesskey="2" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>: Select point size.
-<li><a accesskey="3" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a>: Commands for wizards.
-</ul>
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** Styles **** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Styles"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.23.1 \Styles</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Font-Styles-369"></a><a name="index-Typeface-Styles-370"></a><a name="index-Styles-of-text-371"></a>
-
- <p>The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
-
- <p>These commands are used like <code>\textit{italics text}</code>. The
-corresponding command in parenthesis is the &ldquo;declaration form&rdquo;, which
-takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
-next type style command or the end of the current group.
-
- <p>The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say
-<code>\sffamily\bfseries</code> to get sans serif boldface.
-
- <p>You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; e.g.
-<code>\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}</code>.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\textrm (\rmfamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextrm-372"></a><a name="index-_005crmfamily-373"></a>Roman.
-<br><dt><code>\textit (\itshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextit-374"></a><a name="index-_005citshape-375"></a><br><dt><code>\emph</code><dd><a name="index-_005cemph-376"></a>Emphasis (toggles between \textit and \textrm).
-<br><dt><code>\textmd (\mdseries)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextmd-377"></a><a name="index-_005cmdseries-378"></a>Medium weight (default). The opposite of boldface.
-<br><dt><code>\textbf (\bfseries)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextbf-379"></a><a name="index-_005cbfseries-380"></a>Boldface.
-<br><dt><code>\textup (\upshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextup-381"></a><a name="index-_005cupshape-382"></a>Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
-<br><dt><code>\textsl (\slshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsl-383"></a><a name="index-_005cslshape-384"></a>Slanted.
-<br><dt><code>\textsf (\sffamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsf-385"></a><a name="index-_005csffamily-386"></a>Sans serif.
-<br><dt><code>\textsc (\scshape)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextsc-387"></a><a name="index-_005cscshape-388"></a>Small caps.
-<br><dt><code>\texttt (\ttfamily)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctexttt-389"></a><a name="index-_005cttfamily-390"></a>Typewriter.
-<br><dt><code>\textnormal (\normalfont)</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctextnormal-391"></a><a name="index-_005cnormalfont-392"></a>Main document font.
-<br><dt><code>\mathrm</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathrm-393"></a>Roman, for use in math mode.
-<br><dt><code>\mathbf</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathbf-394"></a>Boldface, for use in math mode.
-<br><dt><code>\mathsf</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathsf-395"></a>Sans serif, for use in math mode.
-<br><dt><code>\mathtt</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathtt-396"></a>Typewriter, for use in math mode.
-<br><dt><code>\mathit</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathit-397"></a>Italics, for use in math mode, e.g. variable names with several letters.
-<br><dt><code>\mathnormal</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathnormal-398"></a>For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
-<br><dt><code>\mathcal</code><dd><a name="index-_005cmathcal-399"></a>`Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
-</dl>
-
- <p>In addition, the command
-<code>\mathversion{bold}</code>
-<a name="index-_005cmathversion-400"></a>can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in
-formulas. <code>\mathversion{normal}</code> restores the default.
-
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- ** Sizes ***** -->
-<!-- ************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Sizes"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Styles">Styles</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.23.2 Sizes</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Font-Sizes-401"></a><a name="index-Typeface-Sizes-402"></a><a name="index-Sizes-of-text-403"></a>
-
- <p>The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX.
-
- <p>The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of the
-declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of
-the current group.
-
- <p>You can also use the environment form of these commands; e.g.
-<code>\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}</code>.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\tiny</code><dd><a name="index-_005ctiny-404"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\scriptsize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cscriptsize-405"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\footnotesize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfootnotesize-406"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\small</code><dd><a name="index-_005csmall-407"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\normalsize</code><dd><a name="index-_005cnormalsize-408"></a>(default)
-
- <br><dt><code>\large</code><dd><a name="index-_005clarge-409"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\Large</code><dd><a name="index-_005cLarge-410"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\LARGE</code><dd><a name="index-_005cLARGE-411"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\huge</code><dd><a name="index-_005chuge-412"></a>
-<br><dt><code>\Huge</code><dd><a name="index-_005cHuge-413"></a></dl>
-
-<!-- ******************************** -->
-<!-- ** Low-level font commands ***** -->
-<!-- ******************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL3 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Low_002dlevel-font-commands"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Sizes">Sizes</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h4 class="subsection">2.23.3 Low-level font commands</h4>
-
-<p><a name="index-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-414"></a><a name="index-Font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel-415"></a>
-These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
-packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
-ones. For full details, you should consult Chapter 7 of <cite>The LaTeX
-Companion</cite>.
-
- <dl>
-<dt><code>\fontencoding{enc}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontencoding-416"></a>Select font encoding. Valid encodings include <code>OT1</code> and <code>T1</code>.
-
- <br><dt><code>\fontfamily{family}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontfamily-417"></a>Select font family. Valid families include:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>cmr</code> for Computer Modern Roman
-<li><code>cmss</code> for Computer Modern Sans Serif
-<li><code>cmtt</code> for Computer Modern Typewriter
-</ul>
-
- <p>and numerous others.
-
- <br><dt><code>\fontseries{series}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontseries-418"></a>Select font series. Valid series include:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>m</code> Medium (normal)
-<li><code>b</code> Bold
-<li><code>c</code> Condensed
-<li><code>bc</code> Bold condensed
-<li><code>bx</code> Bold extended
-</ul>
-
- <p>and various other combinations.
-
- <br><dt><code>\fontshape{shape}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontshape-419"></a>Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
-
- <ul>
-<li><code>n</code> Upright (normal)
-<li><code>it</code> Italic
-<li><code>sl</code> Slanted (oblique)
-<li><code>sc</code> Small caps
-<li><code>ui</code> Upright italics
-<li><code>ol</code> Outline
-</ul>
-
- <p>The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
-
- <br><dt><code>\fontsize{size}{skip}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cfontsize-420"></a>Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to; the
-second is the <code>\baselineskip</code> to use. The unit of both parameters
-defaults to pt. A rule of thumb is that the baselineskip should be 1.2
-times the font size.
-
- <br><dt><code>\selectfont</code><dd><a name="index-_005cselectfont-421"></a>The changes made by calling the four font commands described above do
-not come into effect until <code>\selectfont</code> is called.
-
- <br><dt><code>\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}</code><dd><a name="index-_005cusefont-422"></a>Equivalent to calling <code>\fontencoding</code>, <code>\fontfamily</code>,
-<code>\fontseries</code> and <code>\fontshape</code> with the given parameters, followed by <code>\selectfont</code>.
-</dl>
-
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- ************* PARAMETERS *************** -->
-<!-- **************************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Parameters"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Commands">Commands</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="chapter">3 Parameters</h2>
-
-<p>The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; TeX
-uses <span class="file">.tex</span> as a default file extension. If you omit the input file
-entirely, TeX accepts input from the terminal. You specify command
-options by supplying a string as a parameter to the command; e.g.
-
- <p><code>latex ``\scrollmode\input foo.tex''</code>
-
- <p>will process <span class="file">foo.tex</span> without pausing after every error.
-
- <p>Output files are always created in the current directory. When you fail
-to specify an input file name, TeX bases the output names on the file
-specification associated with the logical name TEX_OUTPUT, typically
-<code>texput.log</code>.
-
-<!-- *************************** -->
-<!-- ******* INDICES ******** -->
-<!-- *************************** -->
-<!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Concept-Index"></a>Next:&nbsp;<a rel="next" accesskey="n" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>,
-Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Parameters">Parameters</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="unnumbered">Concept Index</h2>
-
-<ul class="index-cp" compact>
-<li><a href="#index-Accessing-any-character-of-a-font-348">Accessing any character of a font</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Aligning-Equations-73">Aligning Equations</a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Appendix_002c-creating-315">Appendix, creating</a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Arrays_002c-math-60">Arrays, math</a>: <a href="#array">array</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-article-class-41">article class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Author_002c-for-titlepage-295">Author, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cauthor">\author</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028automatically_0029-157">Bibliography, creating (automatically)</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Bibliography_002c-creating-_0028manually_0029-151">Bibliography, creating (manually)</a>: <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-BibTeX_002c-using-156">BibTeX, using</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-book-class-43">book class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Boxes-317">Boxes</a>: <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Cc-list-199">Cc list</a>: <a href="#_005ccc">\cc</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Centering-text-65">Centering text</a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Centering-text_002c-environment-for-63">Centering text, environment for</a>: <a href="#center">center</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Characters_002c-reserved-345">Characters, reserved</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Characters_002c-special-343">Characters, special</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Classes-of-document-40">Classes of document</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Commands_002c-defining-new-ones-28">Commands, defining new ones</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Computer-programs_002c-typesetting-170">Computer programs, typesetting</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-a-list-of-3">Counters, a list of</a>: <a href="#Counters">Counters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-creating-11">Counters, creating</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-getting-the-value-of-20">Counters, getting the value of</a>: <a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Counters_002c-setting-17">Counters, setting</a>: <a href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Creating-letters-196">Creating letters</a>: <a href="#Letters">Letters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Creating-pictures-106">Creating pictures</a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Creating-tables-142">Creating tables</a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-21">Cross referencing</a>: <a href="#Cross-References">Cross References</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-using-page-number-24">Cross referencing using page number</a>: <a href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Cross-referencing-using-section-number-26">Cross referencing using section number</a>: <a href="#_005cref">\ref</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Date_002c-for-titlepage-297">Date, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cdate">\date</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Defining-a-new-command-29">Defining a new command</a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-environments-32">Defining new environments</a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-fonts-38">Defining new fonts</a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Defining-new-theorems-35">Defining new theorems</a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Displaying-quoted-text-125">Displaying quoted text</a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Displaying-quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation-122">Displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation</a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Document-Classes-39">Document Classes</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Enclosed-material-203">Enclosed material</a>: <a href="#_005cencl">\encl</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ending-_0026-Starting-355">Ending &amp; Starting</a>: <a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Enlarge-current-page-226">Enlarge current page</a>: <a href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Environments-57">Environments</a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Environments_002c-defining-31">Environments, defining</a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Equations_002c-aligning-72">Equations, aligning</a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Equations_002c-environment-for-76">Equations, environment for</a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-exponent-260">exponent</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Figures_002c-footnotes-in-103">Figures, footnotes in</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Flushing-a-page-224">Flushing a page</a>: <a href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Font-commands_002c-low_002dlevel-415">Font commands, low-level</a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Font-Sizes-401">Font Sizes</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Font-Styles-369">Font Styles</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Fonts-368">Fonts</a>: <a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Fonts_002c-new-commands-for-37">Fonts, new commands for</a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Footnotes-in-figures-102">Footnotes in figures</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Footnotes_002c-creating-175">Footnotes, creating</a>: <a href="#Footnotes">Footnotes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Formatting-Text-66">Formatting Text</a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Formulae_002c-environment-for-77">Formulae, environment for</a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Formulae_002c-maths-253">Formulae, maths</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Global-options-49">Global options</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Greek-letters-267">Greek letters</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Hyphenation_002c-defining-229">Hyphenation, defining</a>: <a href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Hyphenation_002c-forcing-220">Hyphenation, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Indent_002c-forcing-244">Indent, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005cindent">\indent</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Indent_002c-suppressing-246">Indent, suppressing</a>: <a href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Input-file_002c-splitting-350">Input file, splitting</a>: <a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Input_002fOutput-363">Input/Output</a>: <a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Inserting-figures-79">Inserting figures</a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Justification_002c-ragged-left-93">Justification, ragged left</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Justification_002c-ragged-right-87">Justification, ragged right</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Labelled-lists_002c-creating-68">Labelled lists, creating</a>: <a href="#description">description</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-LaTeX-overview-2">LaTeX overview</a>: <a href="#Overview">Overview</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Layout-commands-51">Layout commands</a>: <a href="#Layout">Layout</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Left_002djustifying-text-86">Left-justifying text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Left_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-82">Left-justifying text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Left_002dto_002dright-mode-288">Left-to-right mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-adding-to-185">Lengths, adding to</a>: <a href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-defining-a-new-181">Lengths, defining a new</a>: <a href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-defining-and-using-179">Lengths, defining and using</a>: <a href="#Lengths">Lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-predefined-189">Lengths, predefined</a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lengths_002c-setting-value-of-183">Lengths, setting value of</a>: <a href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-letter-class-44">letter class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Letters-195">Letters</a>: <a href="#Letters">Letters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Letters_002c-ending-201">Letters, ending</a>: <a href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Letters_002c-starting-208">Letters, starting</a>: <a href="#_005copening">\opening</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Line-Breaking-215">Line Breaking</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Line-breaks-231">Line breaks</a>: <a href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lines-in-tables-144">Lines in tables</a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lining-text-up-in-columns-using-tab-stops-128">Lining text up in columns using tab stops</a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lining-text-up-in-tables-145">Lining text up in tables</a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items-97">Lists of items</a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items_002c-generic-100">Lists of items, generic</a>: <a href="#list">list</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Lists-of-items_002c-numbered-70">Lists of items, numbered</a>: <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Loading-additional-packages-48">Loading additional packages</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Low_002dlevel-font-commands-414">Low-level font commands</a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-LR-mode-289">LR mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Making-a-title-page-163">Making a title page</a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Making-paragraphs-241">Making paragraphs</a>: <a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Margin-Notes-249">Margin Notes</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Math-Formulae-252">Math Formulae</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Math-mode-287">Math mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Math-mode_002c-entering-254">Math mode, entering</a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Math-mode_002c-spacing-269">Math mode, spacing</a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Maths-Miscellany-274">Maths Miscellany</a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Maths-symbols-265">Maths symbols</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Minipage_002c-creating-a-104">Minipage, creating a</a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Modes-285">Modes</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Multicolumn-text-56">Multicolumn text</a>: <a href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-New-line_002c-starting-218">New line, starting</a>: <a href="#_005c_005c">\\</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-New-line_002c-starting-_0028paragraph-mode_0029-233">New line, starting (paragraph mode)</a>: <a href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-New-Page-235">New Page</a>: <a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Notes-in-the-margin-250">Notes in the margin</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Options_002c-global-50">Options, global</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Overview-of-LaTeX-1">Overview of LaTeX</a>: <a href="#Overview">Overview</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Packages_002c-loading-47">Packages, loading</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-break_002c-forcing-239">Page break, forcing</a>: <a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-Breaking-214">Page Breaking</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-Formatting-216">Page Formatting</a>: <a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">Line &amp; Page Breaking</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-numbering-303">Page numbering</a>: <a href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Page-styles-291">Page styles</a>: <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Paragraph-mode-286">Paragraph mode</a>: <a href="#Modes">Modes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Paragraph_002c-starting-a-new-248">Paragraph, starting a new</a>: <a href="#_005cpar">\par</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Paragraphs-242">Paragraphs</a>: <a href="#Making-Paragraphs">Making Paragraphs</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Pictures_002c-creating-107">Pictures, creating</a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Poetry_002c-an-environment-for-174">Poetry, an environment for</a>: <a href="#verse">verse</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Predefined-lengths-190">Predefined lengths</a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Programs_002c-typesetting-169">Programs, typesetting</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Quoted-text-with-paragraph-indentation_002c-displaying-121">Quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying</a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Quoted-text_002c-displaying-124">Quoted text, displaying</a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ragged-left-text-92">Ragged left text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ragged-left-text_002c-environment-for-89">Ragged left text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ragged-right-text-85">Ragged right text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Ragged-right-text_002c-environment-for-83">Ragged right text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Remarks-in-the-margin-251">Remarks in the margin</a>: <a href="#Margin-Notes">Margin Notes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-report-class-42">report class</a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Reserved-Characters-344">Reserved Characters</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Right_002djustifying-text-94">Right-justifying text</a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Right_002djustifying-text_002c-environment-for-90">Right-justifying text, environment for</a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Sectioning-308">Sectioning</a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Simulating-typed-text-167">Simulating typed text</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Sizes-of-text-403">Sizes of text</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Space_002c-inserting-vertical-324">Space, inserting vertical</a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Spaces-316">Spaces</a>: <a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">Spaces &amp; Boxes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Spacing_002c-within-Math-mode-268">Spacing, within Math mode</a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Special-Characters-342">Special Characters</a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Splitting-the-input-file-349">Splitting the input file</a>: <a href="#Splitting-the-Input">Splitting the Input</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Starting-_0026-Ending-354">Starting &amp; Ending</a>: <a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">Starting &amp; Ending</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Starting-on-a--right_002dhand-page-222">Starting on a right-hand page</a>: <a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Styles-of-text-371">Styles of text</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Styles_002c-page-290">Styles, page</a>: <a href="#Page-Styles">Page Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Subscript-262">Subscript</a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Superscript-261">Superscript</a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Symbols-266">Symbols</a>: <a href="#Math-Symbols">Math Symbols</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Tab-stops_002c-using-127">Tab stops, using</a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Table-of-Contents_002c-creating-356">Table of Contents, creating</a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Tables_002c-creating-141">Tables, creating</a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Terminal-Input_002fOutput-364">Terminal Input/Output</a>: <a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">Terminal Input/Output</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Thanks_002c-for-titlepage-299">Thanks, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Theorems_002c-defining-34">Theorems, defining</a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Theorems_002c-typesetting-161">Theorems, typesetting</a>: <a href="#theorem">theorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Title-making-292">Title making</a>: <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Title-pages_002c-creating-164">Title pages, creating</a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Title_002c-for-titlepage-301">Title, for titlepage</a>: <a href="#_005ctitle">\title</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Typed-text_002c-simulating-168">Typed text, simulating</a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Typeface-Sizes-402">Typeface Sizes</a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Typeface-Styles-370">Typeface Styles</a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Typefaces-367">Typefaces</a>: <a href="#Typefaces">Typefaces</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Using-BibTeX-155">Using BibTeX</a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Variables_002c-a-list-of-4">Variables, a list of</a>: <a href="#Counters">Counters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Verbatim-text-172">Verbatim text</a>: <a href="#_005cverb">\verb</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-Vertical-space_002c-inserting-323">Vertical space, inserting</a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li>
-</ul><!-- LEVEL1 -->
-<div class="node">
-<p><hr>
-<a name="Command-Index"></a>Previous:&nbsp;<a rel="previous" accesskey="p" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>,
-Up:&nbsp;<a rel="up" accesskey="u" href="#Top">Top</a>
-<br>
-</div>
-
-<!-- node-name, next, previous, up -->
-<h2 class="unnumbered">Command Index</h2>
-
-
-
-<ul class="index-fn" compact>
-<li><a href="#index-_0024-259"><code>$</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0021-273"><code>\!</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0027-_0028tabbing_0029-134"><code>\' (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0028-255"><code>\(</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0029-256"><code>\)</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_002b-132"><code>\+</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_002c-272"><code>\,</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029-219"><code>\- (hyphenation)</code></a>: <a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">\- (hyphenation)</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_002d-_0028tabbing_0029-133"><code>\- (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_003b-270"><code>\;</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_003c-131"><code>\&lt;</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_003d-129"><code>\=</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_003e-130"><code>\&gt;</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_005b-257"><code>\[</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_005c-217"><code>\\</code></a>: <a href="#_005c_005c">\\</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_005d-258"><code>\]</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Formulae">Math Formulae</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005c_0060-_0028tabbing_0029-135"><code>\` (tabbing)</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ca-139"><code>\a</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddcontentsline-361"><code>\addcontentsline</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddcontentsline">\addcontentsline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddress-197"><code>\address</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddress">\address</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddtocontents-362"><code>\addtocontents</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtocontents">\addtocontents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddtocounter-5"><code>\addtocounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtocounter">\addtocounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddtolength-184"><code>\addtolength</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddtolength">\addtolength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005caddvspace-322"><code>\addvspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005caddvspace">\addvspace</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cAlph-7"><code>\Alph</code></a>: <a href="#_005calph">\alph</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005calph-6"><code>\alph</code></a>: <a href="#_005calph">\alph</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cappendix-314"><code>\appendix</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005carabic-8"><code>\arabic</code></a>: <a href="#_005carabic">\arabic</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cauthor-294"><code>\author</code></a>: <a href="#_005cauthor">\author</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbackslash-346"><code>\backslash</code></a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbegin-58"><code>\begin</code></a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbfseries-380"><code>\bfseries</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbibitem-152"><code>\bibitem</code></a>: <a href="#_005cbibitem">\bibitem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbibliography-159"><code>\bibliography</code></a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbibliographystyle-158"><code>\bibliographystyle</code></a>: <a href="#Using-BibTeX">Using BibTeX</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cbigskip-325"><code>\bigskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005cbigskip">\bigskip</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccaption-80"><code>\caption</code></a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccc-198"><code>\cc</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccc">\cc</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccdots-275"><code>\cdots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccentering-64"><code>\centering</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccentering">\centering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cchapter-309"><code>\chapter</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccircle-108"><code>\circle</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccircle">\circle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccite-153"><code>\cite</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccite">\cite</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccleardoublepage-221"><code>\cleardoublepage</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cclearpage-223"><code>\clearpage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cclearpage">\clearpage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ccline-146"><code>\cline</code></a>: <a href="#_005ccline">\cline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cclosing-200"><code>\closing</code></a>: <a href="#_005cclosing">\closing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cCOLON-271"><code>\COLON</code></a>: <a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">Spacing in Math Mode</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdashbox-109"><code>\dashbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdashbox">\dashbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdate-296"><code>\date</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdate">\date</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cddots-276"><code>\ddots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdepth-193"><code>\depth</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdocumentclass-45"><code>\documentclass</code></a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cdotfill-318"><code>\dotfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005cdotfill">\dotfill</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cemph-376"><code>\emph</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cencl-202"><code>\encl</code></a>: <a href="#_005cencl">\encl</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cend-59"><code>\end</code></a>: <a href="#Environments">Environments</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cenlargethispage-225"><code>\enlargethispage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cenlargethispage">\enlargethispage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfbox-330"><code>\fbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfbox">\fbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cflushbottom-52"><code>\flushbottom</code></a>: <a href="#_005cflushbottom">\flushbottom</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfnsymbol-9"><code>\fnsymbol</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfnsymbol">\fnsymbol</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontencoding-416"><code>\fontencoding</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontfamily-417"><code>\fontfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontseries-418"><code>\fontseries</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontshape-419"><code>\fontshape</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfontsize-420"><code>\fontsize</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnote-176"><code>\footnote</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnote">\footnote</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotemark-177"><code>\footnotemark</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnotemark">\footnotemark</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotesize-406"><code>\footnotesize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfootnotetext-178"><code>\footnotetext</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfootnotetext">\footnotetext</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfrac-277"><code>\frac</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cframe-110"><code>\frame</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframe">\frame</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cframebox-111"><code>\framebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">\framebox (picture)</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cframebox-331"><code>\framebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cframebox">\framebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cfussy-227"><code>\fussy</code></a>: <a href="#_005cfussy">\fussy</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cheight-192"><code>\height</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chfill-319"><code>\hfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005chfill">\hfill</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chline-147"><code>\hline</code></a>: <a href="#_005chline">\hline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chrulefill-320"><code>\hrulefill</code></a>: <a href="#_005chrulefill">\hrulefill</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chspace-321"><code>\hspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005chspace">\hspace</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chuge-412"><code>\huge</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cHuge-413"><code>\Huge</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005chyphenation-228"><code>\hyphenation</code></a>: <a href="#_005chyphenation">\hyphenation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cinclude-351"><code>\include</code></a>: <a href="#_005cinclude">\include</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cincludeonly-352"><code>\includeonly</code></a>: <a href="#_005cincludeonly">\includeonly</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cindent-243"><code>\indent</code></a>: <a href="#_005cindent">\indent</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cinput-353"><code>\input</code></a>: <a href="#_005cinput">\input</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005citem-96"><code>\item</code></a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005citshape-375"><code>\itshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ckill-136"><code>\kill</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clabel-22"><code>\label</code></a>: <a href="#_005clabel">\label</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cLarge-410"><code>\Large</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clarge-409"><code>\large</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cLARGE-411"><code>\LARGE</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cldots-278"><code>\ldots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clefteqn-74"><code>\lefteqn</code></a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cline-112"><code>\line</code></a>: <a href="#_005cline">\line</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clinebreak-230"><code>\linebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005clinebreak">\linebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clinethickness-113"><code>\linethickness</code></a>: <a href="#_005clinethickness">\linethickness</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clistoffigures-358"><code>\listoffigures</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clistoftables-359"><code>\listoftables</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005clocation-204"><code>\location</code></a>: <a href="#_005clocation">\location</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-333"><code>\makebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakebox">\makebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029-114"><code>\makebox (picture)</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">\makebox (picture)</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmakelabels-205"><code>\makelabels</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmakelabels">\makelabels</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmaketitle-293"><code>\maketitle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmaketitle">\maketitle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmarkboth-305"><code>\markboth</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmarkboth">\markboth</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmarkright-306"><code>\markright</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmarkright">\markright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathbf-394"><code>\mathbf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathcal-399"><code>\mathcal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathit-397"><code>\mathit</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathnormal-398"><code>\mathnormal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathrm-393"><code>\mathrm</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathsf-395"><code>\mathsf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathtt-396"><code>\mathtt</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmathversion-400"><code>\mathversion</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmbox-334"><code>\mbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmbox">\mbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmdseries-378"><code>\mdseries</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmedskip-326"><code>\medskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmedskip">\medskip</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmulticolumn-148"><code>\multicolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmulticolumn">\multicolumn</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cmultiput-115"><code>\multiput</code></a>: <a href="#_005cmultiput">\multiput</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cname-206"><code>\name</code></a>: <a href="#_005cname">\name</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewcommand-27"><code>\newcommand</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewcommand">\newcommand</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewcounter-10"><code>\newcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewcounter">\newcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewenvironment-30"><code>\newenvironment</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewenvironment">\newenvironment</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewfont-36"><code>\newfont</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewfont">\newfont</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewlength-180"><code>\newlength</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewlength">\newlength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewline-232"><code>\newline</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewline">\newline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewpage-234"><code>\newpage</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewpage">\newpage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewsavebox-335"><code>\newsavebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewsavebox">\newsavebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnewtheorem-33"><code>\newtheorem</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnewtheorem">\newtheorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnocite-154"><code>\nocite</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnocite">\nocite</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnofiles-360"><code>\nofiles</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnoindent-245"><code>\noindent</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnoindent">\noindent</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnolinebreak-236"><code>\nolinebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnolinebreak">\nolinebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnopagebreak-237"><code>\nopagebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cnopagebreak">\nopagebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnormalfont-392"><code>\normalfont</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cnormalsize-408"><code>\normalsize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005conecolumn-53"><code>\onecolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005conecolumn">\onecolumn</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005copening-207"><code>\opening</code></a>: <a href="#_005copening">\opening</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005coval-116"><code>\oval</code></a>: <a href="#_005coval">\oval</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005coverbrace-279"><code>\overbrace</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005coverline-280"><code>\overline</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpagebreak-238"><code>\pagebreak</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagebreak">\pagebreak</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpagenumbering-302"><code>\pagenumbering</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpageref-23"><code>\pageref</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpageref">\pageref</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpagestyle-304"><code>\pagestyle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpagestyle">\pagestyle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpar-247"><code>\par</code></a>: <a href="#_005cpar">\par</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cparagraph-312"><code>\paragraph</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cparbox-336"><code>\parbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cparbox">\parbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpoptabs-138"><code>\poptabs</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cps-209"><code>\ps</code></a>: <a href="#_005cps">\ps</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cpushtabs-137"><code>\pushtabs</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cput-117"><code>\put</code></a>: <a href="#_005cput">\put</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005craggedbottom-54"><code>\raggedbottom</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005craggedleft-91"><code>\raggedleft</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedleft">\raggedleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005craggedright-84"><code>\raggedright</code></a>: <a href="#_005craggedright">\raggedright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005craisebox-337"><code>\raisebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005craisebox">\raisebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cref-25"><code>\ref</code></a>: <a href="#_005cref">\ref</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005crefstepcounter-12"><code>\refstepcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005crefstepcounter">\refstepcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005crmfamily-373"><code>\rmfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005croman-13"><code>\roman</code></a>: <a href="#_005croman">\roman</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cRoman-14"><code>\Roman</code></a>: <a href="#_005croman">\roman</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005crule-338"><code>\rule</code></a>: <a href="#_005crule">\rule</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csavebox-339"><code>\savebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005csavebox">\savebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csbox-340"><code>\sbox</code></a>: <a href="#_005csbox">\sbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cscriptsize-405"><code>\scriptsize</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cscshape-388"><code>\scshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cselectfont-421"><code>\selectfont</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csetcounter-16"><code>\setcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005csetcounter">\setcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csetlength-182"><code>\setlength</code></a>: <a href="#_005csetlength">\setlength</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csettodepth-186"><code>\settodepth</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettodepth">\settodepth</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csettoheight-187"><code>\settoheight</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettoheight">\settoheight</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csettowidth-188"><code>\settowidth</code></a>: <a href="#_005csettowidth">\settowidth</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csffamily-386"><code>\sffamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cshortstack-118"><code>\shortstack</code></a>: <a href="#_005cshortstack">\shortstack</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csignature-210"><code>\signature</code></a>: <a href="#_005csignature">\signature</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csloppy-240"><code>\sloppy</code></a>: <a href="#_005csloppy">\sloppy</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cslshape-384"><code>\slshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csmall-407"><code>\small</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csmallskip-327"><code>\smallskip</code></a>: <a href="#_005csmallskip">\smallskip</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csqrt-281"><code>\sqrt</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cstartbreaks-211"><code>\startbreaks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstartbreaks">\startbreaks</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cstepcounter-15"><code>\stepcounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstepcounter">\stepcounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cstopbreaks-212"><code>\stopbreaks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cstopbreaks">\stopbreaks</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csubparagraph-313"><code>\subparagraph</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csubsection-311"><code>\subsection</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csubsubsection-310"><code>\subsubsection</code></a>: <a href="#Sectioning">Sectioning</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005csymbol-347"><code>\symbol</code></a>: <a href="#Special-Characters">Special Characters</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctableofcontents-357"><code>\tableofcontents</code></a>: <a href="#Table-of-Contents">Table of Contents</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctelephone-213"><code>\telephone</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctelephone">\telephone</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextbf-379"><code>\textbf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextit-374"><code>\textit</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextmd-377"><code>\textmd</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextnormal-391"><code>\textnormal</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextrm-372"><code>\textrm</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsc-387"><code>\textsc</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsf-385"><code>\textsf</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextsl-383"><code>\textsl</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctexttt-389"><code>\texttt</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctextup-381"><code>\textup</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cthanks-298"><code>\thanks</code></a>: <a href="#_005cthanks">\thanks</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cthispagestyle-307"><code>\thispagestyle</code></a>: <a href="#_005cthispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctiny-404"><code>\tiny</code></a>: <a href="#Sizes">Sizes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctitle-300"><code>\title</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctitle">\title</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctoday-165"><code>\today</code></a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctotalheight-194"><code>\totalheight</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cttfamily-390"><code>\ttfamily</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctwocolumn-55"><code>\twocolumn</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctwocolumn">\twocolumn</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctypein-365"><code>\typein</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctypein">\typein</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005ctypeout-366"><code>\typeout</code></a>: <a href="#_005ctypeout">\typeout</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cunderbrace-282"><code>\underbrace</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cunderline-283"><code>\underline</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cupshape-382"><code>\upshape</code></a>: <a href="#Styles">Styles</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cusebox-341"><code>\usebox</code></a>: <a href="#_005cusebox">\usebox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cusecounter-18"><code>\usecounter</code></a>: <a href="#_005cusecounter">\usecounter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cusefont-422"><code>\usefont</code></a>: <a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">Low-level font commands</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cusepackage-46"><code>\usepackage</code></a>: <a href="#Document-Classes">Document Classes</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvalue-19"><code>\value</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvalue">\value</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvdots-284"><code>\vdots</code></a>: <a href="#Math-Miscellany">Math Miscellany</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvector-119"><code>\vector</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvector">\vector</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cverb-171"><code>\verb</code></a>: <a href="#_005cverb">\verb</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvfill-328"><code>\vfill</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvfill">\vfill</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvline-149"><code>\vline</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvline">\vline</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cvspace-329"><code>\vspace</code></a>: <a href="#_005cvspace">\vspace</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005cwidth-191"><code>\width</code></a>: <a href="#Predefined-lengths">Predefined lengths</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005e-264"><code>^</code></a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-_005f-263"><code>_</code></a>: <a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-array-61"><code>array</code></a>: <a href="#array">array</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-center-62"><code>center</code></a>: <a href="#center">center</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-description-67"><code>description</code></a>: <a href="#description">description</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-enumerate-69"><code>enumerate</code></a>: <a href="#enumerate">enumerate</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-eqnarray-71"><code>eqnarray</code></a>: <a href="#eqnarray">eqnarray</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-equation-75"><code>equation</code></a>: <a href="#equation">equation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-figure-78"><code>figure</code></a>: <a href="#figure">figure</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-flushleft-81"><code>flushleft</code></a>: <a href="#flushleft">flushleft</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-flushright-88"><code>flushright</code></a>: <a href="#flushright">flushright</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-itemize-95"><code>itemize</code></a>: <a href="#itemize">itemize</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-letter-98"><code>letter</code></a>: <a href="#letter">letter</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-list-99"><code>list</code></a>: <a href="#list">list</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-lrbox-332"><code>lrbox</code></a>: <a href="#lrbox">lrbox</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-minipage-101"><code>minipage</code></a>: <a href="#minipage">minipage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-picture-105"><code>picture</code></a>: <a href="#picture">picture</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-quotation-120"><code>quotation</code></a>: <a href="#quotation">quotation</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-quote-123"><code>quote</code></a>: <a href="#quote">quote</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-tabbing-126"><code>tabbing</code></a>: <a href="#tabbing">tabbing</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-table-140"><code>table</code></a>: <a href="#table">table</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-tabular-143"><code>tabular</code></a>: <a href="#tabular">tabular</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-thebibliography-150"><code>thebibliography</code></a>: <a href="#thebibliography">thebibliography</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-theorem-160"><code>theorem</code></a>: <a href="#theorem">theorem</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-titlepage-162"><code>titlepage</code></a>: <a href="#titlepage">titlepage</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-verbatim-166"><code>verbatim</code></a>: <a href="#verbatim">verbatim</a></li>
-<li><a href="#index-verse-173"><code>verse</code></a>: <a href="#verse">verse</a></li>
- </ul>
-<div class="contents">
-<h2>Table of Contents</h2>
-<ul>
-<li><a name="toc_Overview" href="#Overview">1 Overview of LaTeX and Local Guide</a>
-<li><a name="toc_Commands" href="#Commands">2 Commands</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#Counters">2.1 Counters</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005caddtocounter">2.1.1 \addtocounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005calph">2.1.2 \alph</a>
-<li><a href="#_005carabic">2.1.3 \arabic</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfnsymbol">2.1.4 \fnsymbol</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewcounter">2.1.5 \newcounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005crefstepcounter">2.1.6 \refstepcounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005croman">2.1.7 \roman</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cstepcounter">2.1.8 \stepcounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csetcounter">2.1.9 \setcounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cusecounter">2.1.10 \usecounter</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvalue">2.1.11 \value</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Cross-References">2.2 Cross References</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005clabel">2.2.1 \label</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpageref">2.2.2 \pageref</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cref">2.2.3 \ref</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Definitions">2.3 Definitions</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewcommand">2.3.1 \newcommand</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewenvironment">2.3.2 \newenvironment</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewtheorem">2.3.3 \newtheorem</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewfont">2.3.4 \newfont</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Document-Classes">2.4 Document Classes</a>
-<li><a href="#Layout">2.5 Layout</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cflushbottom">2.5.1 \flushbottom</a>
-<li><a href="#_005conecolumn">2.5.2 \onecolumn</a>
-<li><a href="#_005craggedbottom">2.5.3 \raggedbottom</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ctwocolumn">2.5.4 \twocolumn</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Environments">2.6 Environments</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#array">2.6.1 array</a>
-<li><a href="#center">2.6.2 center</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005ccentering">2.6.2.1 \centering</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#description">2.6.3 description</a>
-<li><a href="#enumerate">2.6.4 enumerate</a>
-<li><a href="#eqnarray">2.6.5 eqnarray</a>
-<li><a href="#equation">2.6.6 equation</a>
-<li><a href="#figure">2.6.7 figure</a>
-<li><a href="#flushleft">2.6.8 flushleft</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005craggedright">2.6.8.1 \raggedright</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#flushright">2.6.9 flushright</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005craggedleft">2.6.9.1 \raggedleft</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#itemize">2.6.10 itemize</a>
-<li><a href="#letter">2.6.11 letter</a>
-<li><a href="#list">2.6.12 list</a>
-<li><a href="#minipage">2.6.13 minipage</a>
-<li><a href="#picture">2.6.14 picture</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005ccircle">2.6.14.1 \circle</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cdashbox">2.6.14.2 \dashbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cframe">2.6.14.3 \frame</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cframebox-_0028picture_0029">2.6.14.4 \framebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cline">2.6.14.5 \line</a>
-<li><a href="#_005clinethickness">2.6.14.6 \linethickness</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmakebox-_0028picture_0029">2.6.14.7 \makebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmultiput">2.6.14.8 \multiput</a>
-<li><a href="#_005coval">2.6.14.9 \oval</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cput">2.6.14.10 \put</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cshortstack">2.6.14.11 \shortstack</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvector">2.6.14.12 \vector</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#quotation">2.6.15 quotation</a>
-<li><a href="#quote">2.6.16 quote</a>
-<li><a href="#tabbing">2.6.17 tabbing</a>
-<li><a href="#table">2.6.18 table</a>
-<li><a href="#tabular">2.6.19 tabular</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005ccline">2.6.19.1 \cline</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chline">2.6.19.2 \hline</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmulticolumn">2.6.19.3 \multicolumn</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvline">2.6.19.4 \vline</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#thebibliography">2.6.20 thebibliography</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cbibitem">2.6.20.1 \bibitem</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ccite">2.6.20.2 \cite</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnocite">2.6.20.3 \nocite</a>
-<li><a href="#Using-BibTeX">2.6.20.4 Using BibTeX</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#theorem">2.6.21 theorem</a>
-<li><a href="#titlepage">2.6.22 titlepage</a>
-<li><a href="#verbatim">2.6.23 verbatim</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cverb">2.6.23.1 \verb</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#verse">2.6.24 verse</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Footnotes">2.7 Footnotes</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cfootnote">2.7.1 \footnote</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfootnotemark">2.7.2 \footnotemark</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfootnotetext">2.7.3 \footnotetext</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Lengths">2.8 Lengths</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewlength">2.8.1 \newlength</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csetlength">2.8.2 \setlength</a>
-<li><a href="#_005caddtolength">2.8.3 \addtolength</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csettodepth">2.8.4 \settodepth</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csettoheight">2.8.5 \settoheight</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csettowidth">2.8.6 \settowidth</a>
-<li><a href="#Predefined-lengths">2.8.7 Predefined lengths</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Letters">2.9 Letters</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005caddress">2.9.1 \address</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ccc">2.9.2 \cc</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cclosing">2.9.3 \closing</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cencl">2.9.4 \encl</a>
-<li><a href="#_005clocation">2.9.5 \location</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmakelabels">2.9.6 \makelabels</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cname">2.9.7 \name</a>
-<li><a href="#_005copening">2.9.8 \opening</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cps">2.9.9 \ps</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csignature">2.9.10 \signature</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cstartbreaks">2.9.11 \startbreaks</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cstopbreaks">2.9.12 \stopbreaks</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ctelephone">2.9.13 \telephone</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Line-_0026-Page-Breaking">2.10 Line &amp; Page Breaking</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005c_005c">2.10.1 \\</a>
-<li><a href="#_005c_002d-_0028hyphenation_0029">2.10.2 \-</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ccleardoublepage">2.10.3 \cleardoublepage</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cclearpage">2.10.4 \clearpage</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cenlargethispage">2.10.5 \enlargethispage</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfussy">2.10.6 \fussy</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chyphenation">2.10.7 \hyphenation</a>
-<li><a href="#_005clinebreak">2.10.8 \linebreak</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewline">2.10.9 \newline</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewpage">2.10.10 \newpage</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnolinebreak">2.10.11 \nolinebreak</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnopagebreak">2.10.12 \nopagebreak</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpagebreak">2.10.13 \pagebreak</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csloppy">2.10.14 \sloppy</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Making-Paragraphs">2.11 Making Paragraphs</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cindent">2.11.1 \indent</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnoindent">2.11.2 \noindent</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpar">2.11.3 \par</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Margin-Notes">2.12 Margin Notes</a>
-<li><a href="#Math-Formulae">2.13 Math Formulae</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#Subscripts-_0026-Superscripts">2.13.1 Subscripts &amp; Superscripts</a>
-<li><a href="#Math-Symbols">2.13.2 Math Symbols</a>
-<li><a href="#Spacing-in-Math-Mode">2.13.3 Spacing in Math Mode</a>
-<li><a href="#Math-Miscellany">2.13.4 Math Miscellany</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Modes">2.14 Modes</a>
-<li><a href="#Page-Styles">2.15 Page Styles</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cmaketitle">2.15.1 \maketitle</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cauthor">2.15.2 \author</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cdate">2.15.3 \date</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cthanks">2.15.4 \thanks</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ctitle">2.15.5 \title</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpagenumbering">2.15.6 \pagenumbering</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cpagestyle">2.15.7 \pagestyle</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmarkboth">2.15.8 \markboth</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmarkright">2.15.9 \markright</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cthispagestyle">2.15.10 \thispagestyle</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Sectioning">2.16 Sectioning</a>
-<li><a href="#Spaces-_0026-Boxes">2.17 Spaces &amp; Boxes</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cdotfill">2.17.1 \dotfill</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chfill">2.17.2 \hfill</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chrulefill">2.17.3 \hrulefill</a>
-<li><a href="#_005chspace">2.17.4 \hspace</a>
-<li><a href="#_005caddvspace">2.17.5 \addvspace</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cbigskip">2.17.6 \bigskip</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmedskip">2.17.7 \medskip</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csmallskip">2.17.8 \smallskip</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvfill">2.17.9 \vfill</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cvspace">2.17.10 \vspace</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cfbox">2.17.11 \fbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cframebox">2.17.12 \framebox</a>
-<li><a href="#lrbox">2.17.13 lrbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmakebox">2.17.14 \makebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cmbox">2.17.15 \mbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cnewsavebox">2.17.16 \newsavebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cparbox">2.17.17 \parbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005craisebox">2.17.18 \raisebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005crule">2.17.19 \rule</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csavebox">2.17.20 \savebox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005csbox">2.17.21 \sbox</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cusebox">2.17.22 \usebox</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Special-Characters">2.18 Special Characters</a>
-<li><a href="#Splitting-the-Input">2.19 Splitting the Input</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005cinclude">2.19.1 \include</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cincludeonly">2.19.2 \includeonly</a>
-<li><a href="#_005cinput">2.19.3 \input</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Starting-_0026-Ending">2.20 Starting &amp; Ending</a>
-<li><a href="#Table-of-Contents">2.21 Table of Contents</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005caddcontentsline">2.21.1 \addcontentsline</a>
-<li><a href="#_005caddtocontents">2.21.2 \addtocontents</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Terminal-Input_002fOutput">2.22 Terminal Input/Output</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#_005ctypein">2.22.1 \typein</a>
-<li><a href="#_005ctypeout">2.22.2 \typeout</a>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a href="#Typefaces">2.23 Typefaces</a>
-<ul>
-<li><a href="#Styles">2.23.1 \Styles</a>
-<li><a href="#Sizes">2.23.2 Sizes</a>
-<li><a href="#Low_002dlevel-font-commands">2.23.3 Low-level font commands</a>
-</li></ul>
-</li></ul>
-<li><a name="toc_Parameters" href="#Parameters">3 Parameters</a>
-<li><a name="toc_Concept-Index" href="#Concept-Index">Concept Index</a>
-<li><a name="toc_Command-Index" href="#Command-Index">Command Index</a>
-</li></ul>
-</div>
-
-</body></html>
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f8a41d1728..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf/doc/latex/base/latex2e.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ